Cranex Tome FL Servicemanual

Cranex Tome
and
Cranex Tome Ceph
Dental X-ray Units
Service Manual
Medical Device Directive

93/42/EEC
October 2005
Document code 8200629
Manufactured by:
SOREDEX
P.O. Box 148
04301 TUUSULA, FINLAND
tel. +358 45 7228 2500

fax +358 9 701 5263
Doc. code 8200629 I

Soredex endeavours to produce product documentation that is accurate
and up to date. However, our policy of continual product development
may result in changes to products that are not reflected in the product
documentation. Therefore, this document should not be regarded as an
infallible guide to current product specifications.
Soredex maintains the right to make changes and alterations without
prior notice.
II Cranex Tome Service Manual

General Contents
1. General
Contents ............................................................................................................ 1-i
Introduction ....................................................................................................... 1-1
Associated documentation ............................................................................... 1-1
Warnings and precautions ................................................................................ 1-1
Unauthorized Modifications, Disclaimer ........................................................... 1-4
2. Unit Description
Contents ............................................................................................................ 2-i
The Cranex Tome ............................................................................................. 2-1
Mechanical description ..................................................................................... 2-6
Operating the unit ............................................................................................. 2-8
Electrical description ......................................................................................... 2-9
How the unit works ......................................................................................... 2-25
Symbols, markings that appear on the unit .................................................... 2-29
3. Covers and cover removal

Contents ............................................................................................................ 3-i
The unit covers ................................................................................................. 3-1
Removing the covers ........................................................................................ 3-4
4. Circuit boards
Contents ............................................................................................................ 4-i
N100 Connector Unit 1 (CU1) ....................................................................... 4-1-1
N200 Auxiliary Voltage Supply (AVS) ............................................................ 4-2-1
N300 Z-Motor Controller (ZMC) .................................................................... 4-3-1
N600 Imaging controller (IMC) ...................................................................... 4-4-1
N650 RAM Memory Module (RMM) .............................................................. 4-5-1
N660/N665 Flash Memory Modules (FMMA/FMMAB).................................. 4-6-1
N700 Motor Controller (MC) .......................................................................... 4-7-1
N800 External Connectors Interface (ECI) .................................................... 4-8-1
N900 Connector Unit (CU2) .......................................................................... 4-9-1
X-Ray Generator ......................................................................................... 4-10-1
N1000 High Voltage Supply (HVS) .............................................................. 4-11-1
N1100 High Voltage Controller (HVC) ......................................................... 4-12-1
N1200 Cassette Head Controller (CHC) ..................................................... 4-13-1
N1400 Tubehead Controller (THC) ............................................................. 4-14-1
N1500 Tubehead (TH) and N1550 Diode Hybride (DH) ............................. 4-15-1
N1600 Display and Keyboard Interface (DKI) ............................................. 4-16-1
N1700 Ceph Interface (CI) .......................................................................... 4-17-1
N1800 Ceph Filter Position Indicators (CFPI) ............................................. 4-18-1
N1900/1901/2200/2201 Ceph Cassette Sensors (CCS1/2) ....................... 4-19-1
N2000 Line Interface Unit (LIU) ................................................................... 4-20-1
N2100 Top/Bottom Sensor (TBS) ................................................................ 4-21-1
Doc. code 8200629 III

N2300 Rotation Position Sensor (RPS) ...................................................... 4-22-1
N2400 Cassette Type Sensor (CTS) ........................................................... 4-23-1
N2500 Opto-Sensor X, Y, C (OS) ................................................................ 4-24-1
N2600 Vertical Position Sensors (VPS) ...................................................... 4-25-1
N2700 Secondary Motor Controller ............................................................. 4-26-1
N2750 Primary Slit Motor Driver .................................................................. 4-27-1
N2800 Secondary Slit Motor Driver ............................................................. 4-28-1
5. Service Codes
Contents ............................................................................................................ 5-i
Introduction ....................................................................................................... 5-1
Code types........................................................................................................ 5-1
Using Service Codes ........................................................................................ 5-2
List of Service Codes ........................................................................................ 5-9
Factory and installation setups ....................................................................... 5-10
Service Code Descriptions ............................................................................. 5-11
Movement and alignment codes .................................................................... 5-72
6. Using a PC with the Cranex Tome

Contents ............................................................................................................ 6-i
Introduction ....................................................................................................... 6-1
PC requirements ............................................................................................... 6-1
Connecting the PC to the Tome ....................................................................... 6-1
Down loading information from the Tome ......................................................... 6-2
7. Troubleshooting
Contents ............................................................................................................ 7-i
Warnings and precautions ................................................................................ 7-1
Trouble shooting principles ............................................................................... 7-2
Problems during start-up ................................................................................ 7-11
Problems during use ....................................................................................... 7-21
Other problems that may occur during use .................................................... 7-47
Blown fuses .................................................................................................... 7-49
Generator problems ........................................................................................ 7-67
8. Mechanical Parts
Contents ............................................................................................................ 8-i
Replacing the tube head................................................................................... 8-1
9. Annual Service
Contents ............................................................................................................ 9-i
Annual tests and inspections ............................................................................ 9-1
Appendix A: Technical Specifications

Appendix B: Installation and set-up manual
Appendix C: Changes to new model
IV Cranex Tome Service Manual

1. General
1. General
Contents
Introduction ......................................................................................................... 1-1
Associated documentation ................................................................................ 1-1
Warnings and precautions ................................................................................. 1-1
General precautions .......................................................................................... 1-1
Radiation Safety ................................................................................................ 1-2
Mechanical safety .............................................................................................. 1-2
Electrical Safety ................................................................................................ 1-2
Electrostatic discharge ...................................................................................... 1-3
Explosion Hazard .............................................................................................. 1-3
Unauthorized Modifications .............................................................................. 1-4
Disclaimer ............................................................................................................ 1-4
Doc. code 8200629 1-i

1. General
1 - ii Cranex Tome Service Manual

1. General
Introduction
This manual describes how to service the Cranex Tome
and Cranex Tome Ceph. The manual includes servicing
information for all versions of the Cranex Tome and
Tome Ceph, the Gendex ORALIX multiscan and
multiscan ceph and the Satelec X-mind and X-mind
ceph.
Associated documentation
The Cranex Tome User's manual.
The Cranex Tome Installation manual.
The Cranex Tome Spare-parts manual.
Servicing warnings and precautions
General precautions
Only Soredex trained and approved service personnel
are allowed to service the Cranex Tome and Tome
Ceph.
Before attempting to service the unit make sure that

you know how to operate it. Read the Cranex Tome
user's manual.
Only use original Soredex spare parts when repairing

the unit or replacing parts.
The unit is factory set to operate using a 230VAC power

supply. If the unit is to be used with a 115VAC power
supply jumpers must be attached to the N200 and
N1000 boards. Information on how to install theses
jumpers is given in the Cranex Tome installation
manual.
Before a new unit can be operated cassette sensitivity

stickers must be attached to all the panoramic cas-
settes that will be used with the unit, and the unit cali-
brated to work with these cassettes. Refer to the user's
manual, section "Setting up a new unit", for information
on how to do this.
Doc. code 8200629 1-1

1. General
Radiation Safety
Before servicing the unit familiarise yourself with local
and national radiation safety standards and require-
ments relating to dental x-ray equipment.
If you need to take test exposures you MUST take

adequate steps to protect yourself from radiation. Use a
lead apron or by stand behind a suitable radiation
shield.
In addition, when taking an exposure stand at least two
metres (six feet) from the unit.
Mechanical safety
Switch the main power supply off before repairing or
replacing mechanical parts.
Be careful when operating the unit not to get body parts

or clothing trapped between moving parts.
The aperture plate in the collimator is made of lead (Pb)

which is a toxic material. Do not touch it with your bare
hands.
DO NOT open the tube head.

There are no serviceable parts, mechanical or electri-
cal, inside the tube head.
Electrical Safety
Switch the main power supply off before repairing or
replacing parts.
Live electrical terminals are deadly.

Be sure that power switch is OFF and that precautions
have been taken before opening access doors, remov-
ing enclosures and panels, or attaching accessories.
This equipment should be used only in areas that are

provided with a protective earth connection to ensure
an equipotential ground connection.
Before cleaning or disinfecting the unit switch the main

power supply off.
1-2 Cranex Tome Service Manual

1. General
Electrostatic discharge
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) can damage or destroy
electronic components.
A static electricity charge builds up in everyone. The
build up is due to movement, humidity, the person's
clothing and the conductivity of the floor. If anyone
charged with static electricity touches a electronic com-
ponent the static electricity will discharge through the
component and can damage or destroy it. Note that
components damaged by electrostatic discharge can
fail at a later date.
When servicing the unit take proper precautions to

avoid electrostatic build up and discharge (ESD). Follow
the recommendations for the prevention of ESD that
are used in the country in which you are working. If no
recommendations are available follow the guide lines
below.
Before handling any electrical parts or components

make sure that any static electricity charge that has
built up in you body is discharged.
When handling electrical parts or components use an

elasticated wrist wrap which is connected to a ground
point through a 1 Mohm current limiting cable. For a
ground point use water pipes, radiators or other objects
that are known to be connected to the ground. Also use
a cable to connect the unit to the same ground potential
as the wrist wrap.
If an antistatic mat is used, connect the wrist wrap to
the carpet and the carpet to the ground potential.
Wash the wrist wrap and check that it is good condition
frequently.
Explosion Hazard
Certain disinfectants and cleaning agents may vaporize
to form an explosive vapour. If such chemicals are used
the vapour should be allowed to disperse before switch-
ing the unit on.
Doc. code 8200629 1-3

1. General
Operating warnings and precautions

The Soredex Cranex Tome x-ray unit must only be used
to take dental, TMJ and cephalometric (optional) x-ray
exposures. It must not be used for any other purpose.
The unit or its accessories must not be modified, al-

tered or remanufactured in any way. Repairing shall be
performed by Soredex authorized service only.
WARNING:
The x-ray unit may be dangerous to both patient and
operator unless safe exposure values are used and
correct operating procedures are observed.
When taking exposures operators must protect them-

selves from radiation by using a lead apron or by stand-
ing behind a suitable radiation shield.
When taking exposures operators must stand at least

two metres (six feet) from the patient.
Operators must be able to see and hear the patient

during an exposure.
Operators must be able to see the exposure warning

lights and hear the exposure warning signal during
exposures. If the X-ray unit is located in such a position
that the operator cannot see the exposure warning
lights, an external exposure warning light must be used.
As radiation safety and protection requirements vary

from country to country and state to state it is the re-
sponsibility of the operator to ensure that all local and
national radiation safety and protection requirements
are met.
Never leave cassettes open in daylight.
Avoid taking exposures of pregnant women.
The use of ACCESSORY equipment not complying with

the equivalent safety requirements of this equipment
may lead to a reduced level of safety of the resulting
system. Consideration relating to the choice shall in-
clude:

1. General
– use of the accessory in the PATIENT VICINITY
– evidence that the safety certification of the ACCES-

SORY has been performed in accordance to the
appropriate IEC 601-1 or IEC 950 and/or IEC 601-
1-1 harmonized national standard.
– only RS-232C serial interface cable, provided by the

manufacturer shall be used.
Unauthorized Modifications
Unauthorized changes or modifications to any part of
the unit or its equipment can have hazardous conse-
quences. Changes or modifications must not be made
unless specifically authorized by Soredex.
When properly assembled with a compatible beam-

limiting device, the diagnostic source assembly will fully
meet the United States of America Federal Perform-
ance Standards for Diagnostic X-Ray Systems and
Their Components (C21FR 1020. 30-32) provided no
components or parts are removed from the unit and no
unauthorized adjustments are made to the beam-limit-
ing device or tube housing assembly.
Never remove or remanufacture any part of the tube
housing assembly or beam-limiting device.
Never adjust any part of the beam-limiting device un-
less under the direction of Soredex or their authorized
distributor.
Doc. code 8200629 1-5

1. General
Disclaimer
Soredex shall have no liability for consequential dam-
ages, personal injury, loss, damage or expense directly
or indirectly arising from the use of its products. No
agent, distributor or other party is authorized to make
any warranty or other liability on behalf of Soredex with
respect to its products.

2. Unit Description
2. Unit Description
Contents
The Cranex Tome ................................................................................................ 2-1
The main parts and assemblies of the Tome Pan ............................................ 2-3
The main parts and assemplies of the Tome Pan/ceph ................................... 2-4
Identifying the unit version ................................................................................ 2-5
Mechanical description ...................................................................................... 2-6
Movement axes and moving assemblies ......................................................... 2-7
Operating the unit ............................................................................................... 2-8
Electrical description ......................................................................................... 2-9
Tome circuit boards .......................................................................................... 2-9
Circuit board location ...................................................................................... 2-10
Power supply .................................................................................................. 2-13
Unit control - Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) ............................................... 2-14
Motors and motor control ............................................................................... 2-16
Position control ............................................................................................... 2-17
Diagram showing board location on the wiring diagrams .............................. 2-18
Wiring diagram - sheet 1 ................................................................................ 2-19
Power supply and grounding diagram ............................................................ 2-24
How the unit works ........................................................................................... 2-25
Unit functions during use ................................................................................ 2-26
Main functions during the program selection state ........................................ 2-26
Main functions during the patient positioning state ........................................ 2-27
Main functions during the exposure state ...................................................... 2-28
Symbols, markings that appear on the unit ................................................... 2-29
Doc. code 8200629 2-i

2. Unit Description

2. Unit Description
The Cranex Tome

The Soredex Cranex Tome is an extra-oral x-ray unit
designed to take exposures of the dento-maxillofacial
region. It cannot be used to take x-ray exposures of any
other part of the human anatomy.
Two main versions of the Cranex Tome are available:

- Cranex Tome Pan
This version takes panoramic, scanographic and
tomographic images
- Cranex Tome Pan/Ceph

This version takes panoramic, scanographic , tomo-
graphic and cephalographic images.
There are several OEM versions of the units:

- Gendex Oralix multiscan
Equivalent to the Cranex Tome Pan
- Gendex Oralix multiscan ceph

Equivalent to the Cranex Tome Pan/Ceph
- Satelec x-mind Tome

Equivalent to the Cranex Tome Pan
- Satelec x-mind Tome ceph

Equivalent to the Cranex Tome Pan/Ceph
The OEM versions are mechanically and electrically the

same as the Soredex Cranex Tome. The only differ-
ences between the versions are the product name
labels and stickers.
The panoramic version of the unit uses standard flat 15

cm x 30 cm panoramic cassettes.
Doc. code 8200629 2-1

2. Unit Description
Cephalometric units for three different film sizes are

available
- Standard metric
Uses 18 x 24 cm cassette to take symmetric vertical
(SV), asymmetric vertical (AV) and asymmetric
horizontal (AH) exposures.
Uses 24 x 30 cm cassette to take asymmetric verti-
cal (AV) exposures.
- Large metric
Uses 24 x 30 cm cassette to take asymmetric verti-
cal (AV), symmetric vertical (SV) and asymmetric
horizontal (AH) exposures.
- Inch
Uses 8 x 10 in cassette to take asymmetric vertical
(AV), symmetric vertical (SV) and asymmetric hori-
zontal (AH) exposures.
Pan/ceph units can be supplied with the ceph arm
mounted on either the left- or right-hand side of the
column.
The ceph arm is also available as a retrofit kit that can

be installed to a pan unit that was not originally fitted
with a ceph arm.
All units are factory set to operate using a 230 VAC

power supply. For countries where the power supply is
115 VAC, a 115 VAC conversion kit is supplied with the
unit to convert it to that voltage.
For information on how to instal the 115 VAC conver-
sion kit, refer to the installation and setup manual.

2. Unit Description
The main parts and assemblies of the Tome Pan
Support arm Sliding assembly Head support
Rotating
assembly
C-arm
Rotating unit
On/off switch
Tube head
C-arm
Cassette head assembly
Control panel
Patient support mechanism
Moving column
Fixed column
Doc. code 8200629 2-3

2. Unit Description
The main parts and assemplies of the Tome Pan/ceph
Ceph head support Ceph arm
Cassette holder
Soft tissue filter knob

2. Unit Description
Identifying the unit version

The unit type/serial number label is located at the rear
of the unit, on the right-hand side, above the main
power cable. The type number allows the version of the
unit to be identified.
Product identification
Country or language code

00 General (English) 07 Russia
01 UK only 08 Italy
02 German 09 Spain
03 USA 10 Portugal
04 Australia 2X OEM version
05 France 3X OEM version
06 Finland and Sweden
X-ray tube version

0 OPX/105
1 DE 100/15ö
2 D-051
3 XL 90
Indicates unit version

0 No cephalometric unit
1 Left-hand ceph - standard metric cassettes
2 Left-hand ceph - large metric cassettes
3 Left-hand ceph - inch size cassettes
4 Right-hand ceph - standard metric cassettes
5 Right-hand ceph - large metric cassettes
6 Right-hand ceph - inch size cassettes
Reserved for future options
The production version
Doc. code 8200629 2-5

2. Unit Description
Mechanical description
The Cranex Tome comprises a two part column, a
support arm, a sliding assembly and rotating unit. The
lower part of the two-part column, the fixed column, is
attached to the wall and floor. The upper part of the
column, the moving column, is able to slide up and
down (Z-axis) over the fixed column. The support arm is
located at the top of the moving column.
Attached to the underside of the support arm is the
sliding assembly and attached to this is the rotating
unit. The rotating unit comprises the rotating assembly
and the C-arm assembly. The sliding unit is able to slide
along the support arm and allows the rotating unit to
move towards or away from the column (Y-axis). The
rotating unit is able to rotate (R-axis) and slide to the left
and right (X-axis). The C-arm assembly, which com-
prises the C-arm, the tube head assembly and the
cassette head assembly, is able to tilt (V-axis). The
cassette carriage is also able to move (C-axis) during
exposures.
The x-ray tube is a fixed tungsten anode type with focal

spot of 0.4 - 0.5mm, depending on tube type. The
maximum anode voltage is 85kV and maximum current
is 10mA. X-ray beam filtration is 2.7 mm Al minimum.
Additional gadolinium filtration is used for tomography
imaging programs.
The patient's head is held in position with a four-point

holding system. The head support holds the temples
and the forehead and the patient support assembly
supports the chin or lips.
The unit can be supplied with an optional ceph unit that

can be mounted either on the left or right-hand side of
the column. The side must be specified when the unit is
ordered.
The unit is normally attached to a wall, but a stand (pt.

no. 9801755) is available if the unit needs to be free
standing.

2. Unit Description
Movement axes and moving assemblies
Doc. code 8200629 2-7

2. Unit Description
Operating the unit

The on/off switch is located on the left-hand side of the
column above the control panel.
The unit is operated by pressing keys on the control
panel and by carrying out manual operations.
Control panel operations include:

- procedure and program selection
- kV selection
- patient size selection
- exposure time selection (ceph units only)
- focal trough positioning (arrow keys)
- height adjustment (arrow keys)
Manual operations include:

- aperture selection (pan, tomo, ceph)
- chin rest position (up or down)
- cassette shield position (narrow beam or wide beam)
- mirror position (open or closed)
- cassette head position (pan or ceph exposures)
- cephalometric soft tissue filter adjustment
Information on the display tells users what to do and

warns them if they make mistakes. If the user selects a
wrong setting the unit cannot be used until the correct
setting is selected.
For information on how to operate the unit refer to the
user's manual.
Electrical description
A complete description of all the circuit boards is given
in the section "Circuit boards".

2. Unit Description
Tome circuit boards

Number Name Quantity
N100CU1 Connector Unit 1 1
N200AVS Auxiliary Voltage Supply 1
N300ZMC Z-motor Controller 1
N400RBI Remote Box Interface 1 Optional
N600IMC Imaging Controller 1
N650RMM Ram Memory Module 1 On N600
N660FMMA Flash Mem Module (Mem A) 1 On N600
N665FMMAB Flash Mem Module (Mem Ab) 2 On N600
(N665 is the same as N660 but with four flash memory chips)
N700MC Motor Controller 1
N800ECI External Connectors Interface 1
N900CU2 Connector Unit 2 1
N1000-2HVS High Voltage Supply 1
N1100-1HVC High Voltage Controller 1
N1200CHC Cass Head Controller 1
N1400THC Tubehead Controller 1
N1500TH Tubehead 1 Inside tubehead
N1550DH Diode Hybrid 7 Inside tubehead
N1600DKI Display And Keyboard Interface 1
N2000LIU Line Interface Unit 1
N2100TBS Top/Bottom Sensor 2
N2300RPS Rotation Position Sensor 1
N2400CTS Cassette Type Sensor 1
N2500OS Opto Sensor (X/Y/C) 3
N2600VPS Vertical Position Sensors 1
Ceph unit circuit boards
N1700CI Ceph Interface 1 Ceph Metric/Inch

N1800CFPI Ceph Filter Position Indicators 1 Ceph Metric/Inch
N1900CCS1M Ceph Cass Sensors 1 Metric 1 Ceph Metric
N1901CCS1I Ceph Cass Sensors 1 Inch 1 Ceph Inch
N2200CCS2M Ceph Cass Sensors 2 Metric 1 Ceph Metric
N2201CCS2I Ceph Cass Sensors 2 Inch 1 Ceph Inch
Doc. code 8200629 2-9

2. Unit Description
Circuit board location
2 - 10 Cranex Tome Service Manual

2. Unit Description
Doc. code 8200629 2 - 11

2. Unit Description

2. Unit Description
Power supply
Power is supplied to the unit through the N2000 board
(Line interface unit). From N2000 power is routed to the
N200 board (Auxiliary voltage supply) which is a
switched mode power supply. This board generates
low-voltage operating powers, +9V, ±19V and +28V, for
all the boards in the unit. The low-voltage powers are
distributed via N100 (Connector unit 1) and N900 (Con-
nector unit 2). The N200 board also supplies high
voltage, 230V (115V), directly to the x-ray generator.
The x-ray generator comprises N1000 (High voltage
supply), N1100 (High voltage controller), N1400 (Tube
head controller) and N1500 (Tubehead). Note that the
N1500 board is located inside the tubehead and cannot
be accessed.
A detailed power supply and grounding diagram is on

page 2.24.
Simplified power supply diagram
Doc. code 8200629 2 - 13

2. Unit Description
Unit control - Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)

The unit is controlled by a microprocessor on the N600
board (Imaging controller) that continually monitors and
controls the operation of the unit. A serial peripheral
interface communication protocol (SPI - RS485) is used
to monitor most of the unit functions.
The microprocessor:
- monitors optosensors and microswitches
- monitors panel keys
- controls unit movements during exposures
- starts, controls and stops x-ray generation
- guides and controls user actions
- monitors safety.
The necessary unit settings and parameters for all the

imaging programs are stored on the MEM boards
(N660/N665 memory modules) which are located on
the N600 board.

2. Unit Description
Unit block diagram
Doc. code 8200629 2 - 15

2. Unit Description
Motors and motor control

There are five stepper motors and one DC-motor in the
unit. The stepper motors drive the unit in the X, Y, R, V
and C directions.
During exposure these motors are controlled by N600
through the N700 board (Motor controller).
During program selection and patient positioning the
motors are activated by N1600 (Display and keyboard
interface) and controlled by N600 through N700.
Note that if the C-arm or cassette carriage are moved
during exposure setup they will automatically return to
the PIO position. This automatic return feature can be
switched off. Refer to service code 9700.
The DC-motor is used to adjust the height of the unit, Z
direction, and this motor is activated directly by N1600
and controlled by N300 (Z-motor controller).

2. Unit Description
Position control
The positions of the mechanical assemblies are moni-
tored by optosensors and microswitches.
The optosensors only respond to start or stop positions
and do not control unit movements. (N600 controls
movement duration and speed). The optosensors en-
sure that the mechanical assemblies are in the correct
PIO (Patient in/out) or start position for the required
exposure.
The statuses of the optosensors are monitored continu-
ally by N600.
Cassette type and cassette carriage position are moni-

tored, via the N1200 board (Cassette head controller),
by optosensors on the N2400 board (Cassette type
sensors) and the N2500 board (Cassette carriage
sensors) respectively.
The position of the primary aperture (the selected slot)

is monitored, via connector units N100 and N900, by
sensors mounted on the N1400 board (Tubehead con-
troller).
The C-arm rotation position is monitored by

optosensors on the N2300 board (Rotation sensors)
and the angle of the C-arm by the N2600 board (Verti-
cal sensors). The upper and lower height limits of the
unit are monitored by optosensors on two N2100
boards (Top/bottom sensors).
The positions of the mirror, the chin rest, the cassette

shields and the cassette carriage (pan or ceph) are all
monitored by microswitches.
In the cephalostat the position and orientation of the

different ceph cassettes are monitored by
microswitches on the cephalometric cassette sensor
boards via the N1700 board (Ceph interface). The
board used will depend on whether the ceph unit is
mounted on the left or right and whether the unit is for
metric or inch cassettes.
The boards are:
- N1900 - left metric
- N1901 - left inch
- N2200 - right metric
- N2201 - right inch
Doc. code 8200629 2 - 17

2. Unit Description
Diagram showing board location on the wiring diagrams

The dashed areas indicate the sheets of the wiring
diagram on which the boards appear.

2. Unit Description
Wiring diagram - sheet 1
Doc. code 8200629 2 - 19

2. Unit Description

2. Unit Description
Doc. code 8200629 2 - 21

2. Unit Description

2. Unit Description
Doc. code 8200629 2 - 23

2. Unit Description
Power supply and grounding diagram

2. Unit Description
How the unit works

The user presses control panel keys to select an
imaging program. The microprocessor (N600) monitors
the keys pressed and "identifies" the selected program
from the program information that is stored in the
program modules (N650 and N660).
The program information includes all the settings that
the unit must be set to for the particular exposure pro-
gram selected.
The microprocessor then compares the existing unit
settings with the required program parameter settings
for the exposure program selected. If an existing setting
is not the same as the program parameter setting an
information message will be sent to the display so the
user knows what setting has to be changed.
For example, if the chin rest is in the upper position and
the program selected requires the chin rest to be in the
lower position, the microprocessor will "detect" that the
chin rest is in the wrong position and send an informa-
tion message to the display telling the user to change
the position.
When the exposure button is pressed to take an expo-

sure, the microprocessor activates and then controls
the stepper motors so that the unit moves correctly for
the program selected. All information on stepper motor
movement duration, speed and direction is included in
the program parameters.
Doc. code 82006290 2 - 25

2. Unit Description
Unit functions during use

The functions and operations of the boards and SPI
vary according to the state in which the unit is in.
Main functions during the program selection state

2. Unit Description
Main functions during the patient positioning state
Doc. code 82006290 2 - 27

2. Unit Description
Main functions during the exposure state

2. Unit Description
Symbols, markings that appear on the unit
On (power)
Power on symbol
Off (power)
Power off symbol
Radiographic control
Exposure button symbol
Stand-by or preparatory state for a part of equipment

Exposure button enabled (unlocked) symbol
"Off" only for a part of equipment

Exposure button disabled (locked) symbol
Hand-held switch
This symbol identifies the connector for the exposure
switch.
This symbol identifies the connector for an external

exposure warning device.
Attention, consult accompanying documents

The RS232C connector for a PC. See also the section
"Warnings and precautions"
This symbol and the letter R (Return) identify the return

button. Press this button to drive the C-arm to the pa-
tient in/out (PIO) position.
Ionizing radiation
Radiation symbol. Appears on the display during an
exposure when radiation is generated.
Connection point for the neutral conductor on perma-

nently installed equipment.
Connection point for the live conductor on permanently

installed equipment.
Doc. code 82006290 2 - 29

2. Unit Description
Alternating current
Protective earth (ground)
Earth (ground)
Dangerous voltage
Type B equipment
CE (0537) symbol
MDD 93/42/EEC
UL Classification Symbol
DENTAL X-RAY EQUIPMENT MODEL SRC1

CLASSIFIED BY UNDERWRITERS
LABORATORIES INC.
WITH RESPECT TO ELECTRIC
SHOCK, FIRE, MECHANICAL AND
OTHER SPECIFIED HAZARDS ONLY
IN ACCORDANCE WITH UL 2601-1 AND
CAN/CSA C22.2 NO 601.1 - M90
5D42
The enter (E) key. Press this key to drive the C-arm to
the patient in/out (PIO) position.
The clear (C) key. Press this key to remove information

from the display
The up and down arrows are on the height adjusting

keys and indicate the direction of travel.
The left and right arrows are on the focal trough posi-
tioning keys and indicate the direction of travel.

2. Unit Description
Symbols that appear on the aperture labels
Standard metric version
1 Normal height narrow beam aperture

2 Reduced height narrow beam aperture
3 Low filtration tomograph aperture
4 High filtration tomograph aperture
5 Asymmetric vertical aperture for 18 x 24 cm film.
6 Asymmetric horizontal aperture for 18 x 24 cm
film.
7 Symmetric vertical aperture for 18 x 24 cm film.
Large metric version

5 Symmetric vertical aperture for 24 x 30 cm film.
film.
Doc. code 82006290 2 - 31

2. Unit Description
Inch version

5 Asymmetric vertical aperture for 8 x 10 in film.
6 Symmetric vertical aperture for 8 x 10 in film.
7 Asymmetric horizontal aperture for 8 x 10 in film.

3. Covers and cover removal Contents

Contents
The unit covers ................................................................................................. 3-1
Panoramic Covers ........................................................................................ 3-1
Cephalostat Covers ...................................................................................... 3-3
Removing the covers ........................................................................................ 3-4
Removing the top cover ............................................................................... 3-4
Removing the front cover ............................................................................. 3-4
Removing the front column cover ................................................................ 3-5
Removing the column covers ....................................................................... 3-6
Removing the outer covers from the C-arm ................................................. 3-8
Removing the cassette head covers ............................................................ 3-9
Removing the inner covers from the C-arm ............................................... 3-11
Removing the tubehead cover ................................................................... 3-12
Removing the cephalostat covers .............................................................. 3-13
Doc. code 8200629 3-i

Contents 3. Covers and cover removal

The unit covers

To repair and replace parts the unit covers must be
removed. This section lists the covers and describes
how to remove and replace them.
Panoramic Covers
Top cover
Cover plate
Front cover
Upper cover
Rotating assembly cover C-arm covers
Lower cover
Tube head cover
Control panel cover Cassette head - outer cover
Column cover - rear

Front column cover
Left-hand column cover
Base cover
Doc. code 8200629 3-1

Support cover
Cover plate
Rotating assembly cover
Patient support cover
Right-hand column cover

Cassette head - upper cover
Cassette head - inner cover

Cephalostat Covers
Cephalostat cover
Ceph cassette holder cover
Doc. code 8200629 3-3

Removing the covers
Removing the top cover
The cover is held in place with

twelve screws, ten on top and
two at the rear.
Removing the front cover
Cover plates
Remove the two cover plates from the
rear of the sliding unit and then remove
the front cover.
Front cover

Removing the front column cover
Patient support cover
Remove the patient support cover.

It is held in position by a long
screw in the underside of the
patient positioning assembly
Screw
Loosen these
screws
Patient support assembly
Remove the two screws from the

underside of the front column
cover and then loosen the two
screws that hold the cover to the
patient support assembly.
Front column cover
Screws
Doc. code 8200629 3-5

Removing the column covers

The instructions describe the removal of the left-hand
column cover. The right-hand cover is removed in the
same way except that the side is reversed and there is
no frankfort light.
Slide the orange warning light cover Warning light cover

from the top of the column cover.
Remove the two screws that hold the

frankfort light cover (rear of column
cover) in position and remove the
cover.
Column cover
Frankfort light cover

(Left-hand side only)

Front cover
Loosen
screw
Front cover
screw
Remove the front column cover (see
previous page).
Remove left-hand screw from the front

cover and loosen the right-hand screw.
Remove the screw from the bottom front

of the column cover.
Column cover screw
Inner screw
Rear screws
Remove the three screws from the rear of

the column cover and the single screw
from inside the cover.
Doc. code 8200629 3-7

Removing the outer covers from the C-arm

The left and right C-arm covers are identical.
Remove the two screws from

the top of the cover and then
pull the cover out slightly.
Screws
Cover
Holding prong
Lift the cover up to disengage

the holding prongs from sup-
port bar and then remove the
cover.
Support
bar

Removing the cassette head covers
To remove the outer cover from the cassette

head, remove the four holding screws, two at
the top and two at the bottom, and then discon-
nect the ready button cable (J1210) from the
N1200 board.
Outer cover
Ready button cable
Holding screws
Doc. code 8200629 3-9

To remove the inner cover from the cassette

head, first remove the upper cover. It is held in
place with two screws. Note that a long allen key
will be required to remove them.
Upper cover
Remove the four screws, two at the top and two at

the bottom, that hold the inner cover in position. Note
that the cassette shield mechanism is attached to the
inner cover. The shield position microswitches must
be removed from the top of the inner cover before
the cover can be removed.
Inner cover
Microswitch

Removing the inner covers from the C-arm
First remove the support cover and

then the two C-arm cover halves.
Support cover C-arm cover halves
Doc. code 8200629 3 - 11

Removing the tubehead cover
If the unit is a pan/ceph pull off the soft tissue filter

knob.
Remove the aperture selection knob. It is held in place
with one screw.
Remove the four screws that hold the tubehead cover
in position and remove the cover.
Tubehead cover

Aperture selection knob
Pan/ceph unuts only

Removing the cephalostat covers
Cephalostat cover
Ceph cassette holder cover
Doc. code 8200629 3 - 13


4. Circuit Boards Contents
4. Circuit Boards
Contents
N100 Connector Unit 1 (CU1) ............................................................................. 4-1-1
N200 Auxiliary Voltage Supply (AVS) .................................................................. 4-2-1
N300 Z-Motor Controller (ZMC) .......................................................................... 4-3-1
N600 Imaging controller (IMC) ............................................................................ 4-4-1
N650 RAM Memory Module (RMM) .................................................................... 4-5-1
N660/N665 Flash Memory Modules (FMMA/FMMAB)........................................ 4-6-1
N700 Motor Controller (MC)................................................................................ 4-7-1
N800 External Connectors Interface (ECI) .......................................................... 4-8-1
N900 Connector Unit (CU2) ................................................................................ 4-9-1
X-Ray Generator ............................................................................................... 4-10-1
N1000 High Voltage Supply (HVS) ................................................................... 4-11-1
N1100 High Voltage Controller (HVC) ............................................................... 4-12-1
N1200 Cassette Head Controller (CHC) .......................................................... 4-13-1
N1400 Tubehead Controller (THC) ................................................................... 4-14-1
N1500 Tubehead (TH) and N1550 Diode Hybride (DH).................................... 4-15-1
N1600 Display and Keyboard Interface (DKI) ................................................... 4-16-1
N1700 Ceph Interface (CI) ................................................................................ 4-17-1
N1800 Ceph Filter Position Indicators (CFPI) ................................................... 4-18-1
N1900/1901/2200/2201 Ceph Cassette Sensors (CCS1/2) ............................ 4-19-1
N2000 Line Interface Unit (LIU) ......................................................................... 4-20-1
N2100 Top/Bottom Sensor (TBS) ..................................................................... 4-21-1
N2300 Rotation Position Sensor (RPS) ............................................................ 4-22-1
N2400 Cassette Type Sensor (CTS) ................................................................ 4-23-1
N2500 Opto-Sensor X, Y, C (OS) ...................................................................... 4-24-1
N2600 Vertical Position Sensors (VPS) ........................................................... 4-25-1
Doc. code 8200629 4-i

Contents 4. Circuit Boards

4. Circuit Boards N100 Connector Unit 1
N100 Connector Unit 1 (CU1)
Location
In top of support arm.
To access, remove top cover.
Field replaceable parts

None.
Description
The N100 Connector Unit 1 (CU1) board serves as a
connector for boards in the rotating unit, the column
and, if installed, the cephalostat. The stepper motors for
X- and Y-movements of the C-arm and the sensor
boards (N2500) that control these movements are also
comnected to this board. Supply voltages from the
Auxiliary Voltage Supply (N200) to the other boards
pass through N100.
Data from the X and Y sensors goes via the internal SPI
bus to the Image Controller (N600) in serial format. This
differential bus uses the RS485 protocol in the master/
slave configuration. The slave communicates with the
master (N600) using SLVSEL0-3 address signals, the
asyncronous clock is defined with signals SCLK and
SCLKB, which are also differential RS485 signals. The
signals that transfer data from the master to the slave
are called MOSIA and MOSIB (RS485) and from the
slave to the master MISOA and MISOB (RS485).
The green LEDs on the board indicate the supply

voltages. All the LEDs must be on if the unit is to oper-
ate correctly. The yellow LED indicates that there is SPI
communication between the slave (N100) and the
master (N600).
Doc. code 8200629 4-1-1

N100 Connector Unit 1 4. Circuit Boards
Indicator LEDs
LED Colour Indicates
D1 green +28V1 on
D2 yellow SPI communication active
D3 green -19V1 on
D4 green +19V1 on
D5 green +5V on
D8 green +28V2 on
D9 green +9V1 on
D10 green +9V2 on
D11 green +19V2 on
D12 green -19V2 on
Test Points
Number Value
TP2 +5V
TP3 SLVSEL3
TP4 SLVSEL2
TP5 SLVSEL1
TP6 SLVSEL0
TP7 INT_MISO
TP9 SCLK1
TP10 SLV5*
TP11 MRESET*
Connector J101
Pin Signal Description
1 +28V1 -
4 POWGND -
Connector J102
1 +28V2 -
4 POWGND -
4-1-2 Cranex Tome Service Manual

Connector J103
1,2 +9V2 -
3-5 GND2 -
6 +9V1 -
7,8 GND1 -
9 +19V2 -
10 +19V1 -
11,12 ANGND2 -
13 -19V2 -
14 -19V1 -
15,16 ANGND1 -
17 (SYNC) Not used
18 PFAIL* Too low or high +28V supply voltage
19 NETV Analog signal which is proportional to mains
voltage
20,21 SREF1,2 Analog signal to control up/down z-move-
ment
22,23 (ON1,2) Not used
24 TOP Column at highest position
25 BOTTOM* Column at lowest position
26 EXPLIGHT* Exposure lights on
Connector J104
1 + 9V1 Supply voltage (logic)
2 GND1 Gnd (logic)
3 MOSIA Differential RS485 signal (Master Out/
Slave In)
4 MOSIB Differential RS485 signal (Master Out/
Slave In)
5 MISOA SPI tranmission differential RS485 signal
(Master In/Slave Out)
6 MISOB SPI tranmission differential RS485 signal
7 SCLKA Differential RS - 485 clock signal from
IMC
8 SCLKB Differential RS - 485 clock signal from
IMC
9 -12 SLVSEL0 - 3 SPI address (Slave selection 0 - 3) from IMC
13 MRESET* Master Reset
14 +19V1 Analog supply voltages
15 -19V1 -
16 ANGND1 Analog Gnd
Doc. code 8200629 4-1-3

Connector J105
1 POWGND1 Power supply GND
2 + 28 V1 Power supply voltage
4 + 28 V1 -
6 - Not used
7 EXPC* Exposure command from IMC and expo-
sure button
8 ( SYNC ) Not used
Connector J106
1-4 RSTEP0 - 3 Phases 0-3 to rotation stepper motor
5-8 VSTEP0 - 3 Phases 0-3 to vertical stepper motor
9 - 12 CSTEP0 - 3 Phases 0-3 to cassette carriage stepper motor
Connector J107
1, 3, 5, 7 AGND -
2, 4 +19V -
6 -19V -
8, 9, 11,
13, 15, 16 GND -
10, 12, 14 +9V -
17-18 MOSI_A, MOSI_B SPI diff. RS485 signal (Master Out/Slave In)
19-20 MISO_A, MISO_B SPI diff. RS485 signal (Master In/Slave Out)
21-22 SCLK_A, SCLK_B Differential RS - 485 clock signal
23-26 SLVSEL0-3* SPI address (Slave selection 0 - 3)
27 MRESET* Master reset
29 EXPC* Exposure command from IMC button
30 EXPLGHT* Exposure lights on
33-34 SREF1, SREF2 Analog signal to control up/down z-move-
ment
35, 36 ON1, ON2 Not used
37 NETV Analog signal which is proportional to mains
voltage
38 HEADSIZE Not used
39 CEPHAUTO Not used
42, 44, 46,
48, 50 POWGND -
43, 45,
47, 49 +28V -

Connector J108
1-4 XSTEP0-3 Phases 0-3 to x-move stepper motor
5-8 YSTEP0-3 Phases 0-3 to y-move stepper motor
9-12 - Not used
Connector J109
1-4 RSTEP0-3 Phases 0-3 to rotation stepper motor
5-8 VSTEP0-3 Phases 0-3 to vertical stepper motor
9-12 CSTEP0-3 Phases 0-3 to cassette stepper motor
Connector J110
1 SENSPOW Supply voltage for sensors
3 2XSENS1* X-sensor 1 data
4 GND2 -
Connector J111
2 YSENS1* Y-sensor1 data
3 YSENS2* Y-sensor2 data
4 GND2
Connector J112
1-4 XSTEP0-3 Phases 0-3 to x direction stepper motor
Connector J113
1-4 YSTEP0-3 Phases 0-3 to y-direction stepper motor
Doc. code 8200629 4-1-5

Connector J114
1 +9V2 +9V supply voltage to be regulated to +5V
3 +9V2 -
2 GND2 Gnd (+5V)
4 GND2 -
16 GND2 -
5 MOSIA Differential RS485 signal (Master Out/Slave In)
6 MOSIB Differential RS485 signal (Master Out/Slave In)
9 SCLKA Differential RS - 485 clock signal from IMC
10 SCLKB Differential RS - 485 clock signal from IMC
12-15 SLVSEL0-3 Slave Select 0-3.
17 (CEPHAUTO) Not used
18 SREF2 Analog signal to control up/down z-movement
19 (ON2) Not used
20 (CEPHMAG) Not used

Doc. code 8200629 4-1-7


Doc. code 8200629 4-1-9

4 - 1 - 10 Cranex Tome Service Manual

4. Circuit Boards N200 Auxiliary Voltage Supply
N200 Auxiliary Voltage Supply (AVS)
Location
To access, remove the top cover.

- Jumpers for voltage conversion.
They MUST be installed if the unit is used with a 115
VAC mains voltage. Refer to the "Installation and set-up
manual" for information on how to instal the jumper.
- Fuse F1 - 5 AT, 250 VAC

- Fuse F4 - 3.2 AT, 250 VAC
- Fuse F5 - 3.2 AT, 250 VAC
- Fuse F6 - 10 AT, 250 VAC
- Fuse F7 - 3.2 AT, 250 VAC @ 230 VAC mains
6.3 AT, 250 VAC @ 115 VAC mains
All fuses are 6.3 mm x 32 mm.
WARNING
Replace only with the same type and rating of fuse.
- Cooling fan 24 VDC. Part number 4800955.
Description
The N200 Auxiliary Voltage Supply board produces all
the low power supply voltages for the unit. From the
mains voltage it generates +28 VDC, +9VDC and +-
19VDC low power supply voltages.
The mains voltage (115 or 220-240 VAC) is supplied to

a full bridge rectifier, D58, through RF-filter, RF1. Trans-
former T4 monitors the mains voltage for two reasons,
to generate the supply voltage to start the PWM and to
detect low mains voltage.
If the unit is used with a 115 VAC mains voltage a spe-
cial jumpers MUST be installed. A second jumper must
also be connected to N1000.
If the unit is used with a 220-240 VAC mains voltage
the jumpers MUST NOT be used. Refer to the "Installa-
tion and set-up manual" for information on how to instal
the jumpers.
Doc. code 8200629 4-2-1

N200 Auxiliary Voltage Supply 4. Circuit Boards
Transformer T1 is the mains voltage switching trans-

former with one primary and four secondary windings.
Rectified mains voltage (between DC+ and DC-) is
switched with transistors TR1 and TR2 through T1 to
produce correct output voltages. Transformer T3
switches the transistors on and off according to the
signal PWMOUT. The current through the transistors is
monitored by transformer T2 and its current feedback
signal is used to control the current mode PWM (IC1)
circuit.
Indicator LED’s
Led Colour Indicates
D11 green +9V on
D12 green -19V on
D13 green +19V on
D14 green +28V on (before fuses F4-F6)
D24 green +28V1 on
D25 green +28V2 on
D26 green +28V3 on
D45 green PWM is switching
D57 yellow High voltage (350 VDC on)
Test points
TP1 GND 1,2,3 Ground for +9V
TP2 +9V -
TP3 ANGND Gnd for ±19V
TP4 -19V -
TP5 +19V -
TP6 +28V_FB +28V putput of T1 (before fuses F4-F6)
TP7 POWGND Gnd for +28V
TP8 +22V PWM supply voltage
TP9, 20 SIGGND Signal gnd
TP10 COMP PWM error amplifier output
TP11 CT PWM frequency (about 132 kHz)
TP12 CUR_SENS Current feedback signal
TP14 +5V1 +5V supply voltage for AVS
TP16 NETV Signal proportional to mains voltage
TP18 Under or over voltage detection (mains)
TP19 VREF Reference voltage of PWM
TP21 DC+ Rectified mains voltage
TP22 DC0 -
TP23 DC- Rectified mains voltage

Connector J201
AC1 mains voltage in
Connector J202
AC2 mains voltage in
Connector J203
1,2 - AC1 mains voltage to HVS

5,6 - AC2 mains voltage to HVS
Connector J204
1 +28V1 -
4 POWGND -
Connector J205
1 +28V2 -
4 POWGND -
Connector J206
1, 2 +9V2 -
3-5 GND2 -
6 +9V1 -
7, 8 GND1 -
9 +19V2 -
10 +19V1 -
11, 12 ANGND2 -
13 -19V2 -
14 -19V1 -
15, 16 ANGND1 -
17 (SYNC) Not used
19 NETV Voltage which is proportional to mains voltage
20, 21 SREF1,2 Analog signal to control up/down z-movement
22, 23 (ON1,2) Not used
Doc. code 8200629 4-2-3

Connector J207
1, 2, 3 +28V3 -
6, 7, 8 POWGND -
24 TOP Z-Movement Top Limit
25 BOTTOM* Z-Movement Bottom Limit
26 EXPLGHT* Signal Which Activates Exposure Lights
Connector J208
1, 2 +9 V Logic supply voltage
3, 4 GND Logic gnd
5, 7 +/- 19 V Logic supply voltage
6 ANGND Not used
8 SREF1 Z - motor control in panoramic mode
10 ON1 Not used
9 SREF2 Z - motor control in cephalo mode
SREFN Z-movement direction
<1.7V down
2.5Vstopped
>3.5V up
11 ON2 Not used
12 TOP Z-movement top limit
13 BOTTOM* Z-movement bottom limit
14 EXPLGHT* Signal which activates exposure lights.

Doc. code 8200629 4-2-5

4 - 2- 6 Cranex Tome Service Manual

Doc. code 8200629 4-2-7

4 - 2- 8 Cranex Tome Service Manual

4. Circuit Boards N300 Z-Motor Controller
N300 Z-Motor Controller (ZMC)
Location
To access, remove top cover.

None.
Description
The N300 Z-Motor Controller board receives control
signals from the up/down keys on the control panel and
the side of the cephalostat, and the N2100 Top/bottom
sensors. These signals come through the N600, N100
and the N200 boards.
The N300 board has a microprocessor which can inde-
pendently control the speed of z-motor in both direc-
tions and the motor acceleration (0-2 seconds) and
deacceleration (0-1 second) sequences. The N300
board also switches the exposure lights on.
Reset circuitry
If the microprocessor supply voltage is too low or the
microprocessor stops operating during z-motor move-
ment, a RESET* signal is generated by IC 6. The
threshold voltage for the RESET operation is 4.6 V +10
mV with a 500ns delay.
PWM control signal D/A conversion

The pulsed signal at pin TCMP (compare pin) on proc-
essor IC1 is called SREF_OUT. Its frequency is 357 Hz
and its duty cycle varies between 46.0 - 82.6 %. R3/C8
convert this signal to an analog voltage. This analog
voltage controls the PWM IC4 pulse rate (output
PWMOUT*) which controls the acceleration and
deacceleration ramps of the z-motor.
The internal frequency of the PWM is about 20 kHz.
PAL circuit
The PAL circuit IC 5 protects the processor and pre-
vents z-motor movement if microprocessor is not func-
tioning according to the software. It also makes sure
that the z-motor stops if either the TOPLIMIT or
BOTLIMIT signal is generated (the unit has reached its
maximum or minimum height). IC 5 also controls the
rotation speed of the z-motor.
Doc. code 8200629 4-3-1

N300 Z-Motor Controller 4. Circuit Boards
Power drive
The z-motor drive consists of two power drivers IR2110
(IC 7, IC 8) and four power FET transistors IRFZ44
(TR3-TR6). When channels A and D are active, the z-
motor rotates and drives the unit up. When channels B
and C are active, it rotates and moves the unit down.
Thermal switch SW1 is connected so that it measures
the temperature of FETs. If temperature becomes too
high, an OVERTEMP* signal will be generated causing
the processor to decrease the motor speed to 1/4 of the
normal speed. Voltage across R48-R50 is used to
monitor the current through the motor. If motor current
exceeds 16 A the PWM pin COMP will be forced to
ground thus disabling the PWM output pulses. The z-
motor will then stop.
Indicator LEDs
D1 green +5 V:n on
D2 yellow Z-MOTOR is on when LED is on. If LED flashes,
1/4 speed only possible (FETs tempera-
ture too high)
D15 green +15 V ON
D16 green +28 V ON
Test pins
Pin Signal
TP1, TP4, TP17, TP18 GND

TP15 POWGND
TP2 +5 V
TP16 +28 V
TP8 SREF_1
TP9 SREF_2
TP10 EXPLIGHT*
TP11 EL1- Exposure light test point
TP12 Low voltage RESET*
TP5 SREF_OUT
TP3 MOT CUR, current limit
TP7 SREF3 = PWM pin COMP
TP6 PWMOUT*
TP13 ZM2, motor connection ( J303 / 4 )
TP14 ZM1, motor connection ( J303 / 1 )

Connector J301
1, 2, 3 +28V3 -
6, 7, 8 POWGND -
Connector J302
1, 2 +9 V Logic supply voltage
3, 4 GND Logic gnd
5, 7 +/- 19 V Not used
6 ANGND Not used
8 SREF1 Z-motor control in panoramic mode
10 ON1 Z-motor enable in panoramic mode
9 SREF2 Z-motor control in cephalo mode
SREF Z-movement direction
<1.7V down
2.5Vstopped
>3.5V up
11 ON2 Z-motor enable in cephalo mode.
14 EXPLGHT* Signal which activates exposure lights.
Processor signals (IC1)

10 CPU_OK Processor is in control
9 DOWN Driving down
8 UP Driving up
7 STOP Drive stopped
6 SHUTDOWN PWM and thus the z-motor is disabled
24 SREF_OUT PWM control and speed up/slow down ramp
generation.
Doc. code 8200629 4-3-3

Z-Motor controller (ZMC) N300

Doc. code 8200629 4-3-5


Doc. code 8200629 4-3-7


4. Circuit Boards N600 Imaging controller
N600 Imaging controller (IMC)
Location
In front of moving column.
To access, remove the front column cover.
Field serviceable parts

Battery CR2032.
NOTE
The battery must be replaced with one of the same type
(UL recognised).
Description
Imaging Controller and Display Driver (IMC) consist of
the main processor (IC1), which controls all the main
functions of the unit, the driver for the electro lumines-
cent display (IC15), a real time clock, an A/D converter,
+12V flash EPROM programming electronics and an I/
O controller (IC16).
The I/O controller has several functions, to serve as a

Master RESET controller for the peripheral circuits, to
decode the slave addresses (SPI communication), to
verify that the real time clock remains under processor
control, to control the SPI master communication and to
control all those input/output signals that are not micro-
processor signals.
The Display Driver and I/O Controller have been imple-

mented using programmable LCA circuits which are
programmed in the following way. At start up IC 15
configuration is loaded from flash EPROMs on N660.
IC 15 is configuration from IC16 in serial format (daisy
chain).
Doc. code 8200629 4-4-1

N600 Imaging controller 4. Circuit Boards
Indicator LEDs
D4 yellow Flash memory +12V programming voltage on
(Not used)
D5 red Motor control reset
D6 red Master reset
D7 yellow LCA’s configured
D8 green +5V ok
Test points
TP1 EL+9V -
TP2 EL+19V -
TP3, TP16, -
TP17, TP34, -
TP39-43 GND -
TP4 +9V -
TP5 MISO_1 Master In / Slave Out signal
TP8 PROGRAM* LCA programming control at start up
TP9 DONE LCA’s are configured
TP10 R/W* Internal bus read/write control

TP11 WRL* Write low

TP12 WRH* Write high
TP13 RDL* Read low
TP14 RDH* Read high
TP15 RESET* CPU reset
TP18 EXPC* Exposure on control
TP20 DONE* LCA’s are configured
TP21-33 Internal bus signals
TP35 Filtered EXP*
TP36 EXPC_1* Exposure enable from processor
TP37 HALT CPU halted
TP38 CLKOUT CPU clock signal
TP44 +5V -
Connector J601
1, 3, 5, 7 AGND -
2, 4 +19V -
6 -19V -
8, 9, 11,
13, 15, 16 GND -
10, 12, 14 +9V -
17-18 MOSI_A, MOSI_B SPI diff. RS485 signal (Master Out/Slave In)
19-20 MISO_A, MISO_B SPI diff. RS485 signal (MasterIn /Slave Out)
21-22 SCLK_A, SCLK_B Differential RS - 485 clock signal
23-26 SLVSEL0-3* SPI address (Slave selection 0 - 3)
28 PFAIL* Too low or high +28Vsupply voltage
29 EXPC* Exposure command from IMC button
30 EXPLGHT* Exposure lights on
33-34 SREF1, SREF2 Analog signal to control up/down z-move-
ment
35, 36 ON1, ON2 Not used
38 HEADSIZE Not used
39 CEPHAUTO Not used
42, 44,
46, 48, 50 POWGND -
43, 45,
47, 49 +28V -
Doc. code 8200629 4-4-3

Connector J602
1, 3, 5 AGND -
2 +19V -
4 -19V -
6, 8, 10, 16, 25 GND -
7,9 +9V -
11 STEP1CLK Stepping clock for x-movement
12 STEP2CLK Stepping clock for y-movement
13 STEP3CLK Stepping clock for rotation movement
14 STEP4CLK Stepping clock for vertical movement
15 STEP5CLK Stepping clock for cassette movement
17-21 MC_DATA0-4 5-bit databus for registers
22-24 MC_ADDR0-2 Register select/address signals
26 MCLATCH Register write signal
27 MOTPOWON Switches main power of stepping motor
drivers on and off
28 MVOK* Signal from N700, main motor power is
high enough, and LCA
devices are configured
properly
29 LIGHTSON Patient positioning lights on
30 MCRESET* Master reset for N700
32, 34, 36,
38, 40 POWGND -
33, 35, 37, 39 +28V -
Connector J603
1 VDATA Display data

2,4,6,8, -
9,10,12,13 GND -
3 VCLK Display clock
5 HS Horizontal sync
7 VS Vertical sync
11 BLANK/NC Not used
14,17,18 ANGND -
15,16 EL+19V Electroluminance display power +19V
20 SREF1 Analog signal to control up/down z-move-
ment

Connector J604
1-8 KEYCOL7-1* Keyboard columns
9-13 KEY_ROW4-0 Keyboard rows
14, 17, 18 GND -
15, 16 EL+9V Electroluminance sidplay power +9V
19 SPEAKER Speaker output signal
20 LAYER Y- motor control:
out 3.7V
in 1.3V
stop 2.5V
Connector J605
1 EXP* Exposure button signal
2 RDYL Ready for exposures
3, 6, 14 GND -
4 TXD Transmit data (RS232C)
5 RXD Receive data (RS232C)
8 MOSI Differential RS485 signal (Master Out/Slave In)
9 MISO SPI differential RS485 signal (Master In/
SlaveOut)
10 SCLK Differential RS - 485 clock signal
11 SLVSEL7* SPI address (Slave selection 0 - 3)
15 +28V -
16 POWGND Gnd for +28V electronics
Connector J606
1 SENSPOW Supply voltage to sensors
2 TOP Column at top sensor
4 GND
Connector J607
2 BOTTOM* Column at bottom sensor
4 GND
Doc. code 8200629 4-4-5

Connector J608
1 CRUP* Chin rest up
2 GND -
Connector J609
1 CRDOWN* Chin rest down
2 GND -
Connector J610
1 MIRLOCK* Patient mirror locked
2 GND -
Connector J611
2 SREF1 Analog signal to control up/down Z-move-
ment
4 GND -
Connector J612
2 LAYER Not used
3 LAYERON Not used
4 GND -

4. Circuit Boards N600 Imaging Controller
Doc. code 8200629 4-4-7

N600 Imaging Controller 4. Circuit Boards

Doc. code 8200629 4-4-9


Doc. code 8200629 4 - 4 - 11


Doc. code 8200629 4 - 4 - 13


4. Circuit Boards N650 RAM Memory Module
N650 RAM Memory Module (RMM)
Location
Plugged into N600.

None
Description
Although the N650 RAM Memory Module (RMM) is a
separate board it is a functional part of N600. On the
N650 board there are the RAM memories that the
microprocessors require.
It is possible to use two different types/sizes of RAM
circuits. JP1 is factory set according to the RAM type
used.
Doc. code 8200629 4-5-1

N650 RAM Memory Module 4. Circuit Boards

4. Circuit Boards N650 RAM Memory Module
Doc. code 8200629 4-5-3

N650 RAM Memory Module 4. Circuit Boards

4. Circuit Boards N660/N665 Flash Memory Modules
N660/N665 Flash Memory Modules (FMMA/FMMAB)
Location
Plugged into N600.

None.
Description
Although the Flash Memory Modules N660 (FMMA)
and N665 (FMMAB) are separate boards, they are a
functional part of N600. On the N660 and N665 boards
there are flash type EPROM’s that hold the software for
all the imaging programs.
The EPROM flash memories can be programmed, via
the RS232C serial interface connector on the side of
the unit, with a PC and a special serial cable.
This allows the software to be quickly and easily up-
dated without changing the whole board.
For information on how to do this refer to the section -
"Using a PC with the Cranex Tome".
The basic circuit board is exactly the same for both the
N660 and N665 board. The only difference between the
two boards is the number of EPROMs installed.
On N660 there are two EPROMs and on N665 there
are four EPROMs.
Doc. code 8200629 4-6-1

N660/N665 Flash Memory Modules 4. Circuit Boards

4. Circuit Boards N660 Flash PLCC Memory module
Doc. code 8200629 4-6-3

N660 Flash PLCC Memory module 4. Circuit Boards

4. Circuit Boards N700 Motor Controller
N700 Motor Controller (MC)
Location
In front of moving column.

None.
Description
The motor controller has two functions. It drives all the
stepper motors and controls two of the four patient
positioning lights. The motor control part of the board
drives five stepper motors (X, Y, R, V and C) according
to commands from N600 and stepper clocks. All five
motors are driven in a microstepping mode.
The light driver on the board controls the midsagittal

and frankfort patient positioning lights. The light driver
also includes a backup timer which is used to prevent
the lamps from overheating if N600 malfunctions.
The block stepper motor controller is the heart of the

N700 board. Commands, such as the torque used,
rotation direction and stepping resolution are written
into stepper motor controller by N600. These pro-
grammed commands define how the stepper clocks are
converted to motor winding current reference voltages
to the stepper motor controller. The function of the
stepper motor controller is to control the fullbridge's
motor driver so that the winding current follows the
reference voltage. The reference voltage is compared
to the current feedback signals from the stepper motor
driver. While the fullbridge is driven in the switching
mode, commutation control is also an important part of
the block’s functions.
Doc. code 8200629 4-7-1

N700 Motor Controller 4. Circuit Boards
The N600 board can switch the main power to the

motor drivers on and off (block “motor power switch”).
This function is included to allow the user some control
of movements during exposure. For example, if some-
thing goes wrong (the N600 malfunctions), the user can
stop unit movements by releasing the exposure button.
When the “Motor powers switch” switches off the main
power supply to motor drivers, all motors stop with zero
torque (the moving assemblies can be easily moved by
hand).
The positioning light driver is an N600 controlled power
switch with a backup timer. Lights are turned on during
the rising edge of the control signal and stay on until the
input signal is passivated or the backup timer triggers.
The backup time is about 30 seconds. If the timer
switches lights off the input signal must be turned off
and then on to switch lights on again.
Functional description

Indicator LEDs
D2 Green +15V power is OK.
D5 Yellow Positioning lights are on.
D10 Green +15V power for D/A convertters is OK
D12 Green Incoming +28V is OK..
D13 Yellow Main power supply for stepping motor drivers is
OK and the MCOK* signal active.
D15 Green +5V power supply is OK.
D16 Yellow LCA-devices are configured properly.
Testpoints
TP1 +15V Regulated +15VDC
TP2 POWGND2 -
TP3 -19V2 Incoming unregulated - 19VDC
TP4 +5V Regulated +5VDC
TP5 MOTPOWON IMC control signal. Motor power on.
TP6 LIGHTSON IMC control signal.
Positioning lights on.
TP7 MCRESET* IMC control signal. Master reset. Clears all
internal registers and reconfigures both LCA-
devices.
TP8 GND2 -
TP9 +15V2 Regulated +15VDC. Power supply for D/A-
converter
TP10 ANGND2 -
TP11 GND2 -
TP12 IC13 pin 28 Unused pin
TP21 RST Download-cable pin 9
TP22 +28V Incoming +28VDC after filtration.
TP24 GND2 -
TP25 POWGND2 -
TP26 MOTPOW Main power supply for stepping motor driver
(L298)
TP27 POWGND2 -
Doc. code 8200629 4-7-3

Connector J701
1 ANGND2 Analog ground
2 +19V2 Unregulated +19VDC power supply
3 ANGND2 -
4 -19V2 Unregulated -19VDC power supply
5 ANGND2 -
6 GND2 Digital ground
7 +9V2 Unregulated +9V power supply
8 GND2 -
9 +9V2 -
10 GND2 -
11 STEP1CLK Stepping clock for X-movement
12 STEP2CLK Stepping clock for Y-movement
13 STEP3CLK Stepping clock for R-movement
14 STEP4CLK Stepping clock for V-movement
15 STEP5CLK Stepping clock for C-movement
16 GND2 -
17-21 MCDATA0-4 5-bit databus for registers.
22-24 MCADDR0-2 Register select signals. Five addresses out of
eight are used
25 GND2 -
26 MCLATCH Register write signal. 5-bit data on MCDATA-bus
is written to register selected by MCADD signals
when LCA detects high state of MCLATCH
27 MOTPOWON Switches main power to stepping motor drivers
on and off. In 0 state power is switched off. At
the same time MOTON-bits in registers are
cleared. This also causes the motors to be
torqueless. In 1 state MOTPOWON switches
power to drivers and allows normal operation.
28 MCOK* Feedback signal to IMC (N600). While active, it
tells that main motor power is high enough and
that the LCA devices are configured properly.
The signal is open collector type.
29 LIGHTSON Control signal for patient positioning lights. The
rising edge of LIGHTSON switches positioning
lights on. State 0 turns lights off.
30 MCRESET* The master reset for MC. When active, it causes
LCA-devices to reconfigure themselves and sets
all internal registers in MC into power on state.
31 -
32 POWGND2 Power ground
33 +28V2 +28VDC
34 POWGND2 -
35 +28V2 -
36 POWGND2 -
37 +28V2 -
38 POWGND2 -
39 +28V2 -
40 POWGND2 -

Connector J702
1-4 XSTEP0-3 Phases 0-3 to x-move stepper motor
5-8 YSTEP0-3 Phases 0-3 to y-move stepper motor
9-12 - Not used
Connector J703
1-4 RSTEP0-3 Phases 0-3 to rotation stepper motor
5-8 VSTEP0-3 Phases 0-3 to vertical stepper motor
9-12 CSTEP0-3 Phases 0-3 to cassette stepper motor
Connector J704
1 PL2+ X positioning light supply voltage
2 XPL- X positioning light control
Connector J705
1 PL1+ Z positioning light supply voltage
2 ZPL- Z Positioning light control
Connector J706
1 +28V2 +28V power supply
2 POWGND2 Power ground
Connector J707
1 +5V +5V power supply for download connector
2 GND2 Digital ground
3 -
4 CCLK Configuration clock
5 DONE End of programming
6 MAD0 (DIN) Serial data in
7 RESET* (PROG*) Reprogramming
8 INIT* Initialize
9 RST Reset LCA
Doc. code 8200629 4-7-5

Jumpers
There are two jumpers on the N700 board, JP1 and
JP2. Only JP1 is used. Jumper JP2 is not used and is
permanently shortcircuited.
Different types of D/A-converters can be used on the
board. Jumper JP1 is used to select their different
operating voltages:
- MAX506 requires +5V
- MAX7226 (or TLC7226) requires +15V.
NOTE
All three converters require the same voltage and it is
not possible to mix different types of converter.
The jumper connections are shown below.
+5V power supply

(MAX7226, TLC7226 +15V Power supply
or PM7226) (MAX506)
NOTE
If the D/A-converters are replaced, check the jumper
position before switching the unit on. If the jumper is in
the wrong position the N700 board may be destroyed.
Never leave the jumper unconnected.

Doc. code 8200629 4-7-7


Doc. code 8200629 4-7-9


Doc. code 8200629 4 - 7 - 11


4. Circuit Boards N800 External Connectors Interface
N800 External Connectors Interface (ECI)
Location
On the left-hand side of moving column.
To access, remove left-hand column cover.

None.
Description
The N800 External Connectors Interface (ECI) board
allows external devices to be connected to the unit. The
connectors on the board are:
• 6-pin DIN connector (upper) for external exposure/
ready lights
• 6-pin DIN connector (lower) for the exposure button
• a RS232C serial interface connector for a printer or

computer
In addition to the three connectors there is a key lock
that allows the exposure button to be locked so that
exposures cannot be taken.
The RS232C serial interface can be used to send expo-

sure information to a printer or PC and to upgrade the
unit software. For information on how to do this refer to
the section - "Using a PC with the Cranex Tome".
An isolated +5V supply voltage is used for all interface
circuits. The +5V is generated by multivibrator IC3 and
transformer T1 (flyback). From output T1 two supply
voltages, isol +9V and isol +5V, are supplied to the
electronics. Opto isolators IC6-IC9 isolate signals RxD,
TxD, EXP* and RDYL between external connectors and
the internal electronics. Filters L2-L3 minimize EMC
interference.
The external peripheral device connected to the Cranex

Tome (using a RS232C serial interface cable) can be
either a DTE-type (data terminal equipment) e.g. PC/
Terminal or a DCE-type (data communication equip-
ment) e.g. Printer/Modem/Mouse. The RS 232 trans-
ceiver IC 2 (MAX 202, Dual RS 232 + 5V to + 10V
charge-pump voltage converter) is used in the ECI-
board as DTE-type equipment.
Doc. code 8200629 4-8-1

N800 External Connectors Interface 4. Circuit Boards
The direction of the signals through the RS 232 data-

lines ISOL_TXD and ISOL_RXD depend on what kind
of external peripheral device (DTE/DCE-type) is used.
The signal directions is selected using jumper JP1. If
the peripheral is a DTE-type then these signals must be
connected crosswise and if the peripheral is DCE-type
the signal lines must be connected to each other.
The peripheral device can also use hand-shaking sig-

nals. The states and combinations of the hand-shaking
signals depend on what kind of equipment (DTE/DCE-
type) the external peripheral device is. The Cranex
Tome has no H/W hand-shaking signal and and jumper
JP 2 is used to to give the correct hand-shaking signals
to the external peripheral device.
The external peripheral device believes that it is reading

RS 232 communication enabling signals from the de-
vice which is at the other end of the signal lines. In
reality it reads its own signals which it sent momentarily
before. Jumper connections JP1 and JP 2 are shown
below. The Cranex Tome is able to use S/W hand-
shaking signals XON / XOFF. These signals only need
three H/W signal lines.
The connections of the jumpers JP1 and JP2

Indicator LEDs
LED Colour Description
D6 green Isolated +5V ok
D7 yellow Receiving data
D8 yellow Transmitting data
D12 green +28V ok
D14 green +15V ok
D18 green +5V ok
D20 yellow Exposure button pressed (EXP* active)
Test points
TP1, 10 PGND -
TP2 ISOL+9V -
TP3 ISOL+5V -
TP4 ISL_TxD -
TP5 ISL_RxD -
TP6 +V -
TP7 -V -
TP8 ISOL_EXP* -
TP9 ISOL_RDY -
TP12 POWGND -
TP13,18 GND -
TP14 TxD -
TP15 +5V -
TP16 EXP* -
TP17 RxD -
TP19 RDYL -
Doc. code 8200629 4-8-3

Connector J801
1 EXP* Exposure button signal to IMC
2 RDYL Ready for exposures to IMC
3, 6, 14 GND -
4 TXD Transmit data TTL level
5 RXD Receive data TTL level
8 MOSI Nondifferential RS485 signal (Master Out/Slave
In)
9 MISO SPI nondifferential RS485 signal (Master In/
Slave Out)
10 SCLK Nondifferential RS - 485 clock signal
11 SLVSEL7* SPI slave address 7
15 +28V2 -
16 POWGND2 Gnd for +28V electronics
Connector J802
1 ISOL_EXP1* Exposure button signal after key lock
2 ISOL_EXP1* Exposure button signal before key lock
Connector J803
1 ISOL_EXP2* Exposure button signal (isolated)
2 PGND Isolated gnd
Connector J804
1 ISOL_EXP Active when exposure button pressed

2 PGND -
3 ISOL_RDY Active when unit is ready for exposures
Connector J805
1-9 RS232C Signals

Doc. code 8200629 4-8-5


Doc. code 8200629 4-8-7


4. Circuit Boards N900 Connector Unit
N900 Connector Unit (CU2)
Location
In rotating assembly.
To access, remove the rotating assembly cover from
the cassette carriage side.

None.
Description
The Connector Unit 2 (CU2) board connects boards
N1200, N1000 and N100. In addition to these boards,
V-axis and R-axis stepper motors, and their corre-
sponding position sensors N2600 and N2300, and focal
trough and TMJ patient positioning lights are connected
to this board.
IC2 converts the statuses of the positioning sensor into

serial form and transmits the signals to microprocessor
IC1.
The N900 board is controlled by the microprocessor

IC1. The microprocessor has an internal EPROM and
RAM. The microprocessor controls the high voltage
generator, monitors the rotation and vertical position
detectors, switches the supply voltage to the
optosensors (SENSPOW), switches the frankfort and
TMJ positioning light on and off and controls the M/S
LED. The M/S (Master/Slave) LED indicates that the
processor is functioning.
The microprocessor controls the high voltage genera-

tion in the following ways.
It sets all the control signals that activate the high volt-
age ON and OFF, it sets the correct mA and kV refer-
ence values for the generator and it starts and stops an
exposure.
Doc. code 8200629 4-9-1

N900 Connector Unit 4. Circuit Boards
Functional block diagram

Indicator LEDs
D13 green LED +15 POW on
D14 green LED Master/Slave transmission active
D22 green LED -15V on
D23 green LED +15V on
D24 green LED +5V on
Test pins
TP5 +15 POW -
TP10 POWGND -
TP28 +5 V -
TP18, TP29,
TP42, TP43 GND
TP30 +15 V -
TP31 - 15 V -
TP32 ANGND -
TP2 Y light PL1- -
TP3 Y light PL2- -
TP4 Y light PL+ -
TP11 RESET* CU2 Reset
TP12 SLVSEL10* Slave selection 10
TP23 FILTPOS1 Position of soft tissue filter
TP24 MAFB1 RC filtered mAfb (See feedback values on next
page)
TP25 KVFB1 RC filtered kVfb (See feedback values on next
page)
TP19 KVFAIL1 High voltage disabled
TP20 SDO_LOCAL Serial transmission from microprocessor to
circuits
TP21 SDI_LOCAL Serial transmission from IC2 to microprocessor
TP22 CLK_LOCAL Clock signal for local transmission
TP15 MISO1 MASTER IN/SLAVE OUT
TP16 MOSI1 MASTER OUT/SLAVE IN
TP17 SCLK1 SPI transmission clock
TP13 EXPC1* Exposure ON command from IMC after RC
filtering
TP14 EXPOUT* CU2 processor command to start exposure
TP9 EXPC2* Start exposure command from CU2
TP6 F/MA* Command to switch tube current on
TP7 AVC* Command to switch on filament and generator
supply voltages
TP8 HEAT* Starts heating filament and preheating sequence
TP1 SENSPOW Supply voltage for sensors
TP26 MAREF Reference value which defines tube current
TP27 KVREF Reference value which defines tube high voltage
Doc. code 8200629 4-9-3

Tube Current and voltages feedback values on N900

Tube current mAfb on N900 Tube voltage kVfb on N900
(mA) (TP24) (kV) (TP25)
0 1.61 50 2.71
0.5 1.69 51 2.76
1 1.77 52 2.82
1.5 1.85 53 2.87
2 1.93 54 2.92
2.5 2.01 55 2.97
3 2.09 56 3.02
3.5 2.17 57 3.08
4 2.25 58 3.13
4.5 2.34 59 3.18
5 2.42 60 3.23
5.5 2.50 61 3.29
6 2.58 62 3.34
6.5 2.66 63 3.39
7 2.74 64 3.44
7.5 2.61 65 3.48
8 2.90 66 3.55
8.5 2.98 67 3.60
9 3.06 68 3.65
9.5 3.14 69 3.71
10 3.22 70 3.76
10.5 3.30 71 3.81
11 3.38 72 3.86
11.5 3.46 73 3.92
12 3.54 74 3.97
12.5 3.62 75 4.02
13 3.70 76 4.07
13.5 3.78 77 4.12
14 3.86 78 4.18
14.5 3.95 79 4.23
15 4.03 80 4.28
81 4.34
82 4.39
83 4.44
84 4.49
85 4.55
86 4.60

Connector J901
1 +9V1 Supply voltage (logic)
2 GND1 Gnd (logic)
(Master In /Slave Out)
9 - 12 SLVSEL0 - 3 SPI address (Slave selection 0 - 3) from IMC
14 +19V1 Analog supply voltage
15 -19V1 -
16 ANGND1 Analog Gnd
Connector J902
1, 3, 5 POWGND1 Power supply GND
2 + 28 V1 Power supply voltage
4 + 28 V1 -
6 -
7 EXPC* Exposure command from IMC AND
exposure button
8 ( SYNC ) Not used
Connector J903
1-4 RSTEP0 - 3 Phases 0-3 to rotation stepper motor
5-8 VSTEP0 - 3 Phases 0-3 to vertical stepper motor
9 - 12 CSTEP0 - 3 Phases 0-3 to cassette carriage stepper motor
Doc. code 8200629 4-9-5

Connector J904
1 EXPC2* Exposure ON command to HVC, starts high
voltage generator
2 F/MA* Controls filament circuitry (fil. voltage control/mA
control)
3 AVC* Enables supply voltage for filament supply and
high volt age gererator
4 HEAT* Starts heating filament and preheating sequence
5 KVFAIL* High voltage is below the reference value
6 TIMEOUT Time limit for exposure exceeded (31 s - 41 s)
7 GENHOT Power MOSFET temperature in HVS are over
65oC (not used)
8 (SYNC) Not used
9 ANGND1 Analog Gnd
10 KVREF Reference value which defines tube high voltage
11 MAREF Reference value which defines tube current
12 REFGND Gnd for reference voltages (KVREF, MAREF)
13 KVFBM Voltage monitored from tube high voltage
14 MAFBM Voltage monitored from tube current
15 FILTPOS Position of soft tissue filter in the ceph mode
16 ANGND1 -
17 +19 V1 Analog supply voltages
18 -19 V1 -
19 +28 V1 Supply voltages for power units
20 POWGND1 Gnd for power units
21 +28 V1 -
22 POWGND1 -
23 +28 V1 -
24 POWGND1 -
25 +9 V1 Logic supply voltage
26 GND1 Logic gnd
27 (SLVSEL8*) Slave -address selection No:8 (Not used)
28 (FANDIS*) Not used
30 TUBEHOT When actice tube head temperature over 70 °C
31 SLVSEL9* Slave address selection from THC pcb
32 GND1 -
38 SLKB Differential RS - 485 clock signal from IMC
39 GND1 -
40 MRESET* Master Reset from IMC (initiates all SPI slaves)

Connector J905
1-4 CSTEP0 - 3 Phases 0-3 to cassette carriage stepper motor
on CHC pcb
5 +28 V1 Supply voltage for poewr units
6 POWGND1 Gnd for power units
8 GND1 Logic gnd
15 - 18 SLVSEL0 - 3 Slave selection 0 - 3
20 +19 V1 Analog supply voltages
21 -19 V1 -
22 ANGND1 Analog gnd
23 FILTPOS Reserved for soft tissue filter position signal
25 GND1 -
26 -
Connector J906
1 PL + Y-positioning light (focal trough) supply voltage
2 YPL1 - Y-positioning light (focal trough) control
Connector J907
1 PL + Y-positioning light (TMJ) supply voltage
2 YPL2 - Y-positioning light (TMJ) control
Doc. code 8200629 4-9-7

Connector J908
2-3 VSENS1* - 2* Vertical movement detector signals
VSENS1* VSENS2*
0 0 Tube head up
0 1 PIO =ok, tube head is horizontal
1 1 Tube head is down
1 0 Impossible situation
4 GND1 Logic gnd
Connector J909
2-4 RSENS1* - 3* Rotation movement detector signals
RSENS1* RSENS2* RSENS3*

1 0 1 -910 <R (Rotation) < -890
PIO (Patient in out)= ok
0 0 1 R > -610
1 0 0 R < -910
0 1 1 590 <R < 610
Right-hand ceph
1 1 1 -890 <R < 610
1 0 1 Impossible situation
1 1 0 -610 <R < 590
Left-hand ceph
0 1 0 -590 <R < 590
5 GND1 Logic gnd

6 -8 -

Connector J910
1-4 VSTEP0 - 3 -
Connector J911
1-4 RSTEP0 - 3 Phases 0-3 for rotation movement stepper motor
Doc. code 8200629 4-9-9


Doc. code 8200629 4 - 9 - 11


Doc. code 8200629 4 - 9 - 13


4. Circuit Boards X-Ray Generator
X-Ray Generator
General Description
The High Voltage Supply board (N1000), the High
Voltage Controller (N1100), the Tube Head Controller
N1400 and the Tube Head (N1500 and N1550) to-
gether form the X-ray generator.
The X-ray generator is a high-frequency switching
mode generator with constant potential (DC) output.
Both the x-ray tube voltage and current are monitored
using real-time feedback control.
The X-ray generator regulates the tube voltage and
current to a preset value selected by the user. The
generator consists of two high frequency switched
mode regulators. In addition to its main functions the
generator also includes safety features against over
exposure (TIMEOUT), X-ray tube arcing (KVFAIL),
overheated tube head (TUBEHOT) and overheated
generator (GENHOT).
Detailed Description
The high voltage generator is implemented as an over
resonant frequency modulated switching regulator. It
regulates the power to the tube head by changing the
switching frequency towards or away from the resonant
frequency of the load. Power is increased by lowering
the switching frequency.
The regulator functions as follows. The error amplifier
measures the difference between the kV-reference and
the kV-feedback signals, and the output voltage of the
amplifier (the error voltage) specifies the switching
frequency needed to supply the necessary kV-value to
the X-ray tube (to produce the kV-feedback required in
the first place). The kV-reference depends on the kV-
value selected by the user.
The desired tube current is regulated with another
switched mode power supply that uses pulse width
modulation (PWM). Separate feedback loops control
the regulation during the preheat period (FILFB) and
the exposure time (MAFB). The reference voltages
necessary for regulation (KVREF and MAREF) are
generated on the N900 board.
Doc. code 8200629 4 - 10 - 1

X-Ray Generator 4. Circuit Boards

4. Circuit Boards N1000 High Voltage Supply
N1000 High Voltage Supply (HVS)
Location
To access, remove rotating assembly cover from the
tubehead side. The N1100 board is connected to it.

- Fuse F1 - 16 AFF @ 250 VAC (6.3 x 32 mm).
WARNING
- Jumper for connector J1008.
If the unit is used with a 115 VAC mains voltage a
jumper MUST be installed on connector J1008. Refer to
the "Installation and set-up manual" for information on
how to instal the jumper.
Description
Most of the power components for X-ray generation are
located on the N1000 board. This board receives the
mains voltage and the low (auxiallary) voltages.
If the unit is used with a 115 VAC mains voltage a spe-

cial jumper MUST be plugged into connector J1008.
Additional jumpers must also be connected to the
N200 board.
If the unit is used with a 220-240 VAC mains voltage
the jumpers MUST NOT be used. Refer to the "Installa-
tion and set-up manual" for information on how to instal
the jumpers.
Doc. code 8200629 4 - 11 - 1

N1000 High Voltage Supply 4. Circuit Boards
Timing diagram

Indicator LEDs N1000

D11 green +28V
D12 green +19V
D13 green +9V
D14 green +28V
D15 green +19V
D16 green GD2 Gate drive 2
D17 yellow GD1 Gate drive 1
D33 yellow High voltage indicator
Test pins N1000

TP1 Full bridge measure point
TP7 DC+ Bulk capacitor voltage
TP8 IO Middle of bulk capacitor measure point
TP9 HVGND High voltage ground
TP7 DC+ Bulk capacitor voltage
TP8 IO Middle of bulk capacitor measure point
TP9 HVGND High voltage ground
TP4 GD2 Gate drive 2
TP3 GD1 Gate drive 1
TP1 +28V -
TP5 +19V -
Doc. code 8200629 4 - 11 - 3

Connector J1001
1 FANDIS* Option
2, 3, 4 - Spare
5 AVC1* Filament voltage enable
6 GENHOT Temperature of the power MOSFETs too high
(not used)
7, 8 - Spare
9, 10 GND1 Ground
11, 12 +28V1 Supply voltage for power units
13, 14 POWGND1 GND for power units
15, 16 +19V1 Analog supply voltage
17, 18 +9V1 Logic supply voltage
19, 20 GND1 Ground
Connector J1002
1, 2 PV2 Rectified line voltage
5, 6 PV1 Rectified line voltage
Connector J1003
1, 2 HPA Power output to H.T. transformer
5, 6 HPB Power output to H.T. transformer
Connector J1004
1, 2 +15V Regulated supply for logic and analog circuits
3, 4 +5V Regulated supply for logic circuits
6 TIMEOUTM Measurement for the timeout protection circuit
7 GD1 Gate drive of the power bridge
9 IFB Current feedback
10 ANGND1 Ground for analog circuits
Connector J1005
1 +28V1 Supply voltage for cooling fan
2 FAN2- -

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 11 - 5


Doc. code 8200629 4 - 11 - 7


4. Circuit Boards N1100 High Voltage Controller
N1100 High Voltage Controller (HVC)
Location
To access, remove rotating assembly cover from the
tubehead side. It is connected to the N1000 board.

None.
Description
High voltage controller includes the necessary pulse
generation and control logic to drive the power stages
located on the N1000 and N1400 boards.
The KV protection circuit

The KV protection circuit compares the KVREF1 (TP16)
and KVFB1 lines with the comparator LM393 (IC9/a). If
the KVFB drops below the KVREF the D-flipflop IC10/a
is triggered by the comparator. When triggered, the
KVFAIL signal (IC10/pin5) goes HIGH, pin 6 goes LOW
and discharges C29 through R30 within 5ms and resets
the flip-flop to the initial state. The LOW state at pin 6
causes the output at pin 4, IC11 (SHUTDOWN), to rise
and short the kV reference voltage (IC13/5), the error
amplifier output, the filament supply feedback loop
selection (F*/MA) and the FET bridge drive (IC10/12) to
ground, thus terminating the exposure temporarily.
The KVFAIL* signal informs the processor (on the N600

board) that an assumed arc in the tube has occured.
The processor counts the KVFAIL* LOW-states and
after five attempts it will give a GENERATOR FAILURE
- error code. If the KVFAIL count does not reach five,
the exposure will continue normally with a soft start
after shutdown.
A switch on the board allows the kV feedback signal

from the tubehead to the N600 board to be switched
off. This allows the unit to be used without kV feedback
error signals continually interrupting an exposure.
Doc. code 8200629 4 - 12 - 1

N1100 High Voltage Controller 4. Circuit Boards
Indicator LEDs N1100

D5 green +15V OK
D6 green +5V OK
D20 yellow EXPC2* Exposure active
D21 yellow AVC* Filament voltage and relays enabled
D1 yellow HEAT1* Filament supply is turned on
D19 yellow F/MA* Tube current is regulated using the MAFB
loop
Test pins N1100

TP1 COMP Compensation signal
TP2 HEAT* Filament supply is turned on
TP3,15 GND -
TP4 TIMEOUT Exposure has lasted more than 31 seconds
TP5 +9V -
TP6 +15V -
TP7 +5V -
TP8 IFB Current feedback from HVS
TP9 VSAWTOOTH V/F-converter voltage ramp
TP10 FILFB Filtered filament voltage feedback
TP11 KVFAIL Tube voltage has dropped below the reference
TP12 - Used for test purposes
TP13 - Dead time pulse
TP14 - Ending the exposure
TP16 KVREF Buffered tube voltage reference
TP17 MAREF Reference for filament regulator
(Filament voltage and tube current)
TP18 VERROR Output of error ampifier
TP19 KVFBM Tube voltage monitor signal
TP20 MAFBM Tube current monitor signal
TP21 EXPC3 Exposure active (last point)

Connector J1101
1 FANDIS* Option
2, 3, 4 - Spare
6 GENHOT Temperature of power MOSFETs too high (not
used)
7, 8 - Spare
9, 10 GND1 Ground
11, 12 +28V1 Supply voltage for power units
13, 14 POWGND1 GND for power units
15, 16 +19V1 Analog supply voltage
17, 18 +9V1 Logic supply voltage
19, 20 GND1 Ground
Connector J1104
1, 2 +15V Regulated supply for logic and analog circuits
3, 4 +5V Regulated supply for logic circuits
6 TIMEOUTM Measurement for the timeout protection circuit
9 IFB Current feedback
10 ANGND1 Ground for analog circuits
Connector J1102
1 EXPC2* Exposure command
2 F/MA* Filament current is regulated using the MAFB
loop
3 AVC* Filament voltage enable
4 HEAT* Filament supply is turned on
5 KVFAIL* Tube voltage has dropped below the reference
6 TIMEOUT Exposure has lasted more than 20 seconds
7 GENHOT Too high temperature of the power MOSFETs
(not used)
8 SYNC Option
9 ANGND1 Analog GND
10 KVREF Tube voltage reference
11 MAREF Tube current reference
12 REFGND Ground of the MA and KV reference voltage
sources
13 KVFBM Tube voltage monitoring signal
Doc. code 8200629 4 - 12 - 3

14 MAREF Tube current reference

15 FILTPOS Soft tissue filter position
16 ANGND1 -
18 -19V1 Analog supply voltage
19 +28V1 Supply voltage for power units
20 POWGND1 GND for power units
21 +28V1 -
22 POWGND1 -
23 +28 V1 -
24 POWGND1 -
25 +9V1 Logic supply voltage
26 GND1 Logic ground
27 SLVSEL8* Option
28 FANDIS* Option
30 TUBEHOT Tubehead too hot (over 70°C)
31 SLVSEL9* Slave address selection
32 GND1 -
33 MISOA SPI transmission differential RS 485 signal
34 MISOB SPI transmission differential RS 485 signal
35 MOSIA SPI transmission differential RS 485 signal
(Master Out/Slave In)
36 MOSIB SPI transmission differential RS 485 signal
37 SCLKA SPI clock, differential RS 485 signal
38 SCLKB SPI clock, differential RS 485 signal
39 GND1 -
40 MRESET* Master reset from IMC (initiates all SPI slaves)
Connector J1103
1 GND1 Logic ground
2 MRESET* Master reset from IMC (initiates all SPI slaves)
3 SCLKA SPI clock, differential RS 485 signal
4 SCLKB SPI clock, differential RS 485 signal
5 MOSIA SPI transmission differential RS 485 signal
6 MOSIB SPI transmission differential RS 485 signal
7 MISOA SPI transmission differential RS 485 signal
8 MISOB SPI transmission differential RS 485 signal

9 SLVSEL9* Slave adress selection

10 GND1 -
12 TUBEHOT Tubehead too hot (over 70°C)
14 FANDIS* Option
16 GND1 -
17,18 Spare -
20 POWGND1 GND for power units
21 +28V1 -
22 POWGND1 -
23 F1GATE Filament control
24 POWGND1 -
25 F2GATE Filament control
26 POWGND1 -
27,28 Spare -
30 ANGND1 -
31 -19V1 Analog supply voltage
32 ANGND1 -
34 ANGND1 -
35 KVFB Tube voltage feedback
36 ANGND1 -
37 MAFB Tube current feedback
38 ANGND1 -
39 FILFB Filament feedback
40 ANGND1 -
Doc. code 8200629 4 - 12 - 5


Doc. code 8200629 4 - 12 - 7


Doc. code 8200629 4 - 12 - 9


4. Circuit Boards N1200 Cassette Head Controller
N1200 Cassette Head Controller (CHC)
Location
In rotating unit cassette head.
To access, remove the outer cover from the cassette
head assembly.

None.
Description
All the cassette head detectors (cassette shield
microswitches, cassette type detectors, cassette car-
riage position detector), the return switch and the cas-
sette carriage stepper motor are connected to N1200
board.
This board also includes optional electronics to convert
analog signals to digital signals for future usage. This is
not shown on the block diagram.
IC18 and IC19 convert all detector and switch data from
parallel to serial format and transmit the data to the
N600 board using the differential RS-485 bus via IC10
when the correct slave address has been selected by
IC14.
Doc. code 8200629 4 - 13 - 1

N1200 Cassette Head Controller 4. Circuit Boards

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 13 - 3

Indicator LEDs
D5 green +15 V on
D6 green - 15 V on
D16 green + 5 V on
Test pins
TP1 Not used
TP2 ANGND1 -
TP3 Not used
TP4 Not use
TP5 Not used
TP6 Not used
TP7 ANGND1 -
TP8 Not used
TP9 Not used
TP10 Not used
TP11 Not used
TP12 Not used
TP13 Not used
TP14 Not used
TP15 +15 V -
TP16 - 15 V -
TP17 A/D reference voltage (4.64 V)
TP18 GND1
TP19 +5V
TP20 GND1
TP21 SLV13*
TP22 SLV11* (slave selection 11)
TP29 SLV12*
TP30 FM_POW_ON (not used)
TP35 GND1
Connector J1201
1 -3 CSTEP0 - 3 Phases 0-3 of cassette carriage stepper motor

5 + 28 V1 Not used
6 POWGND1 Not used
7 + 9 V1 Logic supply voltage
8 GND1 Logic gnd
10 MOSIB Differential RS485 signal (Master Out/ Slave In)


15 - 18 SLVSEL0 - 3 SPI address (Slave selection 0-3) from IMC
20 + 19 V1 Analog supply voltage
21 - 19 V1 -
22 ANGND1 Analog gnd
23 FILTPOS Option
25 GND1 -
26 -
Connector J1202
1 CPOS1* Cass. head position detector,
LOW=normal position
2 GND1 -
Connector J1203
1 CPOS2* Cass. head positon detector. LOW=cephalo
position
2 GND1 -
Connector J1204
1 SSSENS1* Secondary slit position detection
2 GND1 -
Connector J1205
1 SSSENS2* Secondary tomography aperture position
detection
2 GND1 -
Connector J1206
2 CT0* Cassette type bit 0
3 CT1* Cassette type bit 1
4 GND1 -
Doc. code 8200629 4 - 13 - 5

Connector J1207 (Optional)
Connector J1208
2 CSENS1* Start position of cassette carriage
3 CSENS2* End position of cassette carriage
4 GND1 -
Connector J1209
1 - 4 CSTEP0 - 3 Phases 0-3 of cassette carriage stepper motor
5-8 - Not used
Connector J1210
1 RETURN* Return signal from the rotating part
2 GND1 -
3 RTNLGHT Not used
4 GND1 -
Connector J1211 (Optional)

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 13 - 7


Doc. code 8200629 4 - 13 - 9


4. Circuit Boards N1400 Tubehead Controller
N1400 Tubehead Controller (THC)
Location
In the rotating unit in front of the tubehead.
To access, remove the tube head cover.

Fuse F1 - 3.2AT @ 250 VAC (6.3 x 32 mm)
Function
The N1400 board includes the control electronics for
the N1100 (High Voltage Controller) board that gener-
ates the high voltage for the tubehead, filament voltage
electronics and electronics for the primary aperture
position detectors. Signals from the tubehead tempera-
ture switch and soft filter position detector pass through
the N1400 board.
Feedback Circuitry
Positive and negative high voltages from the tubehead
are divided using high voltage resistors in the tubehead
and resistors R1 and R8 on the N1400 board. These
feedback signals are called kVfb+ and kVfb- respec-
tively. This differential voltage is converted to a non-
differential, positive signal kVfb which is used by N1100
to control the high voltage of tubehead.
Tube current is measured using signal mAfb+ which is

a voltage generated by a resistor across the secondary
windings of the high voltage transformer. This voltage is
equal to the tube current. This signal is buffered to
signal mAfb and is used by N1100 to control the tube
current.
Filament Circuitry
The filament circuitry consists of two parts, circuitry to
enable the supply voltage and circuitry to control the
filament voltage and thus the filament current.
The filament supply voltage, 28VDC, passes through
fuse F1 and transistor switch TR1. Signal AVC1* ena-
bles (switches on) the supply voltage when the signal is
L (low state). The filament transformer in the tubehead
has two identical primary windings. One common end is
connected to the supply voltage FILV and the two other
ends are connected to signals F1 and F2.
Doc. code 8200629 4 - 14 - 1

When the filament is heated the filament controlling

circuit on N1100 switches signals FILGATE1 and
FILGATE2 which control switching transistors TR2 and
TR3. When either transistor is on, the filament trans-
former is energized through signals F1 and F2. Both
transistors never conduct at the same time.
Primary Aperture Detection

The primary aperture that the user selects is detected
using four opto switches IC4-IC7 reading coded slots in
a positioning rail. The position information is transferred
using MISOA/MISOB-signalling to the microprocessor.
Primary aperture coding is shown in the table below.
Aperture S41 S31 S21 S11

1 1 0 0 0 Normal aperture
2 1 0 0 1 Child aperture
3 1 0 1 1 Tomo 1 aperture
(Nomal filtration)
(Thick filtration)
5 1 1 1 0 Cephalo 1 aperture
Moving 0 0 0 0 None selected

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 14 - 3

The timing diagram of the PWM - controller filament Power Supply

Indicator LEDs
D14 green +15V on
D13 green -15V on
D31 green +5V on
D32 yellow SPI active
D24 yellow Filament supply on
D15 yellow Filament transformer is energized
Test pins
TP16 SSENS11* Primary aperture position, opto switch 1
TP17 SSENS21* Primary aperture position, opto switch 2
TP18 SENS31* Primary aperture position, opto switch 3
TP19 SENS41* Primary aperture position, opto switch 4
TP15 FREE1 Not used
TP14 FREE2 Not used
TP20 +5 V -
TP21, TP13, GND -
TP5 +15 V -
TP7 -115 V -
TP2, TP6, TP12 - ANGND
TP1 KVFB+ Poitive high voltage feedback
TP3 KVFB- Negative high voltage feedback
TP8 KVFB High voltage feedback
TP4 MAFB mA feedback signal
TP11 - Filament voltage
Doc. code 8200629 4 - 14 - 5

Connector J1401
1 GND1 Logic ground
2 MRESET* Master Reset from IMC (initiates all SPI slaves)
3 SCLKA Differential RS - 485 signal, SPI clock
4 SCLKB Differential RS - 485 signal, SPI clock
9 SLVSEL9* Slave address selection
10 GND1 -
12 TUBEHOT Tubehead too hot (over 70 oC)
14 (FANDIS*) Option
16 GND1 -
17, 18 -
19, 21 +28 V1 Supply voltage for power units
20, 22 POWGND1 Gnd for power units
23 F1GATE Filament control, FET:n TR 2 drive
24, 26 POWGND1 -
25 F2GATE Filament control, FET:n TR 3 drive
27, 28 -
29 +19 V1 Analog supply voltage
30, 32 ANGND1 Analog gnd
31 -19 V1 Analog supply voltage
34, 36 ANGND1 -
35 KVFB Feedback signal from tube high voltage
37 MAFB Feedback signal from tube current
38, 40 ANGND1 -
39 FILFB Feedback signal from filament voltage

Connector J1402
1 ANGND1 Analog gnd
2 TUBEHOT Tubehead too hot (over 70 oC)
3 KVFB+ Feedback voltage from positive high voltage
4 KVFB- Feedback voltage from negative high voltage
5 MAFB+ Feedback signal from tube current
6 FILF Filament voltage
7 F2 -
8 F1 Filament voltage switch mode drive
Connector J1403
1 +5V Supply voltage for the soft tissue filter
potentiometer
2 FILTPOS Soft tissue filter position signal
3 GND1 Logic gnd
4 -
Connector J1404
1 INT28V COOLING FAN 3 positive voltage
2 FAN3- COOLING FAN 3 negative voltage
Doc. code 8200629 4 - 14 - 7


Doc. code 8200629 4 - 14 - 9

N1400 Tubehead Controller 4. Circuit Boards

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 14 - 11

N1400 Tubehead Controller 4. Circuit Boards

4. Circuit Boards N1500 Tubehead and N1550 Diode Hybride
N1500 Tubehead (TH) and N1550 Diode Hybride (DH)
Location
Both boards are inside tubehead.
Access not possible.

None. If either or both of these boards malfunction, the
tubehead must be replaced.
Description
The tubehead consists of an x-ray tube and the N1500
board and N1550 board which includes high voltage
and filament transformers, cascade capacitors, high
voltage diodes, and feedback resistors to generate
feedback signals from the high voltage and tube cur-
rent.
The voltage across R1 and R2 are high voltage feed-

back signals. The voltage across R7 is the tube current
feedback signal. There are no serviceable parts inside
the tubehead and therefore tube head must not be
opened in the field. Note also that tubehead warranty
does not cover tubeheads that have been opened in
the field.
Signal Description
F1 Filament voltage switch mode drive
F2 Filament voltage switch mode drive
FILF Filament voltage
KVFB+ Feedback voltage from positive high voltage
KVFB- Feedback voltage from negative high voltage
GND1 Logic gnd
MAFB Feedback signal from tube current
TUBEHOT Tubehead too hot (over 70 oC)
HP1, HP2 High voltage transformer primary input
Doc. code 8200629 4 - 15 - 1

N1500 Tubehead and N1550 Diode Hybride 4. Circuit Boards

4. Circuit Boards N1600 Display and Keyboard Interface
N1600 Display and Keyboard Interface (DKI)
Location
In the control panel.
To access, remove the control panel cover.

None.
Description
The N1600 board contains voltage regulators for the
electro-luminesence display and circuits to operate the
buzzer (speaker) and to generate movement signals for
the Z-motor and the Y-motor.
The speaker is activated for the duration of an exposure

and briefly when a key is pressed or an error message
appears on the display.
For the motor movements, voltages SREF1 and LAYER

are generated according to the key pressed (Z-UP1 or Z-
UP2* and LAYER+ or LAYER-). These voltages drive
either the Z-motor, which moves the unit up/down, or the
Y-motor which positions the focal trough by moving the
rotating unit towards or away from the column.
Doc. code 8200629 4 - 16 - 1

N1600 Display and Keyboard Interface 4. Circuit Boards
Indicator LEDs
D1 green +5V on
D5 green EL+15V on
D8 green EL+5V on
Test points
TP1 Buzzer output
TP2 SPEAKER Buzzer input
TP3 GND -
TP4 EL+15V -
TP5 EL+19V -
TP6 EL+5V -
TP7 EL+9V -
Connector J1601
2, 4, 6, 8,
9, 10, 12, 13 GND
5 HS Horizontal sync
7 VS Vertical sync
11 -
14, 17, 18 ANGND -
15, 16 EL+19V -
20 SREF1 Z-movement voltage:
up 3.7V
down 1.3V
stop 2.5V

Connector J1602
1-8 KEYCOL7-1* keyboard columns
9-13 KEY_ROW4-0 keyboard rows
14, 17, 18 GND -
15, 16 EL+9V -
19 SPEAKER speaker output signal
20 LAYER Y- motor control:
out 3.7V
in 1.3V
stop 2.5V
Connector J1603
1,2 EL+15V -
3,4 EL+5V -
5 BLANK/NC Not used
6, 7, 8, 10 -
12, 14, 16 GND -
9 VS Vertical sync
11 HS Horisontal sync
Connector J1604
6-13 KEYCOL0-7* Keyboard columns
1-5 KEY_ROW0-4 Keyboard rows
14 PGND
Connector J1605
1 GND 2
2 LAYER- Y-motor drive towards column
3 LAYER+ Y-motor drive away from column
4 Z-DOWN1* Z-motor drive down
5 Z-UP1* Z-motor drive up
Doc. code 8200629 4 - 16 - 3


Doc. code 8200629 4 - 16 - 5


4. Circuit Boards N1700 Ceph Interface
N1700 Ceph Interface (CI)
Location
In the ceph head support.
To access, remove the cephalostat cover.

None.
Description
The N1700 board is used to send information on the
size of the cephalometric cassette to the N600 board
via the SPI bus (MISOA, MISOB). The board also con-
trols the soft tissue filter positioning LEDs on the N1800
board, using data coming from N600 via the SPI bus,
and controls the Z-motor movement using an analog
signal.
Eight micro switches connected to CCSENS1*-

CCSENS8* determine the size of the cassette and its
position in the cassette holder. The size and position
information is converted into serial format by IC6 and
sent to the microprocessor on the N600 board.
IC7 converts the serial data from the microprocessor to

parallel outputs that switch on leds which indicate the
position of the soft tissue filter.
There are two Z-motor switches on the side of the

cephalostat, one for driving the unit up and one for
driving it down. The circuitry on N1700 for these
switches generates a reference signal that goes to the
microprocessor N300 and controls the z-motor move-
ment according to the table below.
Z-Movement TP1 Voltage

up 3.7V
down 1.3V
stop 2.5V
Doc. code 8200629 4 - 17 - 1

N1700 Ceph Interface 4. Circuit Boards

Test pins
TP1 SREF2 -
TP2 GND2 -
TP3 SLV2* -
TP4 SLV3* -
TP6 +5V -
Connector J1701
1 +9V2 +9V supply voltage to be regulated to +5V
3 +9V2 -
2 GND2 Gnd (+5V)
4 GND2 -
16 GND2 MOSIA Differential RS485 signal
12-15 SLVSEL0-3 Slave Select 0-3. SPI-väylän osoitelinjat
17 (CEPHAUTO) Not used
18 SREF2 Analog signal to control up/down z-movement
19 (ON2) Not used
20 (CEPHMAG) Not used
Doc. code 8200629 4 - 17 - 3

Connector J1702
1 CCSENS2* Ceph Cassette Micro switch 1-8.
2 CCSENS1* -
4 CCSENS7* -
5 CCSENS4* -
6 CCSENS6* -
7 CCSENS8* -
8 CCSENS5* -
9 GND2 Gnd
10 GND2 -
Connector J1703
1 +5V Regulated +5V
2 FLED1* Filter position Led 1-5.
3 FLED2* -
4 FLED3* -
5 FLED4* -
6 FLED5* -
7 FLED6* Not used
8 FLED7* Not used
Connectors J1704/J1705
1 Z_UP2* Analog signal to ZMC (via CU1) to control
Z-movement
2 GND2 -
3 Z_DOWN2* -

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 17 - 5


4. Circuit Boards N1800 Ceph Filter Position Indicators
N1800 Ceph Filter Position Indicators (CFPI)
Location
To access remove cephalostat cover.

None.
Description
On the N1800 board there are the LED’s that indicate
the position of the soft tissue filter.
Connector J1801
1 +5V Supply voltage for LED’s
2-6 FLED1-5* Filter position LED 1-5 control
Doc. code 8200629 4 - 18 - 1

N1800 Ceph Filter Position Indicators 4. Circuit Boards
7-8 FLED 7-8* Not used

4. Circuit Boards N1900/1901/2200/2201 Ceph Cassette Sensors (CCS1/2)
N1900/1901/2200/2201 Ceph Cassette Sensors (CCS1/2)
Location
In the ceph head cassette holder.
To access, remove ceph cassette holder cover.

None.
Description
Two ceph head cassette sensors boards are used in
the cassette holder to identify the size and position of
the cephalometric cassette when it is inserted into the
cassette holder.
Metric units use:

- N1900 Ceph Cassette Sensors 1 Metric (CCS1M) and
- N2200 Ceph Cassette Sensors 2 Metric (CCS2M)

Inch units use:
- N1901 Ceph Cassette Sensors 1 Inch (CCS1I) and
- N2201 Ceph Cassette Sensors 2 Inch (CCS2I)

Each pair of boards include a number of microswitches
that are used to determine the size and position of the
cassette. There are nine microswitches in the metric
sensor boards and six on the inch sensor boards.
IMPORTANT NOTE
The same printed circuit board (N1900) is used for both
the N1900 metric sensor board and the N1901 inch
sensor board. The difference between the two boards is
the number and positions of the microswitches soldered
to the board.
The same also applies to the N2200 and N2201 sensor

boards. The same printed circuit board (N2200) is used
by both sensor boards.
Doc. code 8200629 4 - 19 - 1

N1900/1901/2200/2201 Ceph Cassette Sensors (CCS1/2) 4. Circuit Boards
Connector J1901
2 CCSENS1* Cephalo Cassette SENSOR 1*-8*
1 CCSENS2* -
3 CCSENS3* -
5 CCSENS4* -
8 CCSENS5* -
6 CCSENS6* -
4 CCSENS7* -
7 CCSENS8* -
9 GND2 -
10 GND2 -
Connector J1902
1 CCSENS3* Cassette detection signal from N2200
2 CCSENS4* Cassette detection signal from N2200
3 CCSENS8* Signal used only in N1900/N2200
4 GND2 -
Left-hand Ceph Right-hand Ceph

CCSENS(X)* CCSENS(X)*
Cassette size 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Cassette size 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8
18 x 24 AV 0 x 1 1 x 0 1 1 18 x 24 AV 1 1 x 0 x 0 1 x
18 x 24 SV 1 0 0 1 x 0 1 1 18 x 24 SV 1 0 0 1 x 0 1 1
18 x 24 AH 0 x x 1 0 1 1 x 18 x 24 AH 1 x x 0 0 1 1 x
24 x 30 AV 0 x x 1 0 1 1 x 24 x 30 AV 1 x x 0 0 1 1 x
24 x 30 SV 1 x x 1 x x 0 0 24 x 30 SV 1 x x 1 x x 0 0
24 x 30 AH 0 x x x x 0 1 x 24 x 30 AH x x x 0 x 0 1 x
8" x 10 " AV 0 x 1 1 x 0 - - 8" x 10" AV 1 1 x 0 x 0 - -

8" x 10 " SV1 0 0 1 x 0 - - 8" x 10 " SV1 0 0 1 x 0 - -
8" x 10 " AH 0 x x 1 0 1 - - 8" x 10 " AH 1 x x 0 0 1 - -
x = Does not matter

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 19 - 3

The N1900/N1901 board - wiring diagram

The N1900/N1901 board - component layout
Doc. code 8200629 4 - 19 - 5

The N2200/N2201 board - wiring diagram
The N2200/N2201 board - component layout

4. Circuit Boards N2000 Line Interface Unit
N2000 Line Interface Unit (LIU)
Location
On the side of moving column.
To access remove the right-hand column cover.

Fuse F1 8 AT, 250 VAC at 230 VAC mains
16 AT, 250 VAC at 115 VAC mains
Size 6.3mm x 32mm
WARNING
Description
The N2000 board is a connector board for supplying
mains voltage (220-240 VAC or 115 VAC) to the unit.
The board include a mains fuse and mains over-voltage
protection varistors.
Doc. code 8200629 4 - 20 - 1

N2000 Line Interface Unit 4. Circuit Boards

4. Circuit Boards N2100 Top/Bottom Sensor
N2100 Top/Bottom Sensor (TBS)
Location
There are two N2100 boards in the unit. Both are at-
tached to the moving column, one near the top and one
near the bottom.
To access the top one the column covers and then the
mirror and cover behind the mirror must be removed.
To access the lower one remove the front cover col-
umn.

None
Description
TOP/BOTTOM sensor consists of an optical reflective
detector LED. The signal SENSPOW (when high) acti-
vates the detector LED. The detector LED is activated
when a reflective surface is placed in front of it and its
light is reflected. If there is no reflected light the sensor
does not operate. This signal drives the transistor to
either the on or off state (TOP or BOTTOM).
IMPORTANT NOTE
The lower N2100 board detects the position of the unit
when it reaches its maximum height, and the upper
N2100 board when the unit reaches its minimum height.
If the maximum height to which the unit moves is too

high the lower N2100 board can be moved to a second
position which reduces the height to which the unit can
be driven. For information on how to do this refer to the
"Installation and set-up manual".
Doc. code 8200629 4 - 21 - 1

N2100 Top/Bottom Sensor 4. Circuit Boards

4. Circuit Boards N2300 Rotation Position Sensor
N2300 Rotation Position Sensor (RPS)
Location
Inside C-arm.
To access remove the C-arm covers.

None.
Description
The N2300 board comprises three optosensors that are
used to detect the rotational position of the C-arm. The
signals from the three sensors are RSENS1*-
RSENS3*.
Each optosensor comprises a transmitter LED, and a
receiver, or base. The sensor signals remain on as long
as the base receives light from the LED. If the light
beam to the base is cut off, for example, the positioning
rail the sensor signal is switched off. The signal
SENSPOW (when high) activates the optosensor LED.
Doc. code 8200629 4 - 22 - 1

N2300 Rotation Position Sensor 4. Circuit Boards

4. Circuit Boards N2400 Cassette Type Sensor
N2400 Cassette Type Sensor (CTS)
Location
In rotating unit cassette head.
To access remove the upper and inner covers from the
cassette head.

None.
Description
The N2400 board consists of four optical reflective
photo transistors that are used to detect the position
and type (the film/screen sensitivity number) of pano-
ramic cassette used.
Note that before any panoramic cassettes can be used

with the unit identification (type) labels must be at-
tached to cassettes and the sensitivity of their film/
screen combinations determined. For information on
how to do this refer to the user's manual.
Two of the detectors on the N2400 board are used to

detect if a cassette is present or not, the park position,
and the other two are used to detect the cassette type.
Black and white areas on the cassette label either
reflect or do not reflect the light from the photo transis-
tor and thus activate or not activate the detector. Signal
SENSPOW (when high) activates the park position
detectors. When these detectors detect the pre-defined
park code, they switch the cassette type detectors on.
With two signals (two bits) it is possible for the type
detectors to detect four different combinations:
- no cassette
- cassette with sensitivity number 1
Doc. code 8200629 4 - 23 - 1

N2400 Cassette Type Sensor 4. Circuit Boards

4. Circuit Boards N2400 Cassette Type Sensor
Doc. code 8200629 4 - 23 - 3

N2400 Cassette Type Sensor 4. Circuit Boards

4. Circuit Boards N2500 Opto-Sensor X, Y, C
N2500 Opto-Sensor X, Y, C (OS)
Location
X-movement sensor in sliding assembly.
To access, remove front cover.
Y-movement sensor in support arm.

To access, remove top cover
C-movement sensor in rotating unit cassette head.

To access, remove cassette head assembly - upper
cover.

None.
Description
Three N2500 boards are used in the unit. They are
used to detect end positions of movements along the X-
axis, the Y-axis and C-axis (the cassette carriage). Each
board comprises two optical switches which generate
sensor signals XSENS1* and XSENS2* (YSENS,
CSENS) according to the end position activated.
Each optosensor comprises a transmitter LED, and a

Doc. code 8200629 4 - 24 - 1

N2500 Opto-Sensor X, Y, C 4. Circuit Boards

4. Circuit Boards N2600 Vertical Position Sensors
N2600 Vertical Position Sensors (VPS)
Location
Inside C-arm.
To access, remove C-arm covers.

None.
Description
The N2500 board is used to detect end positions of
movement along the V-axis. The board comprises two
optical switches which generate sensor signals
VSENS1* and VSENS2* according to the end position
activated.
The optosensor comprises a transmitter LED, and a
Doc. code 8200629 4 - 25 - 1

N2600 Vertical Position Sensors 4. Circuit Boards

5. Service Codes Contents
5. Service Codes
Contents
Introduction ......................................................................................................... 5-1
Code types .......................................................................................................... 5-1
Using Service Codes .......................................................................................... 5-2
Selecting service codes .................................................................................... 5-2
Using the service code menus ........................................................................... 5-4
Exiting the service mode ................................................................................... 5-7
Storing new settings .......................................................................................... 5-7
List of Service Codes ......................................................................................... 5-9
Factory and installation setups ....................................................................... 5-10
Service Code Descriptions .............................................................................. 5-11
Code 9301: Parameters saved into FLASH memory .................................. 5-11
Code 9411: S/W-packages updating with the PC ....................................... 5-11
Code 9420: X-ray tube list .......................................................................... 5-11
Code 9430: Event log ................................................................................. 5-12
Code 9431: Failure log ............................................................................... 5-13
Code 9700: Main Setup entry ..................................................................... 5-14
Code 9701: Manual switches not monitored ............................................... 5-34
Code 9703: Exposure without movements .................................................. 5-35
Code 9711: Print menu ............................................................................... 5-35
Code 9712: S/W packages version information .......................................... 5-41
Code 9718: Service code list ...................................................................... 5-42
Code 9770: H/W test menu ......................................................................... 5-43
Code 9775: Patient In/Out position not monitored ....................................... 5-56
Code 9778: Clear Exposure Counter and logs............................................ 5-56
Code 9779: X-ray generator test menu ....................................................... 5-58
Code 9791: Ceph Setup ............................................................................. 5-68
Movement and alignment codes ..................................................................... 5-69
Code 9960: X movement test ..................................................................... 5-69
Code 9961: Y movement test ...................................................................... 5-69
Code 9962: r movement test ....................................................................... 5-69
Code 9963: v movement test ...................................................................... 5-69
Code 9964: c movement test ...................................................................... 5-70
Doc. code 8200629 5-i

Contents 5. Service Codes
Code 9970: Alignment check program ........................................................ 5-70

Code 9971: Alignment program for rotation ................................................ 5-70
Code 9973: Maint Gear ratio test for C movement ...................................... 5-70
Code 9974: Maint X-ray beam center test ................................................... 5-70
Code 9975: Multipurpose test exposure (13.5 s) ......................................... 5-71
Code 9976: Mechanical endurance test ...................................................... 5-71
Code 9977: Maint Beam alignment test ...................................................... 5-71
Code 9978: Exposure timeout test (35 s) .................................................... 5-72

5. Service Codes
Introduction
Service codes allow you to select different service
menus which are used to check and set unit param-
eters and to test the operation of the unit.
All service codes are four digits in length (exposure
program numbers are 3 digits in length) and start with
the number 9, for example 9700.
Code types
There are three categories of service codes:
- codes with numbers between 9300 and 9499
Codes with numbers between 9300 and 9499 are used

to display information and for parameter and software
updating.
9301 –- Parameters saved into flash memory

9411 —- S/W-packages updating with the PC
9420 —- X-ray tube list
9430 —- Event log
9431 —- Failure log
Note that the event log, service code 9430, can also be
opened directly without keying in the service number
and password. This is described in the user’s manual.
Codes with numbers between 9700 to 9799 are used

during factory set up and during installation, and are
used to check that the unit functions correctly.
9700 —- SYSTEM SETUP entry

9701 –- Manual switches not monitored
9703 —- Exposure without movements
9711 —- Print menu
9712 —- S/W packages version information
9718 —- Service code list
9770 —- H/W test menu
9775 —- Patient In/Out position not monitored
9778 —- Clear Exposure Counter and logs
9779 —- X-ray generator test menu
9791 —- Ceph Setup
Doc. code 8200629 5-1

5. Service Codes
Codes with numbers between 9900 to 9999 are test

programs and used mostly to check the alignment of
the unit when it is installed.
9960 –- X movement test

9961 –- Y movement test
9962 –- R movement test
9963 –- V movement test
9964 –- C movement test
9972 –- Rotor gear ratio test
9973 –- Cassette gear ratio test
9974 -– X-ray beam centering with jig
9975 –- Multipurpose test exposure
9976 –- Test for mechanical movements
9977 –- Beam alignment test
9978 –- Exposure timeout test
Using Service Codes
Selecting service codes

Service codes can be selected whenever the unit is on.
They can be selected when the unit is in the ready
(stand-by) mode (for information on how to get the unit
into the ready mode, refer to the user's manual) or if the
unit is malfunctioning. For example, if an error message
appears on the display you will be unable to get the unit
ready to take an exposure. However, you will be able to
enter the service mode and select a service code.
To enter the service mode and select a service code do

the following:
1. Press the clear (C) key twice. Four zeros will appear
on the display and replace the program number. In
addition the patient size numbers along the bottom
row of the display will change to normal numbers
and a message will appear on the display in the
information line asking you to key in the program
number you require.

5. Service Codes
Key in program number and press E
9700 2. Key in the four-digit service code that you require

using the number keys at the bottom of the display.
The numbers will replace the zeros. If you key in a
wrong digit press the clear (C) key to remove the
incorrect digit.
Press the E (Enter) key to accept the number. A
message will appear on the display in the informa-
tion line asking you to key in your password.
Enter password and press E
3. Key in your four-digit password, it will appear as

XXXX stars in the lower right-hand corner of the display.
If the unit is not ready or not working correctly there
will be no password request. In this case just key in
the four digit password.
Press the E key.
The menu, or other information, for service code
you have selected will appear on the display.
The menu will replace the user screen on the dis-

play. In some cases, however, the user screen will
not clear and a status message will appear in the
upper message (program description) line.
For example, if you select service code 9775 the
following message will appear:
— Patient In/Out position not monitored
Doc. code 8200629 5-3

5. Service Codes
Using the service code menus

When a service code menu appears on the display it
usually offer a range of options or values a new menu
will appear and you must select an option and then
press the E key to accept the option. For example the
menu for service code 9700, system setup, has seven
options.
=== SYSTEM SETUP: factory setups ==== Page 1 ==

#0. RETURN to MAIN level
#1. Enter SRC1 type number [000-001]
#2. Enter unit serial number [00070004]
#3. Primary collimator setup
— Installation setups:———————
#4. Ceph setup/test menu
#5. Set date and clock
#6. Select user interface language
#7. More setups
#?.
Use the keys at the bottom of the display to select the

option number you require. The option number selected
will appear on the last line of the display next to the
question mark (# ?). For example, if you wish to set the
date and time of the unit press the 5 key to select op-
tion number 5.

#7. More setups
#?. 5
Option selected

5. Service Codes
NOTE
If you key in an option number that is not in the menu,
for example you key in 8 and press the E key when
there are only 7 options, a message telling you that the
number is not acceptable will appear on the display.
Selection not in range. Select again.

Press any menu key
You cannot continue until you select an option that is

within the accepted range. To return to the previous
menu press any key.
After you have selected the option number press the E

key.
A second-level menu will replace the first level menu.

Under the menu heading you will see the current set-
ting, in this case the date and time, and under this a
number of options that allow you to change this setting.
=== Clock Setup:===============================

> DATE: 1997.09.23 Tu 14:39
#0. RETURN to Previous level

#1. Date: Year.Month.Day(YY.MM.DD):
#2. Time: Hour.Min (hh.mm):
#3. Sunday #4. Monday
#5. Tuesday #6. Wednesday
#7. Thursday #8. Friday
#9. Saturday
#?:
To change the setting, key in the appropriate option

number and press the E key. In the menu above, for
example, if you wish to change the time select option
number 2.
Doc. code 8200629 5-5

5. Service Codes
The option number will appear on the last line of the

display next to the question mark (# ?). The option
number also includes a prompt that will enable you to
key in a new setting, in this case hours (hh) and min-
utes (mm).
=== Clock Setup:===============================

> DATE: 1997.09.23 Tu 14:39

#9. Saturday
#?: 2
Option selected
NOTE
In some cases a third level menu may open after you
press the E key and you will have to select another
option before the setting can be changed.
Key in a new option setting, in this case the time, and

press the E key.
The menu will disappear briefly and then reappear with

the newly selected setting at the top of the display
under the heading.
=== Clock Setup:===============================

> DATE: 1997.09.23 Tu 13:39
Newly selected setting
#9. Saturday
#?:

5. Service Codes
Press the E key to accept the new setting and return to

the previous menu.
All options can be opened and the settings changed in

the same way as described above - open option,
change setting, press E to accept new setting, press E
a second time to return the previous menu.
Exiting the service mode

Press the E key, or follow the keying instruction on the
display, until you return to the user display. The number
of times you have to press the key will depend on how
many menus or options the service code has.
CAUTION
After you have changed a setting the new settings
MUST be saved permanently into the unit memory.
If you do not store the new settings in the memory they
will be lost when the unit switched off.
Storing new settings

Whenever unit settings are changed the new settings
MUST be saved permanently into the unit memory.
There are two ways to store new setting:
- the maintenance mode method and

- the service code method
Maintenance mode method

1. Select the maintenance mode by pressing the Maint
mode key that is on the right-hand side of the dis-
play.
Note
If the maintenance mode does not appear on the
display, press the menu selection key repeatedly
until it does.
Select program
2. Press the Store sttngs key to select the program

that will store the new unit settings in the unit's
memory. A frame will appear around program name.
Doc. code 8200629 5-7

5. Service Codes
Key in password and press E
3. Key in the password using the keys at the bottom of

XXXX the display and press the E key. You will hear a long
signal tone that indicates that the new parameters
have been stored in the memory.
4. Switch the unit off and then on again and check that
the new parameters have be correctly stored.
Service code method

1. Press the C key twice. A message asking you to key
in the program number you require will appear on
the display
Key in program number and press E
2. Key in service code number 9301 and then press

9301 the E key. A message asking you to key in your
password will appear on the display.
Enter password and press E
3. Key in your four-digit password. The program op-

XXXX tion to store new settings will appear on the right-
hand side of the display. The frame round the option
text indicates that the option has been selected.
4. Press the E key. After a couple of seconds the

frame round the option text will disappear. This
indicates that the new settings have been stored in
the unit memory.
5. Switch the unit off and then on again and check that
the new parameters have be correctly stored.
NOTE
If a setting is not stored in the memory before the unit is
switched off the message:
== MISSING CONFIGURATION ITEMS DETECTED

-- Menu Setting NOT Saved
Press any menu key
Will appear on the display when the unit is switched on

again.

5. Service Codes
List of Service Codes

The service codes are listed in numerical order.
=== Service Codes + Titles ====================

9301 — Parameters saved into FLASH memory
9411 — S/W-packages updating with the PC
9420 — X-ray tube list
9430 — Event log
9431 — Failure log
9700 — SYSTEM SETUP entry
9701 – Manual switches not monitored
9703 — Exposure without movements
9711 — Print menu
9712 — S/W packages version information
9718 — Service code list
9770 — H/W test menu
9775 — Patient In/Out position not monitored
9778 — Clear Exposure Counter and logs
9779 — X-ray generator test menu
9791 — Ceph Setup
The list of service codes above can be displayed on the

unit control panel by selecting service code 9718 -
Service code list
The following service codes (alignment programs) do

not appear in the service code list.
9960 –- X movement test

9961 –- Y movement test
9962 –- R movement test
9963 –- V movement test
9964 –- C movement test
9972 –- Rotor gear ratio test
9973 –- Cassette gear ratio test
9974 -– X-ray beam centering with jig
9975 –- Multipurpose test exposure
9976 –- Test for mechanical movements
9977 –- Beam alignment test
9978 –- Exposure timeout test
All the service codes are explained in more detail in the

section "Service Code Descriptions"
Doc. code 8200629 5-9

5. Service Codes
Factory and installation setups

The main service code is 9700 - SYSTEM SETUP. The
system setup menu includes all the factory and the
installation setups .

#7. More setups
#?.
In normal situations there is no need to alter the factory

setups in the field. The factory setups only needs to be
changed if the unit is updated with the addition of a
cephalometric unit.
The installation setups are for setting the date and time,
the user interface language and for calibrating the
cephalometric unit when it is installed.
Service code 9700 is explained in more detail in the

section "Service Code Descriptions"

5. Service Codes
Service Code Descriptions
Code 9301: Parameters saved into FLASH memory

Saves new unit settings in the unit's memory. New
settings MUST be permanently saved in the memory. If
they are not they will be lost when the unit is switched
off.
Settings can also be saved in the memory by using the
maintenance mode.
Refer to the section "Storing new settings"
Code 9411: S/W-packages updating with the PC

The unit software can be upgraded either by replacing
the software modules or by down loading the new soft-
ware from a computer. This is described in section -
"Using a PC with the Cranex Tome".
Code 9420: X-ray tube list

(Also accessible using the maintenance mode)
This code displays a list of all the tubes that the unit
can be fitted with.
Tubes
Id Manufacture Code kV Ang Foc CR/W C/kJ F/V
0 COMET XL-90-5deg/04 90 5 0.4 200 19.2 100.
1 SIEMENS DE 100/150oe 100 5 0.5 200 19.2 100.
2 TOSHIBA D-051SB 100 5 0.5 265 28.0 4.
3 CHIRANA DOA 100/0,6 100 5 0.5 200 19.8 7.
4 C.E.I. OPX/105 100 5 0.5 250 30.0 8.
5 EUREKA. DV-100 100 5 0.5 277 26.0 6.
Selection:—————
The tube that the unit is using is highlighted.

If the existing tube is changed for a new one from a
different manufacturer, the new one must be selected
from the list before the unit is used.
Use the arrow keys at the bottom of the display select
the new tube.
Press E-key and then confirm the selection by pressing
the Sel (Selected) key.
Make sure that you store the new setting in the
memory.
Refer to the section "Storing new settings".
Doc. code 8200629 5 - 11

5. Service Codes
Code 9430: Event log

The event log displays information for the last hundred
exposures taken. Note that the log includes both suc-
cessful exposures and unsuccessful exposure at-
tempts.
Events
Date Time ExpCtr Pgm Mod kV mA s PS Cas Y-Lr E
970923 1345 69 001 Man 70 10.0 1 5 1 0.0 *
970923 1343 68 001 Man 70 10.0 2 5 1 0.0 *
... ... ... ... ... .. ... . . . ... .
970805 1245 2 004 Man 70 10.0 15 5 1 0.0
970710 1343 1 001 Man 70 10.0 15 5 1 0.0
Each line is for one exposure event. The information

that appears is described below.
Date date of exposure: year, month, day

Time time of exposure: hours, minutes
ExpCtr exposure number
Pgm program number used
Mod exposure mode (man = manual)
kV kV used for exposure
mA mA used for exposure
s duration of exposure in seconds
PS patient size used
Cas cassette no., film/screen combination,
used
Y-Lr position of focal trough
E exposure success status
An asterisk (*) in the E column indicates that the expo-

sure was unsuccessful. Information giving the reason
for the exposure failure will appear in the error box at
the top of screen, for example:
“EXPOSURE INTERRUPTED - Press RETURN”
If there is no asterisk the exposure was successful and

the error box will be empty.
The arrow keys at the bottom of the display can be

used to scroll up or down through the event list. The
latest exposure is at the top of the list and the oldest at
the bottom.

5. Service Codes
Code 9431: Failure log

The failure log displays information for the last hundred
unsuccessful exposures taken.
Events
Date Time ExpCtr Pgm Mod kV mA s PS Cas Y-Lr
970923 1345 69 001 Man 70 10.0 1 5 1 0.0
970923 1343 68 001 Man 70 10.0 2 5 1 0.0
... ... ... ... ... .. ... . . . ...
970820 1003 2 001 Man 70 10.0 0 5 1 0.0
970814 0956 1 001 Man 70 10.0 4 5 1 0.0
Each line is for one exposure failure. The information

that appears is described below.
Date date of exposure: year, month, day

Time time of exposure: hours, minutes
ExpCtr exposure number
Pgm program number used
Mod exposure mode (man = manual)
kV kV used for exposure
mA mA used for exposure
s duration of exposure in seconds
PS patient size used
Cas cassette no., film/screen combination,
used
Y-Lr position of focal trough
Information giving the reason for the exposure failure

will appear in the error box at the top of screen, for
example:
GENERATOR FAILURE: kV”
The arrow keys at the bottom of the display can be

used to scroll up or down through the failure list. The
latest exposure failure is at the top of the list and the
oldest at the bottom.
Doc. code 8200629 5 - 13

5. Service Codes
Code 9700: MAIN SETUP entry

This code allows you to access all the factory and
installation setups. The menu is divided into two sec-
tions, one for factory setups, page 1 and installation
setups pages 1 and 2.

#1. Enter SRC1 type number [not-set]
#7. More setups
#?.
.
.
.
=== SYSTEM SETUP: on/off setups ===== Page 2 ==
#0. RETURN to PREVIOUS level
#1. Cassette type identification [on->off]
#2. PIO auto return [on->off]
#3. Ceph PIO auto return [on->off]
#?.
In normal circumstances the factory setups must not be

changed.
Installation setups are used when the unit is installed.
They are described in the installation and setup
manual.
9700 - option #1 (page 1)

#7. More setups
#?. 1

5. Service Codes
When this option is selected ( number key then E key)

a second-level menu will appear on the display.
== SRC1 Type Number Setup ========================

> — Look Service Manual for setting SRC1 Type Number
— Current type number: [000-001]
— Press only E to RETURN to PREVIOUS level
— Enter Type number (6 digits): e.g. 003-406
?:[———]
This menu allows you to change the factory set type

number of the unit. The current type number, the exist-
ing one appears on the display, is the same as the
product code or the type label.
The coding principle is described in the section 2 "Iden-
tifying the unit version". The same information is also
included in the Installation Manual. Refer to either of
these sections for coding information.
The type number only needs to be changed if a pan
unit is to be upgraded to a pan/ceph unit.
To change the number:

1. Key in the new six-digit type number using the keys
at the bottom of the display. The number will appear
on the display next to the question (?) mark.
2. Press the E key to accept the new number.

#7. More setups
#?. 2
Doc. code 8200629 5 - 15

5. Service Codes
When this option is selected a second-level menu will

appear on the display.
== Serial Number Setup ==================

> — Current serial number: [00070004]
— Press 0 to RETURN to MAIN level
— Enter serial number (max. 8 digits):
?:0———-
This is used to change the serial number of the unit.

The serial number appears on the unit type label and
on the display when option 2 is selected.
The serial number must agree with the SRC1 type
number. The numbers must always be quoted when
ordering spare parts and when discussing maintenance
and trouble shooting problems with the manufacturer.
The serial number MUST NOT be changed without

permission from the manufacturer.

...
#7. More setups
#?. 3
When selected a second-level menu will appear on the

display.
=== Primary Collimator selection ======

> — Current setup: 1
#1. Standard metric
#2. Large metric
#3. Standard inch
#?.

5. Service Codes
This menu allows you to select the correct primary

collimator (aperture plate) if a cephalometric unit is
added after the unit has been installed.
You do not need to change the primary aperture if you
have already entered the new SRC1 type code.
The menu displays the number of the primary aperture

currently selected. There are three choices of aperture
plate:
#1. Standard metric:- unit without cephalometric unit or

with cephalometric unit that uses standard metric
cassettes
#2. Large metric:- cephalometric unit that uses large

metric cassettes
#3. Standard inch:- cephalometric unit that uses stand-

ard inch cassettes
To change the primary aperture:

1. Select the new primary aperture number you require
by using the keys at the bottom of the display. The
number will appear on the display next to the ques-
tion (?) mark.
2.. Press the E key to accept the new primary aperture

number.

#7. More setups
#?. 4
Doc. code 8200629 5 - 17

5. Service Codes

=== Ceph: Installation setup ==================

> #0. RETURN to MAIN level
#1. Ceph Configuration
#2. Set Vertical Offset
#3. Calibrate Ceph filter positions
— Ceph: H/W test utilities —————————
#4. Read Ceph filter A/D-values
#5. Test Ceph cassette switches
#6. Test Ceph filter position leds
#7. Ceph cassette/prim slit monitoring OFF
#?.
This menu offer a range of options that allow you to

align and check the operation of the cephalometric unit
when the unit is installed.
The same menu can also be accessed by using the
service code 9791.
9700 - option #4 (page 1) - second level option #1

#?. 1
When this option is selected a third-level menu will

== Ceph Configuration Setup =======================

>> — Current setup: CEPH is missing
#0. RETURN to previous level
#1. Remove CEPH device
#2. Left Hand and [mm] Cassettes
#3. Right Hand and [mm] Cassettes
#4. Left Hand and [in] Cassettes
#5. Right Hand and [in] Cassettes
#?.

5. Service Codes
This menu shows you the existing cephalometric con-

figuration, and offers a range of options that allow you
to select different cephalometric options
NOTE
If the unit is supplied with a cephalometric unit, the
correct configuration will already be selected.
The cephalometric options are:

#1. no cephalostat is installed
#2. a left-hand cephalostat that uses standard or large

metric cassettes
#3. a right-hand cephalostat that uses standard or large

metric cassettes
#4. a left-hand cephalostat that uses inch cassettes
#5. a right-hand cephsalostat that uses inch cassettes
To change the cephalometric configuration:

1. Select the new configuration number you require by
using the keys at the bottom of the display. The
number will appear on the display next to the ques-
tion (?) mark.
2. Press the E key to accept the new configuration and

then store the new setting in the memory.

#?. 2
Doc. code 8200629 5 - 19

5. Service Codes

NOTE
The ceph program must be selected and the unit in the
ceph position before the vertical offset can be set.
== Ceph Vertical Offset Setup:================

>> — Current setting: Beam Up, offset: 10 [mm]
#1. Beam down
#2. Beam up
#3. Set Vertical offset correction [mm]
#?.
When a cephalometric exposure is taken the tube head

moves slightly so the radiation beam is vertically cen-
tred on the cassette.
This menu is used during the cephalometric installation
procedure and allows the position of the radiation beam
to be adjusted.
The exiting setting can be seen under the menu head-
ing
The procedure for setting the vertical offset is described

in full in the Cranex Tome Installation Manual in the
section "Aligning the Cephalostat". Below is a short
overview of the procedure.
1. Check the position of the cephalometric beam with

the cephalometric alignment tool and decide
whether the beam must be moved up or down to
centre it.
2. Key in either 1 or 2 to select the direction, up or

down, in which the beam must be moved and press
E.
3. Key in 3 and then key in the number millimetres that

the beam must be moved to place it in the correct
position, up to 35mm in either direction. Press the E
key. The new offset value will appear on the display.

5. Service Codes
4. Check the position of the radiation before saving the

setting.

#?. 3

NOTE
The ceph program must be selected and the unit in the
ceph position before the soft tissue filter positions can
be set. Refer to installation manual for more information
on calibrating the soft tissue filter.
== Ceph Soft Filter Position Calibration ======

>> — Zero Position A/D-value set : 0x0A/010
— First Position A/D-value set : 0x50/080
— Last Position A/D-value set : 0xB4/180
#0. RETURN to previous level..
#1. Set Zero Position #4. Edit Zero Position
#2. Set First Position #5. Edit First Position
#3. Set Last Position #6. Edit Last Position
#?.
The soft tissue filter allows the soft tissue at the front of
the patient's face to be seen on a cephalometric expo-
sure.
The filter has three positions that must correspond to
three filter position lights that are mounted on the ce-
phalometric headrest.
This menu displays the existing filter positions, the
three lines below the menu name, and allows you to set
the filter positions, options 1, 2, and 3 and to edit them,
options 4, 5 and 6.
Doc. code 8200629 5 - 21

5. Service Codes
The zero position is for no filtration, the first position for

minimum filtration, and the last position for maximum
filtration.
The procedure for setting the positions of the soft tissue

positions is described in full in the Cranex Tome Instal-
lation Manual in the section "Aligning the Cephalostat".
Below is a short overview of the procedure.
1. Place the cephalometric fluorescent screen in the

cassette holder.
2. Select the cephalometric program for the largest

film size.
3. Protect yourself from radiation. Press the exposure

button so that you can see the position of the radia-
tion beam on the fluorescent screen. Turn the soft
tissue filter knob, located on the side of the tube
head assembly, until the edge of the beam lines up
with the last filter position line, maximum filtration,
on the fluorescent screen.
With a left-hand cephalometric unit the right-hand
edge of the beam must line up with the position line
on the right and with a right-hand unit the left-hand
edge must line up with the line on the left.
4. Enter the soft tissue filter calibration mode, key in 3,

set last position, and press the E key. The filter
position for the last position will appear at the bot-
tom of the display.

>> — Zero Position A/D-value set : 0x0A/010
— Last Position A/D-value set : 0xB4/180
#?. 3 Filter position
— Last Position A/D-value set : 0xA0 0x28 160
Press any menu key

5. Service Codes
5. Press any key to accept the filter position.
6. Repeat the above procedure for the other two filter

positions.
Position number 2 lines up with the first position line
and number three with the zero position line.
7. Make a note of the filter positions so that they can

be quickly reset if the memory fails and the settings
are lost.
The edit options, 4, 5 and 6, allow you to manually

enter the filter positions. This can be done if the origi-
nal settings have been lost and you do not wish to carry
out the complete filter calibration procedure.
To enter a filter position manually:

1. Key in the number of the filter position you wish to
edit, for example 6 - the last position, and press the
E key.
A prompt will appear on the display.
2. Enter the filter position using the numbers at the

bottom of the display.

>> — Zero Position A/D-value set : 0x0/000
— Last Position A/D-value set : 0x0/000
#?. 6
— Last Position A/D-value (0..255): 200
Press any menu key

Filter position keyed in
3. Press any key to accept the filter position.
Doc. code 8200629 5 - 23

5. Service Codes
Second level options 4, 5, 6, and 7 are for testing the

cephalometric unit.

#?. 4

== Ceph A/D value measurement ==================

>> — EXIT by pressing any key
— Ceph A/D-values (raw/filtered): 037/009
If the soft tissue filter lights do not come on when the

soft tissue filter knob is rotated, or soft tissue filtering
does not appear on radiographs even if filtration is
selected, this option will help you to identify the source
of the problem.
In normal use, soft tissue filtration is increased or de-

creased by rotating the filter positioning knob on the
side of the tube head. If the control signal from the filter
mechanism is cut an error message will appear on the
display and the filter position leds on the cephalometric
will not come on.
To check if the soft tissue filter is working select this

option and then turn the filter knob. The numeric values
on the last line of the menu must change when the
knob is turned.
If numeric value on the display does not change it

indicates that:
- the potentiometer is not working, or
- the signal between the potentiometer and the N900

board is cut, or
- the A/D-converter on the N900 board is damaged.

5. Service Codes
=== Ceph: Installation setup =================

— Ceph: H/W test utilities ————————-
#?. 5

== Ceph Cassette switches data :

— Ceph cassette SW binary data(1=up,0=down):
— Bit order 87654321: 11111111
There are eight micro switches in the cephalometric

cassette holder that identify the size, position and orien-
tation of a cephalometric cassette when it is placed in
the cassette holder. This option allows the operation of
the micro switches to be checked.
When a cassette is placed in the cassette holder it

presses some of the micro switches down and leaves
others unpressed. The number and positions of the
switches pressed identifies the size of cassette and
orientation being used. The cassette/micro switch con-
figurations are described in section 4, "N1900 - Ceph
cassette sensors".
If there is no cassette in the holder none of the switches

will be pressed down and the eight digits on the last line
of the menu will all be "1". If you press one of the
switches the digit will change from "1" to "0".
If the number does not change it indicates that there is

a failure, for example the switch is broken or the signal
from the switch is cut signal.
Doc. code 8200629 5 - 25

5. Service Codes

#?. 6

== Ceph LED tests ===========

>> #0. RETURN to previous level
#1. LED 1
#2. LED 1..2
#3. LED 1..3
#4. LED 1..4
#5. LED 1..5
#6. LEDs OFF
#7. LEDs flashing
#8. ALL ABOVE
#?.
There are five soft tissue filter position leds that indicate
the amount of soft tissue filtering (the position of the
filter). The LEDs light up when the soft tissue filter knob
is rotated. This menu allows you to check if the LEDs
work correctly.
To test the LEDs:

1. Key in the number of the LED or LEDs you wish to
test, and press the E key. The LED test will start.
#1 = LED 1 will come on
#2 = LEDs 1 and 2 will come on
#3 = LEDs 1, 2 and 3 will come on
#4 = LEDs 1, 2, 3, and 4 will come on
#5 = LEDs 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 will come on
#6 = All the LEDs will be off
#7 = All the LEDs will start to flash
#8 = The LEDs will light up one by one and than start to
flash

5. Service Codes
If the LEDs do not function correctly it is either because

:
- the positions of the soft tissue filter have not been
calibrated (to calibrate the filter refer to the installa-
tion manual)
- the LED board or LEDs are damaged
- there is no signal between the N900 board and the

LEDs

#?.
Option 7 switches off the software task that monitors

the states of the microswitches in cephalometric cas-
sette holder and the position of the primary aperture
plate.
If the cephalometric unit does not work correctly this

option allows you to take test exposures using the
cephalometric unit without prompt and error messages
appearing on the display. With the monitoring switched
off error messages are overridden.
In normal use monitoring must be on. For this reason

the off setting CANNOT be stored into the permanent
memory.
To change the status:

1. Key in option number 7
#?. 7
Doc. code 8200629 5 - 27

5. Service Codes
2. Press the E key and the status will change.
#7. Ceph cassette/prim slit monitoring ON

#?.
IMPORTANT NOTE
The option text indicates what the status will be AFTER
it has been changed.
For example, Ceph cassette/ prim slit monitoring ON
indicates that monitoring is currently switched OFF, and
that after you key in 7 and press the E key monitoring
will be switched ON.

#7. More setups
#?. 5

=== Clock Setup:===============================

> DATE: 1997.09.23 Tu 14:39

#9. Saturday
#?:

5. Service Codes
This option displays the date, day and time that the unit
is set to and allows the date, day and time to be reset.
The unit uses a real-time clock which has a battery

backup. In normal use the battery will last ten years.
The battery is located on the N600 board. For informa-
tion on how to replace the battery, refer to the section
that describes this board.
A real-time clock is needed so that the correct dates

and times appear in the event and failure lists. If the
clock is to serve its purpose correctly the time MUST be
set to the correct local time when the unit is installed.
The clock does not automatically reset itself for daylight

saving and must, therefore, be manually reset when
necessary. Also note that the time may have to be reset
if a unit is moved to a new location in a country where
there are time zones.
To reset the date:

1. Key in option number 1 and press the E key. A
prompt will appear on the last line of the menu
asking you to key in the date.
=== Clock Setup:===============================
> DATE: 1997.09.23 Tu 14:39

#9. Saturday
#?:1 Date (YY.MM.DD):
Prompt
2. Use the keys at the bottom of the display to key in
the new date. The date format is years, months
days. When you key in the year only the last two
digits need to be keyed in. For example, the year
1997 only requires 97 to be keyed in. The same
applies or the year 2000. Only 00 needs to be
keyed in. Make sure that you key in the a full stop
(.) after the year and the month.
Doc. code 8200629 5 - 29

5. Service Codes
=== Clock Setup:===============================

> DATE: 1997.09.23 Tu 14:39

#9. Saturday
#?: 1 Date (YY.MM.DD): 97.09.22
3. Press the E key after you have entered the date.

The screen will clear briefly and the new date will
appear at the top of the menu.
=== Clock Setup:===============================
> DATE: 1997.09.22 Tu 14:39
New date
To reset the time:

The procedure for resetting the time is similar to the
procedure for resetting the date.
Select option 2, press the E key, key in the new time
and then press the E key again to accept the new time.
To reset the day:

Select the number for the day you require and then
press the E key.

#7. More setups
#?. 6

5. Service Codes

== User Interface language selection : 1

> -- 0. Previous menu
-- 1. English
-- 2. Italiano
-- 3. Deutsch
-- 4. Suomi
-- 5. Français
-- 6. Polski
-- 7. Español
-- 8. Nederlans
#?.
This option allows you to select the interface language

that the display uses. The language that
Note that this option only affects the user menus and
messages. All service menus and messages will be in
English
Setting user interface language:

Key in the number of the language that is required and
then press the E key. The new language number will
appear at the top of the display.
When you return to the main menu it will be in the
language selected.
Remember to store the new setting in the memory.

#7. More setups
#?. 7
Doc. code 8200629 5 - 31

5. Service Codes


> #0.
#1.
RETURN to PREVIOUS level
Cassette type identification [on->off]
#?.
This option offers a range of settings that can be

switched on or off. At the factory all these setting are on
and usually there is no need to change these settings.
They only need to be changed if there is a problem with
the unit that cannot be fixed in the field, for example, no
spare parts for sensors, and a customer wants to con-
tinue to use the unit.

> #0.
#1.
#?.
This allows the panoramic cassette identification sen-

sors to be switched on or off.
In normal use a panoramic cassette must be must be
inserted in to the cassette carriage before an exposure
can be taken.
The message "Insert cassette" will appear on the dis-
play asking the user to do this. If one of the cassette
identification sensors is broken the cassette will not be
detected and this message will remain on the display.
The user cannot continue to use the unit when it is in
this state.
When the cassette identification sensors are switched
off the unit does not recognise the different cassette
sensitivity numbers (film/screen combinations), and will
use the sensitivity value of cassette 1 with all cassettes.

>

5. Service Codes
#0. RETURN to PREVIOUS level

#1. Cassette type identification [on->off]
#?.
In normal use the C-arm will automatically return to the

PIO (Patient In Out) position when ever the arm is
moved. If any of the PIO sensors are broken the unit
will not be able to "find" the PIO position and it will not
be possible to take an exposure. This setup allows this
feature to be switched off.
Note that when the PIO auto return is switched off the
C-arm will not return automatically to the PIO position
and the E key must be pressed every time the C-arm is
moved.

> #0.
#1.
#?.
When taking a cephalometric exposure the C-arm will

automatically return to the cephalometric PIO (Patient
In Out) position when ever the arm is moved. If the
ceph PIO sensor is broken the unit will not be able to
"find" the PIO position and it will not be possible to take
an exposure.
With this setup switches this feature can be switched
off.
Note that when the PIO auto return is switched off the
C-arm will not return automatically to the PIO position
and the E key must be pressed every time the C-arm is
moved.
Note that the PIO auto return feature can be temporar-
ily switched off (cannot be saved in the memory) using
service code 9775.
To switch the setups off:
1. Key in the number of the setup you wish to switch

off. The number will appear on the last line of the
menu
Doc. code 8200629 5 - 33

5. Service Codes

> #0.
#1.
#?. 1
2. Press the E key. The on - off status at the end of the

setup line will change to off - on which indicates that
the setup has been switched off.

> #0.
#1.
Cassette type identification [off->on]
#?.
3. To switch the setup back on again, repeat the above

procedure.
These setups can be permanently stored in the
memory. See section "Storing new settings".
Code 9701: Manual switches not monitored

This code switches the manual switches off. These
switches monitor the positions of the manual settings
that the user selects when the unit is being prepared to
take an exposure. The switches include: primary aper-
ture selection, cassette head position, cassette shield
position, chin-rest position etc.
If any of the switches are broken the correct manual

setting will not be detected and the system prompt will
remain on the display. The unit cannot be used when it
is in this state. When the manual switches are
switched off (not monitored) the prompt messages will
not appear and the unit can be used in the normal way.
CAUTION
Care must be taken when this option is used as is
possible to take an exposures with incorrect settings,
for example a pan exposure with a tomo aperture.

5. Service Codes
IMPORTANT NOTE
To switch manual switch monitoring ON again switch
unit off and then on with the power switch.
This setting CANNOT be permanently stored in the
memory.
Code 9703: Exposure without movements

This service code allows an exposure to be taken with-
out the unit moving. This feature works with any
imaging program. If this code is selected and an oscillo-
scope is connected to the X-ray generator the operation
of the generator can be checked.
Service code 9779 is dedicated for checking X-ray
generator troubleshooting.
Code 9711: Print menu

This code allows certain information to be sent from the
TOME to a PC and then printed.
Before this can be done a PC must be connected to the

Cranex Tome and a printer connected to the PC.
The information that can be sent to the PC and printed

is:
=== Print Selections:=========================

#1. Event log
#2. Failure log
#3. Service codes and functions
#4. System info/settings report
#5. Exposure parameters default print format
#?.
9711 - option #1
Doc. code 8200629 5 - 35

5. Service Codes
The event log can be also be viewed on the control

panel, see code 9430.
1. Use the number keys to select option number 1 and

then press the E key.

#1. Event log
#2. Failure log
#?. 1
Printing Event log ...

Record #: 10
The event log records will be sent to the PC. The

records are counted as they are sent.
The event log records will appear on the PC display as

follows:
970923,1345, 99, 1,MAN,70,10.0, 1,5,1,0.0, 1

PC 970923,1343,
970922,1744,
98, 1,MAN,70,10.0, 2,5,1,0.0, 2
97, 23,MAN,70,10.0, 3,2,3,0.0, 3
970922,1744, 96, 23,MAN,70,10.0, 2,2,3,0.0, 4
... ... ...
970805,1248, 3, 4,MAN,70,10.0,15,5,1,0.0, 67
970805,1245, 2, 4,MAN,70,10.0,15,5,1,0.0, 68
970710,1343, 1, 1,MAN,70,10.0,15,5,1,0.0, 69
The line entries are, from left to right:
970923 = the date in years, months and days

1334 = the time in hours and minutes
99 = is the exposure counter number
1= the number of the imaging program
MAN = exposure taken using the manual mode
70 = the kV-setting used
10.0 = the mA-setting used
1 = the exposure time used (interrupted exposure)
5 = the patient size used
1 = the cassette type number
0.0 = the position of the focal trough
1 = the line number

5. Service Codes
9711 - option #2
The failure log can be also be viewed on the control
panel, see code 9431.
1. Use the number keys to select option number and


#1. Event log
#2. Failure log
#?. 2
Printing Failure log ...

Record #:10
The failure log records will be sent to the PC. The

records are counted as they are sent.
The failure log records will appear on the PC display as

follows:
971023,1345, 99, 1,MAN,70,10.0, 1,5,1,0.0, 1

PC 971023,1343,
970922,1744,
98, 1,MAN,70,10.0, 2,5,1,0.0, 2
97, 23,MAN,70,10.0, 3,2,3,0.0, 3
... ...
970322,1744, 4, 23,MAN,70,10.0, 2,2,3,0.0, 4
970305,1248, 3, 4,MAN,70,10.0,15,5,1,0.0, 67
970305,1245, 2, 4,MAN,70,10.0,15,5,1,0.0, 68
970210,1343, 1, 1,MAN,70,10.0,15,5,1,0.0, 69
The format of the failure list is the same as the event

log list.
9711 - option #3
A list of the all the service codes and their titles can be
printed.
Doc. code 8200629 5 - 37

5. Service Codes


#1. Event log
#2. Failure log
#?. 3
Printing All Service codes and titles ...
The service code list will be sent to the PC. Note that
the list does not include service code beginning with 99.
The service code list will appear on the PC display as

follows:
9301 — Parameters saved to into FLASH memory

PC 9411 — S/W-packages updating with the PC
9430 — Event log
9711 — Print menu
9791 — Ceph Setup

5. Service Codes
9711 - option #4
This option prints the unit settings

#1. Event log
#2. Failure log
#?. 4
The unit settings will appear on the PC display as

shown:
== SYSTEM INFO/SETTINGS ======= 1997.09.23 Tu 14:42

PC SRC1-type : [001-001] Unit S/N:[00070006]
X-ray tub : [0] COMET XL-90-5deg/04
EXP-count : [00000069]
Primary collimator : Large metric
Cassette SN: Cass : 09, Cass 2: 12, Cass 3:
05
CEPH: Left, V-offset : Beam Up [10] mm
CEPH: Filter-pos: Zero : 080, First:200, Last:255
Exposure print format : Not set
Application S/W-module : AP970923
Imaging S/W modules :
IA970922,IB970922,IC970922
If a cephalometric device not installed then the text

“CEPH: is missing” and no cephalometric settings will
appear.
We recommend that a copy of this setting printout be

kept as a record for all units installed. The information
on this printout can be useful if you need to contact the
manufacturer for maintenance and repair services.
Doc. code 8200629 5 - 39

5. Service Codes
9711 - option #5
After an exposure has been taken it is possible for the
exposure parameters to be sent to the PC and, if re-
quired, printed. This option allows you to select the
format that the parameters will appear in when they are
printed.
Note that the default setting of the unit is printing OFF.


#1. Event log
#2. Failure log
#?. 5
A second-level menu will appear on the display. This

menu offers several options to switch printing on and an
option to switch printing off.
=== Exposure Print Format Selections:======

> #0.
#1.
RETURN to previous level
Disable exposure printing
#2. User Readable format
#3. Comma separated Data Base import format
#?.
— Store setting into memory with Store-menu
9711 - option #5 - second level option #1

Disable exposure printing.
This option allows printing to be switched off. Note that
either option 2 or 3 (described below) must be selected
before this option is used to switch printing off.

User Readable format
This option allows you switch printing on. The format in
which the exposure parameters will appear is the same
as the format used in the event list.

5. Service Codes
Date Time ExpCtr Pgm Mod kV mA s PS Cas Y-Lr E

970923 1345 69 001 Man 70 10.0 1 5 1 0.0 *

Database format
This option allows you switch printing on. The informa-
tion is sent in a format that allows the information to be
imported into a database.
Code 9712: S/W packages version information

When the unit is switched on the system carries out a
self test during which software version information will
This code allows you to display the software information

that appears on the display during start-up and a sec-
ond display that includes more detailed software ver-
sion information.
The information that will appear on the first screen is

shown below:
==================================================
== Imaging Elements Oper.System: AP970925 ==
== Imaging Procedure Software #1: IA970924 ==
== Imaging Procedure Software #2: IB970924 ==
== Imaging Procedure Software #3: IC970924 ==
== Misc B-Mem Data and Software : DM970530 ==
== XRAY TUBE ID : 1 ==
==================================================
.. Validating SW-modules. Please wait.
Press any menu key
Doc. code 8200629 5 - 41

5. Service Codes
Press any key and a second screen will appear which

includes additional information.
==================================================
MEM1A Checksum: 0xFFFF Length 0xFFFFFFFF
AP970924 1A Sep 24 1997 (C) Soredex KPR
==================================================
MEM1B Checksum: 0xF39C Length 0x0009F398
IC970924 1B Sep 24 1997 (C) Soredex JPT
==================================================
MEM2A Checksum: 0x3414 Length 0x000CE08A
IA970924 2A Sep 24 1997 (C) Soredex JPT
==================================================
MEM2B Checksum: 0xDA54 Length 0x000CFABE
IB970924 2B Sep 24 1997 (C) Soredex JPT
==================================================
Press any menu key
Code 9718: Service code list

This code displays a list of all the service codes and
their names. The list does not include codes used for
testing that begin with 99XX.
The list appears as follows:

9301 — Parameters saved into FLASH memory
9411 — S/W-packages updating with the PC
9430 — Event log
9711 — Print menu
=== Next Page : press any key ====
Press any key and the second part of the display will
appear.

5. Service Codes

9791 — Ceph Setup
— EXIT by pressing any key
Code 9770: H/W test menu

This code allows various hardware tests to be carried
out. These tests can be use for fault finding during
troubleshooting procedures.
The H/W test menu has two pages. Page 1:
=== H/W Diagnostic Selections:==========

#1. Set printing ON
#2. Start Self Test
#3. Configuration load test
#4. Test lights (positioning, exposure)
#5. Endurance test (movements)
#6. Sensor tests
#7. Next Page, more tests
#?.
Page 2
=== H/W Diagnostic Selections (2):========

#0. RETURN to Previous Page
#1. Key-coding test
#2. Power signals to all opto-sensors ON
#3. Main power supply voltage A/D test
#4. PAN cassette identification test
#5. RS232 Transmit/Receive Test
#?.

If a PC is connected to the unit via the PC RS232 con-
nection this option will information that appears on the
display to be sent to the PC stored and, if required,
printed.
Doc. code 8200629 5 - 43

5. Service Codes

#1. Set printing ON
#2. Start Self Test
#6. Sensor tests
#?. 1
Select option 1 and press the E key to switch the option

off. Repeating the procedure will switch the option back
on again.

This option allows certain PCB's to be checked to see if
they are functioning correctly

#1. Set printing ON
#2. Start Self Test
#6. Sensor tests
#?. 2
Select option 2 and then press the E key. The diagnos-

tic test will start.
If the SPI communication between the circuit boards is
functioning correctly the information shown below will
=== H/W Diagnostic tests:==========

> — Start Self Test...
— ONLY DETECTED ERRORS ARE DISPLAYED
.. CU2 [spi] test over
.. CU1 [spi] test over
.. THC [spi] test over
.. CHC [spi] test over
.. ADCs [spi] test over
.. Chin rest position test over
.. CIU [spi] test over

5. Service Codes
Press any menu key
The boards listed on the test menu are as follows:

CU2 - N900
CU1 - N100
THC - N1400
CHC - N1200
ADCs - N600
Chin rest position - micro switches
CIU - N1700
If any of the boards is faulty an error message will

appear on the display indicating the faulty board.

During the start-up self diagnostic test, the configuration
of the unit, its settings and calibrations are checked. If
there is a configuration error this option allows you to
check the configuration memory again.

#1. Set printing ON
#2. Start Self Test
#6. Sensor tests
#?. 3
Select option 3 and then press the E key. If there are

configuration errors detailed information will appear on
the display. Configuration errors normally indicate that
the ram memory module N650 (RMM) is malfunction-
ing, and it should be replaced.
Note that this feature is still reserved for future expan-
sion.
— Localization data not set

> — Local time data not set
Press any menu key
Doc. code 8200629 5 - 45

5. Service Codes

This option allows the patient positioning lights and the
exposure warning light to be tested. This test is low
level test and there is no software control involved with,
for example the control data of the imaging programs.

#1. Set printing ON
#2. Start Self Test
#6. Sensor tests
#?. 4
Select option 4 and then press the E key. A second

menu will appear that allows you to select the lights you
wish to test.
=== Positioning and EXP Lights test:====

> #0.
#1.
Y1 (Layer/Front) and XZ-lights On
#2. Y2 (TMJ/Back) and XZ-lights On
#3. Exposure light On
#?.
To test the lights key in the number for the lights you
wish to test. Press the E key and the lights will come
on.
#1- the midsagittal light, the Frankfort light and the focal
trough light will come on
#2- the midsagittal light, the Frankfort light and the TMJ
light will come on
#3- the exposure warning lights will come on

This option is used during manufacture and during
normal servicing is not used.
The option allows you to change the function of test

5. Service Codes
code 9976 - Mechanical endurance test (described

later). Test code 9976 is used to check the movements
of the unit. After the code has been selected the expo-
sure switch is pressed and held down. The unit will
carry out one complete movement cycle and then stop.
When option #5 is selected the function of test code

9976 changes from the single cycle movement test to a
continuous movement test.
To change the function of test code 9976 select option

5 and then press the E key.

#1. Set printing ON
#2. Start Self Test
#6. Sensor tests
#?. 5
Select option 5 and then press the E key. A second

menu will appear that allows you to select the lights you
wish to test.
A text stating that the continuous endurance test mode
has been enabled will appear on the display.
== ENDURANCE Test for movements ENABLED ==

> == Disabling: Turn unit power OFF
Press any menu key
Press any key to return to the previous menu.

Now when test code 9976 is selected the unit will con-
tinue to carry out movement cycles, as long as the
exposure switch is pressed and held down, instead of
carrying out a single movement cycle.
Note that to return to the single cycle movement mode
the unit must be switched off and then on again.
Doc. code 8200629 5 - 47

5. Service Codes

This option allows you to check the option of the optical
sensors.
Maybe the most useful option for maintenance pur-

poses is menu selection six. It is the screen for testing
system’s optical sensors. It is strongly recommended to
use it for troubleshooting e.g. when unit do not find the
patient in/out (PIO) position.

#1. Set printing ON
#2. Start Self Test
#6. Sensor tests
#?. 6
Select option 6 and then press the E key. An informa-

tion display will appear that allows you to see if the
optical sensors that detect the unit positions are work-
ing or not.
R -125 -90 -70 70 125

> (101) +------*----+----------------+----------+
X -77 20 77 Z Bottom Top
(01) +----------*------+ (00) +---- ----+
Y -9 122 147 Chin Down Up
(01) +-------------*---+ rest +******+-----+
V -10 0 10 Cass Pan Ceph
(01) +--------*---------+ head +******+-----+
C -12 205 310 Sec Pan Tomo
(01) +-----------*-----+ slit +******+-----+
Cass type: (01) 1 Prim
Mirror : (0) CLOSE slit: (1000) 1
optosensors: 1=light, 0=no light

PRESS ANY MENU KEY TO RETURN TO PREVIOUS MENU
On the display there are a number of lines that indicate

the different movements that the unit makes.
The movements are as follows:

5. Service Codes
R =C-arm rotation
X = C-arm backwards/forwards direction
Y = C-arm left/right direction
V = C-arm tilt
C =Cassette carriage
Z= Height
The other information on the display is:

Cass type = The cassette sensitivity number - 1, 2 or 3
Mirror = Mirror position - open or closed
Chin = Chin rest position - up or down
Cass = Cassette type - panoramic or cephalometric
Sec slit = Cassette shields - pan (closed) or tomo

(open)
Prim slit = Primary aperture number - 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7,

(8)
To check if an optical sensor (or microswitch) is working

manually move the part of the unit that activates the
optical sensor, or microswitch you wish to check. The
dashes (-) in the line on the display next to the sensor
you are checking will change to stars (*). This indicates
that the sensor is working correctly. If the dashes do not
change it indicates that there is something wrong with
the sensor or microswitch or the circuits that operate
them.
For example, when the unit is in the PIO position the

movement line for C-arm rotation will be all dashes.
R -125 -90 -70 70 125

(101) +-----*----+----------------+----------+
Doc. code 8200629 5 - 49

5. Service Codes
If you manually rotate the C-arm slightly some of the

dashes will change to stars. This indicates that the
sensor is working correctly.
R -125 -90 -70 70 125

(101) +*****x----+----------------+----------+
The position and number of dashes that change will

depend on the direction and amount that the arm is
moved
The numbers at the beginning and end of the lines are

the movement limits and the numbers along the line are
PIO positions. For R and V the limits are in degrees and
for X, Y and C they are in millimetres.
For example, the movement limits for R, C-arm rotation,

are from -1250 to +1250. The -90 is the PIO position of
the C-arm for pan, scano and tomo exposures. The -70
is the PIO position for the left-hand ceph and the 70 the
PIO position for the right-hand ceph.
Pan PIO L-H Ceph R-H Ceph

Rotation limit position PIO position PIO position Rotation limit
R -125 -90 -70 70 125

(101) +-----*----+----------------+----------+
Whenever a part of the unit controlled by these sensors

or microswitches is moved to a new position the sensor
information on the display is automatically updated.
This option opens the second page of the hardware

diagnostic menu.

#1. Set printing ON
#2. Start Self Test
#6. Sensor tests
#?. 7

5. Service Codes
Select option 7 and then press the E key. The second

page of the menu will appear on the display.

#1. Key-coding test
#?.

If one or more of the control panel keys does not ap-
pear to operate, this option allows the keys to be tested.
Select option 1 and then press the E key.

#1. Key-coding test
#?. 1
A message telling you how to exit the key test will ap-
pear on the display.
####### To STOP: cycle power ######

>
Press the key you wish to test. If the key is working
correctly key information will appear on the display.
####### To STOP: cycle power ######

> BK = 0x00 RK = 0x03
Y-key = 0x202, Z-key = 0x1FE, Z-ceph= 0x1F4
Doc. code 8200629 5 - 51

5. Service Codes
The first information line allows you to check the func-

tion of all keys except the movement keys - focal trough
and height adjustment. BK is the “BIOS key” and RK is
“read key”. The RK value is the most important. It must
change when a display key is pressed. If does not the
control panel is faulty and must be replaced.
In the second information line the Y-key is for checking

the function of the focal trough adjustment keys. When
either focal trough key is pressed the value should
change. If it does not either the control panel is faulty,
the signal to the control panel is cut or the A/D con-
verter is not functioning. The Z-key is for checking the
function of the height adjusting keys that are on the
display, and the Z-ceph for checking the height adjust-
ment keys on the side of the ceph unit.
To exit this menu the unit must be switched off and then
switched on using the main power switch.

This option allows the power supply to all the opto
sensors to be switched at the same time.

#1. Key-coding test
#?. 2

Power is now supplied to all the optical sensors. It is
now possible to check if the opto-sensors are function-
ing correctly with a digital multimeter.
— All Sensor Powers Are On

> — Press Any Key set them off and exit
To switch the power to all the opto-sensors off, press

any key. The menu will reappear on the display.

5. Service Codes

This option allows the voltage of the main power supply
to be checked.

#1. Key-coding test
#?. 3

Voltage information will appear on the display.
== Main Voltage measurement A/D-hexa values

> ==
==
115V 8-bit A/D (min/max) : 0x31/0x45
220/240V 8-bit A/D (min/max) : 0x66/0x9B
-- EXIT by pressing any key
-- Main Volt. A/D-values (raw/filtered): 0x1F2/7C
The values are read from the A/D converter and are in
hexidecimal form. This menu only indicates if the power
supply is acceptable or if the voltage is too low. If the
value 0x00 appears it can mean that the signal is cut or
the A/D-converter is not working.
The first value in the last line (eg. =0x1F2) must be
between the corresponding values for 115V and 220/
240V.

This option allows you to check if the unit can identify
the different cassette types.
IMPORTANT NOTE
The cassettes must have the cassette identification
stickers attached to them. In addition the S/N values for
these cassettes must be programmed into the unit. For
information on how to do this refer the installation
manual.
Doc. code 8200629 5 - 53

5. Service Codes

#1. Key-coding test
#?. 4
The cassette identification screen will appear on the

display.
== Cassette type opto input data =================

> --
--
EXIT by pressing any key
Cassette binary input data [0=Black,1=White]
-- Type1: 10, Type2: 01, Type3 : 11, missing: 00
-- Type bit order b1b0: 10
The identification stickers attached to the cassettes

enable the cassette sensors to identify the different
cassettes.
Slide a cassette into the cassette carriage and the
binary number on the last line of the display should
change. If the number does not change the unit cannot
"see" the sticker coding, white squares on a black back-
ground, and cannot identify the cassette.
If the unit does not recognise a cassette either the
sticker has not been attached to the cassette, the
sticker has been attached in the wrong position, the
cassette has been placed in the cassette holder the
wrong way round or the cassette sensors are not work-
ing. To check if the cassette sensors are working use
option #2 - Power signals to all opto sensors, described
earlier.

If a PC is connected to the unit using the serial inter-
face cable RS232, this option allows you to check if this
connection can transmit and receive data..

5. Service Codes

#1. Key-coding test
#?. 5

Instructions explaining how to test the communication
link will appear on the display.
-- Use RS232 test tool or connect D9 female pins

> -- 2 and 3 (TX/RX). Press any key when ready.
The lead that transmits data must be connected to the

lead that receives data. To do this disconnect the
RS232 serial cable from the rear of the PC and, using
the RS232 test tool or a small length of wire, connect
(short-circuit) pins 2 and 3 on the 9-pin D connector at
Pin 3 the end of the cable (if easier you can remove the serial
cable from the Tome and short-circuit the same pins on
Pin 2 the connector at the rear of the Tome).
Press any key. The unit will send a test message (string
of characters) to check the communication link.
Status information will appear on the display.

>> -- 2 and 3 (TX/RX). Press any key when ready.
--> TX: Sent test text : 0123456789ABCDEF
<-- RX: Received test text: 0123456789ABCDEF
(!! RS232 OK !!)
If the communication link is working correctly the TX

(Send test text) test message will be the same as the
RX (Receive test text) test message. The text RS232
OK will appear on the last line of the display
If the RX text is not the same as the TX text the com-

munication link is not working correctly.
Doc. code 8200629 5 - 55

5. Service Codes

>> -- 2 and 3 (TX/RX). Press any key when ready.
--> TX: Sent test text : 0123456789ABCDEF
<-- RX: Received test text: — nothing—
## RS232 FAILURE: Test text receiving error
## Check cables !!
-- Press any key to exit
Code 9775: Patient In/Out position not monitored

This code allows the PIO position sensors to be tempo-
rarily switched off so that the PIO auto return does not
operate. This setting using this code CANNOT be
saved in the memory. When the unit is switched off and
then on again PIO auto return will be automatically
switched on again.
NOTE
If you wish to permanently switch PIO auto return off
you must use service code 9700, page 2 (on/off set-
ups), option 2 - Pio auto return.
Code 9778: Clear Exposure Counter and logs

This code allows all the information in the event and
failure logs to be deleted. When deleted the and the
exposure counters will start from one again.
##################################################
# WARNING. This will clear the Exposure Counter, #
# Event Log and Failure Log. #
##################################################
#0. Exit
#1. CLEAR
#?.

5. Service Codes
To clear the logs select option 1 and press the E key. A

message will appear on the display and you will hear an
audible signal which indicates that the logs are being
deleted.
##################################################
##################################################
#0. Exit
#1. CLEAR
#?. 1
-- Clearing Exposure data. Wait...
When the audible tone stops a message will appear on

the display stating that the log information has been
deleted.
##################################################
##################################################
#0. Exit
#1. CLEAR
#?. 1
-- Clearing Exposure data. Wait...
-- Exposure data cleared. Cycle power!
Press any menu key
Code 9779: X-ray generator test menu

This service code includes a number of tests that allows
the X-ray generator and tubehead to be tested.
CAUTION
With these test programs the unit does not have to be
set up to take an exposure, nor does the C-arm move
when radiation is generated. Protect yourself from
radiation when using these programs.
Doc. code 8200629 5 - 57

5. Service Codes
For more information on how to troubleshoot the X-ray

generator and tubehead refer to section 7 - Trouble
Shooting, Generator problems.
=== X-ray Generator Test Selections:==========

#1. Exposure with kV,mA,time
#2. Exposure sequence test
#3. Exposure sequence diagram
#?.
9779 - option #1
This option allows the X-ray generator to be tested
using preselected kV, mA, and time values.

#?. 1
A second menu will appear.
====== X-ray Generator Test Settings ====

> == kV : 50,..,85 : step 1 kV
== mA : 1.0,..,15.0 : step 0.5 mA
==
==
== sec: 0.1,..,10.0 : step 0.1 sec ==
=========================================
#0. Exit
#1. kV [60]
#2. mA [5.0]
#3. time [1.0]
#4. OK, ready for exposure
#?.

5. Service Codes
This menu lists the maximum and minimum exposure

values and offers a number of options that allow you to
change the exposure values. The default values are
given in brackets, for example #1. kV is (60).
Select the number for the exposure parameter you wish

to change, for example for kV select 1, and press the E
key.

> == kV : 50,..,85 : step 1 kV
== mA : 1.0,..,15.0 : step 0.5 mA
==
==
== sec: 0.1,..,10.0 : step 0.1 sec ==
=========================================
#0. Exit
#1. kV [60]
#2. mA [5.0]
#3. time [1.0]
#?. 1 kV :
Key in a new exposure value, it will appear on the last

line of the menu, and press the E key.

> == kV : 50,..,85 : step 1
== mA : 1.0,..,15.0 : step 0.5 mA
kV ==
==
== sec: 0.1,..,10.0 : step 0.1 sec ==
=========================================
#0. Exit
#1. kV [50]
#2. mA [5.0] New exposure
#3. time [1.0] value
#?.
The new value will appear in the brackets.
Change any other exposure parameters, mA and time,

in the same way.
Doc. code 8200629 5 - 59

5. Service Codes
The kV value can be set from 50 to 85 in 1 kV steps.

The mA value can be set from 1.0 to 15.0 in 0.5 mA
steps. The exposure time can be set from 0.1 to 10.0 in
0.1 second steps.
To activate the test select option 4 and press the E key.

A text confirming the selected exposure values will
kV=60 mA=5.0 preheat A/D=0x6A T=1.0 sec

>> ... READY, Press EXPOSURE button...
... EXIT by pressing any key.......
WARNING
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM RADIATION
Press and hold down the exposure button. The expo-
sure warning lights will come on and you will hear an
audible signal. These indicate that the tubehead has
been switched on and X-rays are being generated.
kV=60 mA=5.0 preheat A/D=0x6A T=1.0 sec

>> ... READY, Press EXPOSURE button...
... EXIT by pressing any key.......
... OK. EXPOSURE now ON!
EXPOSURE TIME [sec] : 1
Hold the exposure button down for the duration of the

exposure (the time selected). When the warning lights
go out and the signal tone stops the exposure is com-
plete.
When the exposure is over generator feedback values

for the kV and mA values will appear on the display.
These values are measured by the A/D-converter. A
wait counter protects the X-ray tube from overheating.
feedback-kV = 58 , feedback mA = 0.4

Exposure Time = 1.0 sec
WAIT : 30 sec
This test will give a warning if there is a kV-failure, a

time-out failure of if the tube overheats.

5. Service Codes
=== X-ray Tube PROTECTION============

### KV-FAILURE detected
or
### GENERATOR TIME-OUT FAILURE detected
or
### TUBEHOT detected, wait..
Press any menu key
If any of these errors occur during the test a message

will appear on the display. If this occurs there is a prob-
lem with the generator or tubehead and a full generator
test must be carried out. This test is option #2 - Expo-
sure sequence test, and then option #1 - Analyze gen-
erator. The test is described below.
9779 - option #2
This option offers a number of tests that can be used to
analyse the X-ray generator H/W during different oper-
ating phases.

#?. 2
Select option 2 and then press the E key a second

menu will appear on the display.
=== X-ray generator sequence test ===

> #0.
#1.
Back to upper menu
Analyze generator
#2. Tube voltage without current
#3. Exposure with filament feedback
#4. X-ray tube filament heating
#5. Filament feedback [off->ON]
#?.
Doc. code 8200629 5 - 61

5. Service Codes
9779 - option #2, second level option #1

Analyze generator is the most complete test. It tests the
generator in different operating phases and modes. If
an error occurs during this test it must be fixed and the
generator analysed again.
To analyse the generator select option 1 and press the

E key.

> #0.
#1.
Back to upper menu
Analyze generator
#?. 1
A warning message will appear on the display.
Protect yourself from radiation.

>> Press and hold exposure button until exposure
lights are turned off.
If you do not wish to continue with this test press any

key to return to the previous menu.
WARNING

test. During the test information will appear on the
display as the X-ray generator is checked.
When the warning lights go out and the signal tone

stops the test is complete.
The results of the X-ray generator test will appear on

the display, example below. If all the tests were suc-
cessful the X-ray generator is functioning correctly.

5. Service Codes
Tube Voltage:__57__60__63__66__70__73__77__81__85
>> kV test passed...
mA control check: passed...
Tube current:__1.0__1.3__1.6__2.0__2.5__3.2__4.0
__5.0__6.4__8.0__10.0__13.0__15.0
mA check passed...
Tube Voltage:__57__60__63__66__70__73__77__81__85
kV check passed.
Generator OK.
WAIT : 270 sec
If the unit does not pass the generator test an error

message will appear on the display, for example:
KVFBM error. xxV detected, 0V expected.
A list of generator test error messages and information

on what to do is given in section 7 - Trouble Shooting,
Generator Problems,

This option allows you to test the H/W backup timer of
the X-ray generator.

> #0.
#1.
Back to upper menu
Analyze generator
#5. Filament feedback [off->on]
#?. 2
To start the test select option 2 and press the E key. A

message telling you how to carry out the test will ap-

>> Press exposure button during measurement.
Press C-key to quit EXPOSURE ON.
Doc. code 8200629 5 - 63

5. Service Codes
If you do not wish to continue with this test press the C

WARNING
Hold the exposure button down until the warning lights

go out and the signal tone stops. The test will last ap-
proximately 50 seconds.
After the test a message will appear on the display

indicating if the H/W timer is working or not.
The message below indicates that the H/W timer
stopped the exposure and is, therefore, working cor-
rectly.
Hardware backup timer interupt.OK.

>> Press any menu key
If the message below appears it indicates that the H/W

backup timer failed and the S/W backup timer has
stopped the exposure. In this case the N1000 board
must be changed.
ERROR: Hardware backup timer NOT OK.

>> Press any menu key

This option allows you to measure the DC voltage. The
mA reference voltage (MAREF) must within a certain
range. For more information refer to "Generator Prob-
lems" in section 7.

5. Service Codes

> #0.
#1.
Back to upper menu
Analyze generator
#?. 3
To start the test select option 3 and press the E key. A

message telling you how to carry out the test will ap-

>> Press exposure button during measurement.
Press C-key to quit.
MAREF voltage is between 3.3VDC and 4.0VDC
If you do not wish to continue with this test press the C

WARNING
From test pin 17 on the N1100 board measure the

voltage. It must be between 3.3 and 4.0 VDC.
While the exposure button is held down the message

exposure on will appear on the display.
EXPOSURE ON.
When the exposure button is released the message

exposure off will appear.
EXPOSURE OFF.
Doc. code 8200629 5 - 65

5. Service Codes

This option allows X-ray tube filament heating to be
switched on.

> #0.
#1.
Back to upper menu
Analyze generator
#?. 4
To switch X-ray tube filament heating on select option 4

and press the E key. Note that the exposure button
does not need to be pressed. A message will appear on
the display describing the test and giving the mA refer-
ence (MAREF) voltage range
Filament heating is ON 30 seconds or until C-key

>> is pressed.
During the heating period the mA reference can be

measured from test pin 17 on the N1100 board.
After 30 seconds the filament heating will be automati-

cally switched off. To repeat the test press the E key
and to exit the test press the C key.
Filament heating is ON 30 seconds or until C-key

>> is pressed.
Filament heating OFF.

Press E-key to switch filament ON again.
C-key to quit.
To repeat the test press the E key and to exit the test
press the C key.

5. Service Codes

This option allows the filament feedback signal to be
switched on or off.
The text [off->on] indicates that signal is off.

> #0.
#1.
Back to upper menu
Analyze generator
#5. Filament feedback [off->on]
#?. 5
To switch the signal on select option 5 and press the E

key. The text will change to [on->off] which indicates
that the signal is on.

> #0.
#1.
Back to upper menu
Analyze generator
#5. Filament feedback [on->off]
#?. 5
9779 - option #3
This option displays a simplified diagram of the X-ray
generator signals.

#?. 3
To display the diagram select option 3 and then press

the E key. The generator signal diagram will appear on
the display.
Doc. code 8200629 5 - 67

5. Service Codes
AVC* —--. .-----

!____ ...... ____________
... _____!
HEAT* ---. .-----
!____ ...... ____________ ... _____!
F/MA* ---+---- ...... --------. -----
!____ ... _____!
EXPC2* ---!---- ...... ------. .-----
!______ ... _____! time
----------0------------------+-+--------------+-----
A <--- 1 SEC --> A 10 msec A EXP
!__ HEAT begins !__ EXP begins !___
! !ends
O O
HEAT mA-val set mA-val min(mA)
min(kV) set kV-val min(kV)
>>>>>>>PRESS ANY KEY TO RETURN PREVIOUS MENU<<<<<<<
The diagram shows the relationship between the main

generator controls signals, AVC, HEAT, F/MA and
EXPC during the exposure cycle.
Code 9791: Ceph Setup

This service code is the same ceph setup procedure
that is included in service code 9700. For information
on how to use this service code refer to SERVICE
CODE 9700 option #4.

#?.

5. Service Codes
Movement and alignment codes

Service codes 9960 to 9964 are used to check the unit
movements. The movements need to be checked indi-
vidually if there are problems with the stepper motors
and if the motors are replaced.
Note that the exposure button needs to be pressed and
held down to activate a motor. However, with these
service codes X-rays are not generated when the expo-
sure button is pressed.
NOTE
The directions of all movements are described when
looking directly at the unit.
Code 9960: X movement test

This code allows the X movement (left/right) of the C-
arm to be checked. When the exposure button is
pressed the C-arm will move to the ready position and
then move to the left, the right, and then back to the left
again. At the end of the movement cycle the C-arm will
stop.
Code 9961: Y movement test

This code allows the Y movement (towards and away
from the column) of the C-arm to be checked. When
the exposure button is pressed the C-arm will move to
the ready position and then move towards the column
and then away from the column. At the end of the
movement cycle the C-arm will stop.
Code 9962: r movement test

This code allows the r movement (rotation) of the C-arm
to be checked. When the exposure button is pressed
the C-arm will move to the ready position and then
rotate in one direction, and then rotate back to the
original position. At the end of the movement cycle the
C-arm will stop.
Code 9963: v movement test

This code allows the V movement (tilt) of the C-arm to
be checked. When the exposure button is pressed the
C-arm will tilt in one direction and then the other. At the
end of the movement cycle the C-arm will stop.
Doc. code 8200629 5 - 69

5. Service Codes
Code 9964: c movement test

This code allows the movement of the cassette carriage
to be checked. When the exposure button is pressed
the cassette carriage will move first in one direction and
then in the other. At the end of the movement cycle the
cassette carriage will stop.
The service codes 9970, 9972 to 9975, 9977 and 9978

are used to check the alignment of the unit. Full de-
scriptions of how these codes are used is given in the
installation manual.
WARNING
All these codes activate special exposure programs that
are used to check the alignment of the unit. With all
these codes the exposure button must be pressed and
held down to "take an exposure". Therefore, always
protect yourself from radiation when using these codes
Code 9970: Alignment check program

Not for service use.
Code 9971: Alignment program for rotation

Code 9973: Maint Gear ratio test for C movement

WARNING
Protect yourself from radiation when using this code.
This code allows the movement and movement limits of

the cassette carriage to be checked.
Code 9974: Maint X-ray beam center test

WARNING
This code takes a series of exposure "lines" as the C-

arm rotates that allow the position of the centre of rota-
tion to be checked.

5. Service Codes
Code 9975: Multipurpose test exposure (13.5 s)

WARNING
This code allows a "panoramic" exposure to be taken

without the C-arm rotating. It is used to check the posi-
tion of the secondary slit.
Code 9976: Mechanical endurance test

Code 9977: Maint Beam alignment test

WARNING
This code takes a series of exposures "lines" as the C-

arm rotates that allow the PIO (patient in/out) position to
be checked.
Doc. code 8200629 5 - 71

5. Service Codes
Code 9978: Exposure timeout test (35 s)

This code checks that the H/W timer that limits the
length of time that X-rays can be generated is operating
correctly. The time must be limited for patient safety
and to protect the tube from overheating.
To select the code key in the service number and press

the E key.
WARNING
During the test the exposure time, in seconds, and a
progress bar will appear on the display.
If the H/W timer is working correctly the text below will

appear on the display in the info line.
GENERATOR TIME-OUT control - Press C
If the H/W timer is not working correctly the text below

will appear:
GENERATOR TIME-OUT FAILURE detected

6. Using a PC with the Cranex Tome Contents

Contents
Introduction ......................................................................................................... 6-1
PC requirements ................................................................................................. 6-1
Connecting the PC to the Tome ........................................................................ 6-1
Down loading information from the Tome ....................................................... 6-2
Setting up a connection to the Tome ................................................................ 6-2
Sending information from the Tome to the PC ................................................. 6-6
Saving the information in the PC ...................................................................... 6-8
Doc. code 8200629 6-i

Contents 6. Using a PC with the Cranex Tome

Introduction
A personal computer can be connected to the Tome
with the RS23 serial interface cable (part number
4801199). Information stored in the Tome, such as the
event and error lists, can then be sent to the PC, exam-
ined, printed and, if required, archived.
In addition, the Tome software can be upgraded using
the PC.
PC requirements
The minimum requirements for the PC are:
- PC 486/66MHz with 8MB RAM
- a hard disk with at least 200 MB of storage
- running Microsoft Windows 95® or above with

HyperTerminal®
Connecting the PC to the Tome

Connect one end of the RS232 serial interface cable to
the to the RS connector at the rear of the Tome (the 9-
pin D connector), and the other end of the cable to the
COM1 communication port at the rear of the PC. If the
COM 1 port is already in use connect the interface
cable to any other free communication port.
Switch the PC and the Tome on.
Doc. code 8200629 6-1

Down loading information from the Tome
Setting up a connection to the Tome

1. Using the PC, open the Microsoft Windows
HyperTerminal window. Refer to the Windows soft-
ware documentation for information on how to do
this.
Open the HyperTerminal program by double clicking
the Hypertrm.exe item.
2. A window will appear that allows you to open a

connection in the PC to the Cranex Tome. Key in
the name you wish to give to the connection, for
example CRANEX TOME. Select the icon you
require.
Press the OK button.

3. A window in which connection information must be

entered will appear.
Click the down arrow in the "Connect using" box
and select the same Com number that you con-
nected the RS serial interface cable to. For example
if you connected the RS cable to COM 1 select
"Direct to Com 1".
Click the OK button.
Note that when you select a Com number the other

selection boxes will become grey.
Doc. code 8200629 6-3

3. A properties window will appear.

In the "Bits per second" box select 19200 and in the
"Flow control" box select None.
4. A HyperTerminal window will appear indicating that

the PC is connected to the Tome.

IMPORTANT NOTE
When you disconnect the connection save the session
profile (connection name and parameters) so that the
connection can be quickly reopened the next time it is
required.
When the session is saved the name and icon will

appear in the HyperTerminal window. To reopen the
connection simply double click this icon.
Tome connection
Doc. code 8200629 6-5

Sending information from the Tome to the PC

1. Make sure that the PC connection to the Tome is
open.
2. Using the Tome control panel select service code

9711.
If you do not know how to do this refer to the sec-
tion "Service Codes".
A menu listing printable items will appear on the
display.

#1. Event log
#2. Failure log
#?.

3. Select the number of the item you wish to print, for

example press 1 for the event list, and then press
the E key.

#1. Event log
#2. Failure log
#?. 1
Printing Event log ...

Record #: 10
The event log records will be sent to the PC. The

records will be counted as they are sent and will
appear line by line on the PC display.
NOTE
If no information appears on the PC display you can
check that the RS cable is working correctly by using
service code 9770 - H/W Diagnostic Selections, page 2
option 5 - RS23 Transmit/Receive Test. Refer to the
section "Service Code" for information on how to do
this.
Doc. code 8200629 6-7

Saving the information in the PC

1. From the "Transfer" menu select "Capture Text...".
NOTE - Do NOT use the File/Save option.
A window will appear in which the name of the

folder in which the information will be stored and a
suggested name for the information file are given.
If require key in a new folder name and file name.
The information will be stored.

7. Trouble Shooting Contents
7. Trouble Shooting
Contents
Warnings and precautions ................................................................................. 7-1
Warning - X-rays ............................................................................................... 7-1
Warning - Electric shock ................................................................................... 7-1
Warning - High voltage ..................................................................................... 7-1
Caution - Static discharge ................................................................................ 7-1
Trouble shooting principles............................................................................... 7-2
Circuit boards ................................................................................................... 7-2
Indicator LEDs .................................................................................................. 7-2
Test pins ........................................................................................................... 7-3
Check cables .................................................................................................... 7-4
Image quality .................................................................................................... 7-5
Power supply problems .................................................................................... 7-6
Display problems .............................................................................................. 7-7
Problems during start-up ................................................................................. 7-11
The unit selftest .............................................................................................. 7-11
Error messages that can appear during start-up ........................................... 7-11
CPU BOARD RAM-ERROR .............................................. 7-11
## Missing SW-module(s) detected. System STOP. ## .............. 7-12
## Imaging Procedure SW-modules in WRONG SLOTS. ##"; ............ 7-12
## APL /IEOS-module checksum error. System STOP.## .............. 7-13
## IMG1/IPS1-module checksum error. System STOP.## .............. 7-13
## SW-modules are not compatible. System STOP.## .............. 7-13
== MISSING CONFIGURATION ITEMS DETECTED ......................... 7-13
## N700: Motor Control Powers OFF: NO Movements ................. 7-14
## N600: IMC A/D B-ch test failed: .............................. 7-16
## N100: CU1 SPI-com. error status hex-word=xx .................. 7-16
## N900:CU2 SPI-com. error status hex-word=xx ................... 7-17
## N1400: THC SPI-com. error status hex-word=xx ................. 7-17
## N1200: CHC SPI-com. error status hex-word=xx ................. 7-18
## N1200: CASSETTE HEAD BOARD ADC B-ch test failed: ............. 7-18
## N1700: CEPHALO feedback test error" .......................... 7-19
## N600: CHIN REST in WRONG position ............................ 7-19
-- Exposure button signal ON: .................................... 7-20
-- Return button signal ON: ...................................... 7-20
Doc. code 8200629 7-i

Contents 7. Trouble Shooting
Problems during use ........................................................................................ 7-21

Information and error messages .................................................................... 7-21
Information and error message numbers ....................................................... 7-22
Description of information and error messages ............................................. 7-23
ERR62 HARDWARE FAILURE 1....N .................................... 7-23
ERR63 MAIN SUPPLY VOLTAGE TOO LOW ............................... 7-23
ERR64 N900 SPI COMMUNICATION FAILURE ............................ 7-23
ERR65 GENERATOR FAILURE: kV ...................................... 7-23
ERR66 GENERATOR FAILURE: mA ...................................... 7-24
ERR67 GENERATOR FAILURE: TIME .................................... 7-24
INF68 EXPOSURE INTERRUPTED - Press RETURN ....................... 7-24
ERR69 MCOK: Stepper Motor Cntr FAILURE .......................... 7-24
ERR70 FEEDBACK FAILURE: kV HIGH ................................. 7-25
ERR71 FEEDBACK FAILURE: mA ....................................... 7-25
INF72 TUBE HOT: Wait for cooling... ............................. 7-25
INF74 GENERATOR TIME-OUT control - Press C ...................... 7-26
INF88 WAIT! Saving system data into memory ...................... 7-26
INF109 Press RETURN-button or E-key ............................. 7-26
INF120 Program not identified .................................... 7-27
INF121 Access denied ............................................. 7-27
INF122 Enter password and press E ............................... 7-27
INF123 SERVICE STATE - Select next procedure .................... 7-28
INF125 Remove cassette (Pan/ceph units only) .................... 7-28
INF126 Insert cassette ........................................... 7-28
INF128 Key in program number and press E ........................ 7-29
INF132 Program parameters not installed ......................... 7-29
INF134 Increase kilovolt setting ................................ 7-30
INF135 Decrease kilovolt setting ................................ 7-30
INF136 Use faster film/screen or increase kV .................... 7-30
INF137 Use slower film/screen or decrease kV .................... 7-30
INF138 Valid exp. setting cannot be found ....................... 7-31
INF139 No cuts placed ............................................ 7-31
INF140 Select procedure .......................................... 7-31
INF141 Select program or exposure time .......................... 7-32
INF142 Select exposure time ...................................... 7-32
INF143 Select program ............................................ 7-32
INF144 Select number of radiograms .............................. 7-33
INF145 Select jaw ................................................ 7-33
INF146 Select side ............................................... 7-33
INF147 Select layer thickness (LT), 2/4 mm ...................... 7-34
INF148 Select interjoint distance ............................... 7-34
INF149 Select angle .............................................. 7-34
INF150 Select region and cuts, then press E ..................... 7-35
INF151 Select scanogram region and press E ...................... 7-35

7. Trouble Shooting Contents
INF152 Select tomogram type ...................................... 7-35

INF153 Select tomogram subtype .................................. 7-36
INF154 Press E to accept ......................................... 7-36
INF157 Adjust sensitivity number (SN) ........................... 7-36
INF158 Insert cassette to be calibrated ......................... 7-37
INF159 Select maintenance program (4 digits) .................... 7-37
INF168 Use aperture 3 or faster film/screen ..................... 7-37
INF169 Use aperture 4 or slower film/screen ..................... 7-37
INF251 EXPOSURE .................................................. 7-38
INF252 Patient size and kV OK? READY... ......................... 7-38
INF253 Exposure time and kV OK? READY... ........................ 7-38
INF254 READY... .................................................. 7-38
INF339 Cassette 1 SN 000 ......................................... 7-39
INF340 Cassette 2 SN 000 ......................................... 7-39
INF341 Cassette 3 SN 000 ......................................... 7-39
INF343 Set chin-rest to upper position .......................... 7-39
INF344 Set chin-rest to lower position .......................... 7-39
INF354 Select aperture number 2 ................................. 7-40
INF362 Wait (The message flashes) ............................... 7-41
INF363 RETURNING....wait ......................................... 7-41
INF364 RETURN time-out error—PRESS RETURN ....................... 7-42
INF368 Remove Ceph soft tissue filter ........................... 7-43
INF371 Set cassette head to side position ....................... 7-44
INF372 Set cassette head to normal position ..................... 7-44
INF374 Close mirror .............................................. 7-44
INF376 Close cassette shields .................................... 7-45
INF377 Open cassette shields ..................................... 7-45
INF379 Remove cephalo cassette .................................. 7-45
INF380 Insert cephalo cassette 8AV .............................. 7-46
INF381 Insert cephalo cassette 8AH .............................. 7-46
INF382 Insert cephalo cassette 8SV .............................. 7-46
INF383 Insert cephalo cassette 18AV ............................. 7-46
INF384 Insert cephalo cassette 18AH ............................. 7-46
INF385 Insert cephalo cassette 18SV ............................. 7-46
INF386 Insert cephalo cassette 24AV ............................. 7-46
INF387 Insert cephalo cassette 24SV ............................. 7-46
INF388 Insert cephalo cassette 24AH ............................. 7-46
INF412 KV-FEEDBACK LOW ........................................... 7-46
Doc. code 8200629 7 - iii

Contents 7. Trouble Shooting
Other problems that may occur during use ................................................... 7-47

The soft tissue LEDs do not function. ............................................................ 7-47
Patient positioning/exposure lights do not function. ....................................... 7-47
The unit will not move when the up/down keys are pressed. ........................ 7-48
Blown fuses ....................................................................................................... 7-49
Fuse guide ...................................................................................................... 7-49
Fuse F1 on N2000 .......................................................................................... 7-50
Fuse F1 on N200 ............................................................................................ 7-51
Fuse F2 on N200 ............................................................................................ 7-55
Fuse F3 on N200 ............................................................................................ 7-59
Fuse F4 on N200 ............................................................................................ 7-61
Fuse F5 on N200 ............................................................................................ 7-63
Fuse F6 on N200 ............................................................................................ 7-65
Fuse F1 on N1000 .......................................................................................... 7-66
Generator problems ......................................................................................... 7-67
Generator Test Program ................................................................................. 7-67
Running the generator test program .............................................................. 7-67
Generator error codes .................................................................................... 7-69
GE1 "KVFBM error. xxV detected, 0V expected." ................... 7-70
GE2 "MAFBM error. xxV detected, 1.6V expected." ................. 7-72
GE3 "Net voltage is not ok." ..................................... 7-73
GE4 "Tube voltage is not ok." .................................... 7-73
GE5 "Tube voltage error. xxkV measured, xxkV expected." ......... 7-73
GE6 "Net voltage is not ok." ..................................... 7-80
GE7 "No tube current." ........................................... 7-81
GE8 "Too much tube current." ..................................... 7-90
GE9 "KVFAIL error. Tube voltage is not ok." ..................... 7-97
GE10 "Tube voltage error. xxkV measured, xxkV expected." ........ 7-97
GE11 "Net voltage is not ok." .................................... 7-97
GE12 "Tube current is not ok." .................................. 7-98
GE13 "Tube voltage is not ok." .................................. 7-99
GE16 "Tube current error. xxmA measured, xxmA expected." ........ 7-99
GE19 "Tube current error. xxmA measured, xxmA expected." ........ 7-99
7 - iv Cranex Tome Service Manual

7. Troubleshooting
Warnings and precautions
Warning - X-rays
When checking and testing the operation of the unit
always protect yourself from radiation generated by the
X-ray tube.
Warning - Electric shock

Switch the unit off and isolate it from the main power
supply before handling or replacing any of the circuit
boards in the unit.
Warning - High voltage

Before handling or replacing the N1000 and N200
boards switch the unit off, isolate it from the main power
supply and wait 10 minutes for the capacitors on theses
boards to discharge.
Caution - Static discharge

Always take adequate precautions when handling cir-
cuit boards to prevent static discharge. Leave all new or
replacement circuit boards in their protective packaging
until the boards are needed. When handling the boards
hold them by their edges and do not touch any connec-
tors or components. Static discharge can destroy board
components.
Doc. code 8200629 7-1

7. Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting principles
Circuit boards
Circuit boards cannot be repaired in the field. If a board
is found to be faulty the quickest way to get the unit
working is to replace the faulty board with a new one or
one that is known to be working correctly.
Faulty boards will be replaced free of charge if the unit
is under guarantee. For units not under guarantee,
faulty boards can be returned to SOREDEX for repair or
replacement.
When returning boards to SOREDEX please make sure
that you use the SOREDEX Return Authorization Pro-
cedure.
Indicator LEDs
On most of the circuit boards there are indicator LEDs:
- Green LEDs indicate whether a board is receiving

the supply voltage. When the unit is switched on all
the green LEDs must come on.
- Yellow function LEDs will switch on of off depending

on the state of the signal (high/low).
- Yellow SPI LEDs flash when there is SPI communi-

cation activity.
7 -2 Cranex Tome Service Manual

7. Troubleshooting
A list of boards and their voltage indicating LEDs

(green) is given below.
Board /V +5V (+9V) +15V (+19V) -15V (-19V) *28V
N100 D9, D10, D5 D4, D11 D3, D12 D1, D8

N200 D11 D13 D12 D14,
D24,
D25,
D26
N300 D1 D15 - D16
N600 D8 - - -
N700 D15, D2 D10 - D12
N800 D18 D14 - D12
N900 D24 D23, D13 D22 -
N1000 D16 D15 - D14
N1100 D6 D5 - -
N1200 D16 - - -
N1400 D31 D14 D13 -
N1600 D1, D8 D5 - -
N1700 D2 - - -
Test pins
On most of the circuit boards there are test pins that
allow the board to be checked to see if it is functioning
correctly. These are also described in the section "Cir-
cuit boards".
When checking voltages a digital multimeter (DMM)
must be used.
Doc. code 8200629 7-3

7. Troubleshooting
Check cables
The instruction "check cables" appears in the trouble
shooting instructions. The procedure for checking the
cables is as follows:
1. Make sure that the connectors on the cables are
correctly plugged in to their respective connectors
on the circuit boards. The connectors must be
squarely positioned and must not be loose or
crooked. If the connector has a locking mechanism
make sure that it is locked.
If the connector looks out of position, remove the
connector, check the pins (see 2, below). If the pins
are okay reconnect the connector.
2. Disconnect the connectors from the boards and

make sure that there are no bent, broken or missing
pins. If there is damage that can be easily repaired,
for example straighten a pin, repair the damage and
reconnect the connector. If the damage cannot be
repaired replace the cable.
3. Visually check the cable for cuts, wear, damaged

insulation and kinks. If there is obvious mechanical
damage to the cable it must be replaced. If there is
no obvious mechanical damage use a digital
multimeter (DMM) to check the resistance of the
different wires within the cable. An undamaged wire
will have no resistance (0 ohm), a damaged wire will
have a resistance value.

7. Troubleshooting
Image quality
Bad quality images can be due to a badly aligned unit,
the film processing system or incorrect patient position-
ing. If a user complains about the quality of the images
first check that the user is positioning the patient cor-
rectly.
For information on how to position the patient refer to
the Tome User's Manual.
If patient positioning is correct, make sure that the film

processing system is working correctly and that the
processing chemicals are fresh. If the film processing is
correct but the problem of bad quality image persists
the alignment of the unit should be checked.
For information on how to align the unit refer to the
Tome installation manual.
Doc. code 8200629 7-5

7. Troubleshooting
Power supply problems
Power supply problem
Check the on/off

switch light. If the main fuse has blown or there is no mains
power supply you will not hear the cooling fan.
Check main
The light is on No fuse F1 on Fuse OK No Replace fuse.
N2000
Yes Yes
Fuse keeps
blowing. See
Check LED Check mains section "Blown
D57 on N200. power supply. fuses"
Check fuse F7
LED is on. No Fuse OK No Replace fuse
on N200
Yes
Fuse keeps
Yes Check cable blowing. See
between N2000 section "Blown
and N200 fuses"
Check LEDS D11,

D12, D13, D14,
D24, D25 and D26
Replace N200 Yes Cable OK No Replace cable
on N200
Check fuses
All LEDs (F1-F6) on All fuses Replace blown
No No
are on. N200 for LEDs are OK fuses
that are not on.
Yes Yes
Fuse keeps
blowing. See
Main power supply OK. Replace N200. section "Blown
fuses"
Refer to "Display problems

7. Troubleshooting
Display problems
If the display remains blank when the unit is switched
on it is either because the unit is not receiving power or
because there is a problem with the display.
Display blank 1(4)
Check LEDs D1-D5 and

D9-D12 on N100.
Check power supply.

All LEDs
No See section- Power OK.
are on.
"Power supply problems"
Yes Yes
Check LED D8 Check cable

(+5V) on N600. between N200
and N100.
LED is on. No Replace cable. No Cable OK.
Yes Yes
Check voltage at Replace N100.

Replace N600.
R6 on N600.
Voltage
No
is +19V.
Yes
Check LED D5 and D6
2 (4)
Doc. code 8200629 7-7

7. Troubleshooting
2 (4) Display blank
One or
both of the LEDs Yes
are on.
No Check that memory

modules RAM,
Check LED D7 on BOOT, APL,
All installed No Install them
N600. IMG1, IMG2 are
correctly installed
in N600
Yes
Replace N600
LED is on No
Yes
Check voltage
at TP1 on N600
Voltage is
No Replace N600
+9V (EL+9V).
Yes
Check voltage
at TP2 on N600
Voltage is
No Replace N600
+19V (EL19V).
Yes
3 (4)

7. Troubleshooting
3 (4) Display blank
Yes
LED/LEDs on. Yes
No Check that memory

modules RAM,
Check LED D7 on BOOT, APL,
All installed No Install them
N600. IMG1, IMG2 are
correctly installed
in N600
Yes
Replace N600
LED is on No
Yes
Check voltage
at TP1 on N600
Voltage is
No Replace N600
+9V (EL+9V).
Yes
Check voltage
at TP2 on N600
Voltage is
No Replace N600
+19V (EL19V).
4 (4)
Doc. code 8200629 7-9

7. Troubleshooting
4 (4) Display blank
Yes
Check LED D5
(EL+5V) on N1600.
Check cable
LED is on No between N600 and Cable OK No Replace cable
N1600
Yes Yes
Check LED D8 Replace N1600

(EL+5V) on N1600.
Check cable
LED is on No between N600 and Cable OK No Replace cable
N1600
Yes Yes
Check cable signals Replace N1600

VDAT, VCLK, HS
and VS between
N600 and N1600.
Signals OK No Replace N1600

7. Troubleshooting
Problems during start-up
The unit selftest

When the unit is switched on it carries out a selftest.
During the test the software, the SPI communication
and some circuit boards are tested.
If the unit is functioning correctly software version infor-
mation, shown below, will appear briefly on the display.
==============================================
== Imaging Elements Oper. System : AP970101 ==
== Imaging Procedure Software #1 : IA970101 ==
== Imaging Procedure Software #2 : IB970101 ==
== Imaging Procedure Software #3 : IC970101 ==
== Misc. B-Mem Data and Software : MS970101 ==
=================================
After this the user's display will appear. Refer to user's

manual for more information about the user's display
If the unit does not pass the selftest, an error message

will appear on the display.
Error messages that can appear during start-up

CPU BOARD RAM-ERROR
Meaning:
The RAM memory module (N650) on N600 is not func-
tioning.
Corrective action:
Check that RAM memory module is correctly installed.
If it is, replace N650.
If the message reappears after N650 has been re-

placed,
replace N600.
## Missing SW-module(s) detected. System STOP. ##
Meaning:
The self test fails because one or more of the software
modules, N650s and N660s that are connected to N600
have not been detected.
The word "missing" will appear next to the module or
modules that are not detected.
Doc. code 8200629 7 - 11

7. Troubleshooting
==============================================
== Imaging Elements Oper. System : AP970101 ==
== Imaging Procedure Software #1 : IA970101 ==
== Imaging Procedure Software #2 : missing ==
== Imaging Procedure Software #3 : missing ==
== Misc. B-Mem Data and Software : MS970101 ==
====================================
Corrective action:
Check that the modules are installed and inserted
correctly. If modules are installed and inserted correctly
and the message reappears when the unit is switched
on again, replace appropriate module or modules.
## Imaging Procedure SW-modules in WRONG SLOTS. ##";

.. Validating SW-modules. Please wait...
Meaning:
The memory chips on memory modules are not in their
correct places.
Corrective action:
Switch the unit off.
Remove the memory modules and put the memory
chips in their correct positions.
## APL /IEOS-module checksum error. System STOP.##

or
## IMG1/IPS1-module checksum error. System STOP.##
or
or
Meaning:
The software has been corrupted.
Corrective action:
Replace the appropriate software module or download
new software using a PC. See section "Upgrading the
software using a PC".
## SW-modules are not compatible. System STOP.##
Meaning:
The software modules installed are not compatible and
cannot work together.

7. Troubleshooting
Corrective action:
Replace the appropriate software module or download
new software using a PC. See section "Upgrading the
software using a PC".
== MISSING CONFIGURATION ITEMS DETECTED

-- Menu Setting NOT Saved
Press any menu key
Meaning:
A unit setting was changed, for example the time, but
the setting was not saved in the memory before the unit
was switched off.
Corrective action:
Change the setting again and save it in the memory
before switching the unit off. For information on how to
save settings in the memory see the section "Service
Codes".
## N700: Motor Control Powers OFF: NO Movements
Meaning:
None of the stepper motors are receiving power. The
display will function, but the unit cannot be used to take
exposure
Corrective action
## N600: IMC A/D B-ch test failed:
Meaning:
N600 is not working.
Corrective action
Replace N600.
## N100: CU1 SPI-com. error status hex-word=xx
Meaning
N600 cannot communicate with N100 (CU1). After this
message the self test continues normally but the expo-
sure button and all movements are disabled (the unit
can not be used to take exposures). Only the user
interface functions.
Doc. code 8200629 7 - 13

7. Troubleshooting
Corrective action
No power supply. Check to see if LED D5 on N100 is
on. If it is not refer to section "Power Supply Problems".
Check to see if N100 works.

- Switch power off.
##N700: Motor control Powers OFF: NO Movements 1(2)
Check LEDs D15

and D12 on N700.
Check power supply.

LEDs are on. No See section-
"Power supply problems"
Yes
Check LED D6
(MCRST*) on N600.
LED is on. Yes
No
Check MOTPOWON
Replace N600
IC9 pin 17 on N600.
Voltage
No
is +5V
Yes
2 (2)

7. Troubleshooting
2 (2) #N700
Check TP 7
(MCRESET*) on N600.
Voltage
No
is +5V
Yes Check cable between

Cable OK. No Replace cable
N600 and N700.
Check LED D13
(MOTPOW) on N700. Yes
Replace N700
LED is on. No
Yes
Check LED D16

(LCASOK) on N700.
LED is on. No Replace N700
- Disconnect connectors J104 and J114 from N100.

This will cut the SPI serial lines to all the boards
except N600 and N100.
- Switch power on.
- If same message appears, check wiring between

N100 and N600.
- If wiring is OK, replace N100.
- If the same message appears after replacing N100,

replace N600.
Doc. code 8200629 7 - 15

7. Troubleshooting
## N900:CU2 SPI-com. error status hex-word=xx
Meaning
N600 can not communicate correctly with N900.
After this message the self test continues normally but
the exposure button and all movements are disabled
(the unit can not be used to take exposures). Only the
user interface functions.
Corrective action
on. If it is not refer to the section "Power Supply Prob-
lems" at the beginning of Trouble Shooting.

- Switch power off.
- Disconnect connectors J904 and J905 from N900

and J114 from N100. This cuts the SPI serial lines
to N1200, N1100 and N1700.
- Switch power on.
- If same message appears, check the wiring be-

tween N100 and N900.
- If the wiring is OK replace N900.
## N1400: THC SPI-com. error status hex-word=xx
Meaning
Corrective action

7. Troubleshooting

- Switch power off.
- Disconnect connector J905 from N900 and J114

from N100. This cuts the SPI serial lines to N1200
and to N1700.
- Switch power on.

N900 and N1100 and between N1100 and N1400.
## N1200: CHC SPI-com. error status hex-word=xx
Meaning
Corrective action

- Switch power off.
- Disconnect connector J114 from N100. This cuts

SPI serial lines to N1700.
- Switch power on.

N900 and N1200.
## N1200: CASSETTE HEAD BOARD ADC B-ch test failed:
Meaning
N1200 is not functioning.
Corrective action
Replace N1200.
Doc. code 8200629 7 - 17

7. Troubleshooting
## N1700: CEPHALO feedback test error"
Meaning
1. Feedback error.
2. Wrong configuration. A panoramic unit has been

configured to be a pan/ceph unit.
Corrective action
1. No power supply. Check to see if LED D2 on N1700
is on. If it is not refer to section "Power Supply
Problems".
- Switch power off.
- Check wiring between N100 and N1700.
2. Check the configuration of the unit and reconfigure

if necessary. Refer to service code 9700 - option 4
or service code 9791.
## N600: CHIN REST in WRONG position
Meaning
Both chin rest position microswitches are closed. This
combination is not allowed.
Corrective action
Check to see if the microswitches work.
Use service code 9770 - H/W test menu, option #6
Sensor tests to see if they work. Also refer to INF 343/
344 later in Trouble Shooting.
If they do not work replace them.
Check to see if N600 works

- Switch power off.
- Disconnect connectors J608 and J609 from N600.
- Switch power on.
- If same message appears replace N600.

7. Troubleshooting
-- Exposure button signal ON:
Meaning
The exposure button is active even though it is not
pressed down.
Corrective action
Check to see if the exposure switch is broken.
- Switch power off.
- Disconnect exposure switch from its connector.
- Switch the power on. If the message does not ap-

pear replace the exposure switch.

- Switch power off.
- Disconnect connector J605 from N600.
- Switch power on.
- If same message appears replace N600.


If indicator LED D20 on N800 is on replace N800.
-- Return button signal ON:
Meaning
The return button is active even though it is not pressed
down.
Corrective action
Replace the return button.
Doc. code 8200629 7 - 19

7. Troubleshooting

7. Trouble shooting
Problems during use
Information and error messages

Information and error messages appear on the user
display in the INFO line, for example:
Close mirror
Information messages appear as the unit is being used
and help the user to operate the unit. The information
messages are usually instructions telling the user what
to do next. If the user does not follow the instruction,
the user is not able to continue to operate the unit.
For example, if the message "Close mirror" appears on

the display the mirror must be closed before the user
can continue to operate the unit. When the mirror is
closed the message will clear from the display and the
user can continue to use the unit.
If the mirror is closed but the message remains on the
display it indicates either that the instruction has not
been correctly carried out, for example mirror has not
been properly closed, or the unit is malfunctioning.
An error message will appear if the system detects a

unit malfunction during operation. The unit cannot be
used if there is an error message on the display. You
can, however, enter the service mode to carry out serv-
ice tests and checks. Section 5 - Service Codes lists
and describes all the codes.
Doc. code 8200629 7 - 21

7. Trouble shooting
Information and error message numbers

All information and error messages have a number. The
message number does not appear with the message on
the user display. The message number can only be
seen by entering the information mode. To enter the
information mode press the info ( i ) button at the top of
the display. The user display will disappear and the
information (prefix INF) or error (prefix ERR) message
together with its number will appear on the display.
INF374 Close mirror
ERR65 GENERATOR FAILURE: kV
To return to the user display press the exit (door) key at

the top of the display.
Note that although the messages may be in different

languages, depending on the set up of the unit, the
message numbers are the same for all language ver-
sions of the messages.

7. Trouble shooting
Description of information and error messages

ERR62 HARDWARE FAILURE 1....N
Meaning:
The main processor on the N600 board cannot commu-
nicate with the slave processor on the N900 board.
Corrective action:
Switch the unit off, wait 10 seconds and then switch the
unit on again. If there is a hardware problem the follow-
ing message will appear on the display:
##N900 : CU2 SPI-com. Error status hex-word=xx
Refer to section "Start up problems" for more informa-
tion.
ERR63 MAIN SUPPLY VOLTAGE TOO LOW
Meaning:
The main power supply to the unit is too low and the
unit cannot operate.
Corrective action:
Check the main supply (line) voltage to the unit. It must
be within ±10% of the nominal value (230VAC or
115VAC). If the supply voltage is OK, use service code
9770, second page option 3 "Main power supply volt-
age
A/D test" to check the main power supply in the unit. If
the A/D value is zero N200 must be changed.
ERR64 N900 SPI COMMUNICATION FAILURE
Meaning:
The communication link (SPI) between N600 (the mas-
ter) and N900) the slave has failed.
Corrective action:
Use service code 9770, first page option 2 "Start self
test" to check the SPI communication. If N900 has
failed replace it.
Doc. code 8200629 7 - 23

7. Trouble shooting

Refer to the section "Generator problems".
ERR66 GENERATOR FAILURE: mA

ERR67 GENERATOR FAILURE: TIME

INF68 EXPOSURE INTERRUPTED - Press RETURN
Meaning:
The exposure button was released (or detected to have
been released) during an exposure. The RETURN
button or E-key must be pressed to drive the unit back
to the PIO position.
Note that the exposure button MUST be pressed and
HELD DOWN for the duration of the exposure.
Problem and corrective action:

The message appears while the exposure button is
being held down.
- Exposure button switch is broken or there is a faulty
connection in the button switch. Check button
switch. If faulty replace it.
- The spiral cable to which the exposure button is

attached is damaged. Check cable and connector. If
either are damaged replace the cable.
- Exposure key lock is malfunctioning.
- N800 is faulty.
ERR69 MCOK: Stepper Motor Cntr FAILURE
Meaning:
The stepper motor controller (N700) cannot drive the
stepper motors
Corrective action:
Switch the power off and wait ten seconds. If the mes-
sage reappears, refer to the message "##N700: Motor
Control Powers OFF: NO Movements" in the section
"Problems during startup"

7. Trouble shooting
ERR70 FEEDBACK FAILURE: kV HIGH
Meaning:
The kV feedback value during an exposure was too
high.

Check fuse F3 on N200. If the fuse is OK refer to the
section "Generator problems".
ERR71 FEEDBACK FAILURE: mA
Meaning:
The mA feedback value during an exposure was incor-
rect.

Refer to "Generator problems" section
INF72 TUBE HOT: Wait for cooling...
Meaning:
The tube head is cooling down after an exposure. The
message will automatically clear when the tube head is
cool.
Problem and corrective action if the message does

not clear:
The temperature sensor in the tubehead has failed.
Switch the power off.
Disconnect the cable connected to J1402 from N1400
(THC).
Measure the resistance across pins 1 and 2 of the
cable.
When the tube head is hot (over 70°C) the resistance
should be infinity. When the tube head is cool (normal
room temperature) the resistance should be about 0.
If the resistances are not these values replace the tube
head. If the resistances are correct check wiring (signal
TUBEHOT) between N1400 (THC) and N1100 (HVC)
and between N1100 (HVC) and N900 (CU2).
Doc. code 8200629 7 - 25

7. Trouble shooting
INF74 GENERATOR TIME-OUT control - Press C
Meaning:
Exposure has lasted too long and a hardware failure
has occurred in the generator control circuit.

not clear:
Control panel not functioning.
Check the key function using service code 9770, page
two, option 1 - Key-code testing. If the keys do not work
replace N1600.
INF88 WAIT! Saving system data into memory
Meaning:
Will appear briefly, two seconds (maximum time two
minutes) when exposure information is stored in the
unit memory. The message will automatically clear after
the data is saved
INF109 Press RETURN-button or E-key
Meaning:
Either the RETURN button or the E-key must be
pressed to drive the unit to the PIO position.

not clear:
The RETURN button does not work.
The RETURN button (on the side of the cassette car-
riage) is connected to N1200.
Switch the power off.
Disconnect the cable connected to J1210 from N1200.
Measure the resistance across pins 1 and 2 of the
cable. The resistance should be about 0 when the
RETURN button is pressed and infinite when it is not
pressed. If these resistance values are correct replace
N1200. If the values are wrong replace the RETURN
button.
The E-keys do not work.

Control panel not functioning. Check the key function
using service code 9770, page two, option 1 - Key-code
testing. If the keys do not work replace N1600.

7. Trouble shooting
INF120 Program not identified
Meaning:
A program or service code number was keyed in that is
not recognised by the system.
Press any key to clear the message.

not clear:
replace N1600.
Problem and corrective action if the message keeps

reappearing:
Select correct program number.
INF121 Access denied
Meaning:
The wrong password was keyed in when entering the
service mode.
Press any key to clear the message. (Message INF122
will reappear)
Corrective action:
Key in correct password.

not clear:
replace N1600.
INF122 Enter password and press E
Meaning:
This message is a request for the password that must
be keyed in to enter the service mode. Note if the
wrong password is keyed in message INF121 will ap-
pear.

not clear:
replace N1600.
Doc. code 8200629 7 - 27

7. Trouble shooting
INF123 SERVICE STATE - Select next procedure
Meaning:
Appears after you have keyed in you password but
before you have pressed the E key (INF122). The
message will clear when you press the E key.

not clear:
two, option 1 "Key-code testing". If the keys do not work
replace N1600.
INF125 Remove cassette (Pan/ceph units only)
Meaning:
This message will appear if the unit is in the ceph posi-
tion and the panoramic cassette has not been removed
from the cassette carriage.
Remove the cassette and the message will clear.

not clear:
The Cassette Type Sensor (N2400) is not working.
Check the sensor operation using service code 9770,
option 6 - Sensor tests. If the sensor is not working,
replace it.
If the sensor is working there may be a problem with

the sensor power to the optosensor. Select service
code 9770, page two, option 2 - Power signals to all
optosensors. To check the sensor, measure the sensor
power at TPI on N900. The voltage must be 5VDC. If it
is not 5VDC, replace N900. If it is 5VDC replace the
sensor board.
INF126 Insert cassette

Meaning:
The panoramic cassette must be inserted into the cas-
sette carriage before an exposure can be taken. Mes-
sage clears when a correctly labelled cassette is in-
serted into the cassette carriage. Refer to the user’s
manual for information on how to label cassettes.

7. Trouble shooting

not clear:
1. Cassette not labelled or the label is missing.
- Label cassette.
2. Label in wrong position.

- Reposition label.
3. Label dirty.
- Clean or replace label.
4. Cassette upside down, back to front or not fully

inserted.
- Insert the cassette correctly. Refer to user’s
manual.
The Cassette Type Sensor (N2400) is not working.

Refer to INF125 for information on what to do.
INF128 Key in program number and press E
Meaning:
After you press the C key (once for exposure program
selection and twice for service codes) the number of the
exposure program (three digits) or service code (four
digits) must be keyed in.
What to do if the message does not clear:

E key not functioning. Check the key functions using
service code 9770, page two, option 1 - Key-code test-
ing. If the keys do not work replace N1600.
INF132 Program parameters not installed
Meaning:
Indicates that the exposure program selected has not
been installed in the unit.
For example, if you select a ceph program when there
is no ceph unit installed.

not clear:
Keys not functioning.
Check the key functions using service code 9770, page
replace N1600.
Doc. code 8200629 7 - 29

7. Trouble shooting
INF134 Increase kilovolt setting

INF135 Decrease kilovolt setting
Meaning:
Indicates that the kV value is too low/high for the patient
size selected, and a higher/lower kV value must be
selected.
Select a kV value within the recommended range, the
dotted area on the display, and the message will clear.

not clear:
You selected another kV value that is outside the rec-
ommended range
Select kV within recommended range.
Keys not functioning

replace N1600.
INF136 Use faster film/screen or increase kV

INF137 Use slower film/screen or decrease kV
Meaning:
The film/screen combination (cassette) or the kV value
are not correct for the patient size selected and a differ-
ent film/screen combination or kV must be used.

Message does not clear after inserting new cassette.
Refer to INF126 Insert cassette
Message does not clear after a new kV value was

keyed in.
Keys not working.
replace N1600.
INF138 Valid exp. setting cannot be found
Meaning:
It indicates that the kV value is not within the accepted
range.
The message will clear when a kV value within the
accepted range is selected. For more information on kV
selection refer to the user’s manual.

7. Trouble shooting

not clear:
Keys not working.
replace N1600.
INF139 No cuts placed
Meaning:
Indicates that no tomo cuts were selected during the
dental tomo program.
The message will clear when the cuts are selected.

not clear:
Keys not working.
replace N1600.
INF140 Select procedure
Meaning:
The exposure procedure has not been selected.
The message will clear when the procedure is selected.

not clear:
Keys not working.
replace N1600.
INF141 Select program or exposure time
Meaning:
The exposure program or exposure time must be se-
lected.
The message will clear when the program or exposure
time is selected.

not clear:
Keys not working
replace N1600.
Doc. code 8200629 7 - 31

7. Trouble shooting
INF142 Select exposure time
Meaning:
The exposure time for a ceph exposure must be se-
lected.
The message will clear when the time is selected.

not clear:
Keys not working.
replace N1600.
INF143 Select program
Meaning:
The exposure program must be selected.
The message will clear when the program is selected.

not clear:
Keys not working.
replace N1600.
INF144 Select number of radiograms
Meaning:
The number of images that will appear on the film must
be selected.
The message will clear when the number of radiograms
is selected.

not clear:
Keys not working.
replace N1600.
INF145 Select jaw
Meaning:
The jaw that you wish to take an exposure of must be
selected.
The message will clear when the jaw is selected.

7. Trouble shooting

not clear:
Keys not working.
replace N1600.
INF146 Select side
Meaning:
The side of the jaw that you wish to take an exposure of
must be selected.
The message will clear when the side is selected.

not clear:
Keys not working.
replace N1600.
INF147 Select layer thickness (LT), 2/4 mm
Meaning:
The layer thickness for a dental tomo exposure must be
selected.
The message will clear when the layer thickness is
selected.

not clear:
Keys not working.
replace N1600.
INF148 Select interjoint distance
Meaning:
The interjoint distance for a TMJ Tome exposure must
be selected.
The message will clear when the interjoint distance is
selected.

not clear:
Keys not working.
replace N1600.
Doc. code 8200629 7 - 33

7. Trouble shooting
INF149 Select angle
Meaning:
The angle for a TMJ Tome exposure must be selected.
The message will clear when the angle is selected.

not clear:
Keys not working.
replace N1600.
INF150 Select region and cuts, then press E
Meaning:
The region and number of cuts for a TMJ Tome expo-
sure must be selected.
The message will clear when the region and cuts are
selected.

not clear:
Keys not working.
replace N1600.
INF151 Select scanogram region and press E
Meaning:
The scanogram region you wish to take an exposure of
must be selected.
The message will clear when the region is selected and
the E key pressed.

not clear:
Keys not working.
replace N1600.
INF152 Select tomogram type
Meaning:
The tomogram type you require must be selected.
The message will clear when the tomograph type is
selected.

7. Trouble shooting

not clear:
Keys not working.
replace N1600.
INF153 Select tomogram subtype
Meaning:
The tomogram subtype you require must be selected.
The message will clear when the subtype is selected.

not clear:
Keys not working.
replace N1600.
INF154 Press E to accept
Meaning:
The E key must be pressed to accept the option cho-
sen.

not clear:
Keys not working.
replace N1600.
INF157 Adjust sensitivity number (SN)
Meaning:
Select the film/screen sensitivity number during the
calibration program.
When a number is selected the message will clear.

not clear:
Keys not working.
replace N1600.
Doc. code 8200629 7 - 35

7. Trouble shooting
INF158 Insert cassette to be calibrated
Meaning:
The panoramic cassette to be calibrated must be in-
serted into the cassette carriage.

not clear:
Refer to message INF126 for information on what to do.
INF159 Select maintenance program (4 digits)
Meaning:
A four digit number must be keyed in to select a mainte-
nance program.
When the number is keyed in the message will clear.

not clear:
Keys not working.
replace N1600.
INF168 Use aperture 3 or faster film/screen

INF169 Use aperture 4 or slower film/screen
Meaning:
A different aperture or a faster film/screen combination
must be used.
When the new aperture or faster film/screen is selected
the message will clear.

not clear:
New aperture selected but the message remains on the
display.
Refer to INF354 for information on what to do.
Different cassette inserted.

Make sure that a faster cassette was used.
If message still does not clear refer to INF126 Insert
cassette, for more information on what to do.

7. Trouble shooting
INF251 EXPOSURE
Meaning
Appears then the exposure button is pressed down to
take an exposure.
The message will always clear.
If you remove your finger from the exposure button
during an exposure message INF68 EXPOSURE IN-
TERRUPTED - Press RETURN will appear.
INF252 Patient size and kV OK? READY...

INF253 Exposure time and kV OK? READY...
INF254 READY...
Meaning:
The unit is ready to take an exposure.
When you press the exposure button message INF251
EXPOSURE will appear on the display.

not clear:
Exposure button not working.
- Exposure button switch is broken or there is a faulty
connection in the button switch. Check button
switch. If faulty replace it.
- The spiral cable to which the exposure button is

attached is damaged. Check cable and connector. If
damaged replace the cable.
Exposure key lock is malfunctioning.
INF339 Cassette 1 SN 000

Meaning:
The messages appears briefly on the display when a
panoramic cassette is inserted, and indicates the cas-
sette number and the film/screen sensitivity number.
Checking the cassette identification:

If you wish to check the cassette identification, use
service code 9770, page 2 option 4 "PAN identification
test"
Doc. code 8200629 7 - 37

7. Trouble shooting
INF343 Set chin-rest to upper position

INF344 Set chin-rest to lower position
Meaning:
The chin-rest is in the wrong position and must be
moved.
When the chin-rest is in the correct position the mes-
sage will clear.

not clear:
Microswitches not activated:
Move the chin-rest mechanism up and down to see if it
activates the position microswitches. If not adjust the
position of the microswitches until it does.
Microswitches broken.
If the chin-rest mechanism activates the microswitches
but the message does not disappear the microswitches
may be broken. Check the sensor operation using
service code 9770, option 6 - Sensor tests. If the
microswitches are not working, replace the faulty one.
If the message still does not disappear after the
microswitche/s have been replaced, replace N600.
INF354 Select aperture number 2


7. Trouble shooting
Meaning:
The correct aperture must be selected.
When the correct aperture is selected the message will
clear.

not clear:
The positioning rail on the primary aperture assembly
has moved.
To check, slightly move the aperture selector knob in
one direction and then the other. If the message disap-
pears the positioning rail is incorrectly positioned.
Reposition the rail by loosening the holding screws and
moving the rail slightly to the left or right until the mes-
sage clears. Tighten the screws when the adjustment is
correct.
No sensor power.
There may be a problem with the sensor power to
N1400. Select service code 9770, page two, option 2 -
Power signals to all optosensors. Measure the voltage
at TP1 on N900. The voltage must be 5VDC. If it is not
5VDC, replace N900. If it is 5VDC replace N1400.
Sensor not functioning.

option 6 - sensor tests. If the optosensors are not work-
ing, replace N1400.
INF362 Wait (The message flashes)
Meaning:
The tubehead is cooling down after an exposure.
The message will always clear. Note that the maximum
cooling period is five minutes.
INF363 RETURNING....wait
Meaning:
Appears after the RETURN button or E-key has been
pressed and indicates that the unit is moving back to
the PIO position.
The RETURN sequence is as follows:
Doc. code 8200629 7 - 39

7. Trouble shooting
1. V movement, the C-arm returns to the horizontal

position
2. X and Y movements together, the C-arm moves to

the correct X and Y PIO positions
3. R and C movements together, the C-arm rotates to

the PIO position the cassette carriage returns to the
start position.
NOTE
If the unit does not return to one of the PIO positions
within a fixed time period the message INF364 "RE-
TURN time-out error—PRESS RETURN" will appear.
Also note that if the unit does not return to one PIO
position it will not attempt to return to the next one.
For example, if the unit starts to return to the X and Y
positions, but does not reach them before timeout, the
unit will not attempt to return to the R and C positions.
Problems and corrective actions if the unit does not

return to the PIO position:
No or limited movement.
One or more of the stepper motors have failed, or one
of the R-motor belts has broken.
Test the operation of the motors with the service codes.
9960 tests the X movement
9961 tests the Y movement
9962 tests the R movement
9963 tests the V movement
9964 tests the C movement
If any of the motors do not operate, replace them. If the

R motor functions correctly but C-arm does not rotate,
check to see if the any of the R-motor belts have bro-
ken. If they have replace them.
Sensors not functioning

The unit moves but one or more of the movements
cannot find a stop position.
One or more of the sensors has failed.
option 6 - sensor tests. If any of the optosensor boards
are not working, replace them.

7. Trouble shooting
No sensor power.
If the optosensors are working there may be a problem
with the sensor power to the optosensors. Select serv-
ice code 9770, page two, option 2 - Power signals to all
optosensors.
To check the X movement sensor board (N2500) meas-

ure the voltage at J10, pin 1, on N100. For the Y move-
ment sensor board (N2500) measure the voltage at
J11, pin 1, on N100.
The voltage must be 5VDC. If it is not 5VDC replace
N100. If it is 5VDC replace the sensor board.
To check the R (N2300), V (N2600) and C (N2500)

movement sensors, measure the sensor power at TP1
on N900. The voltage must be 5VDC. If it is not 5VDC,
replace N900. If it is 5VDC replace the corresponding
sensor board.
INF364 RETURN time-out error—PRESS RETURN

Meaning:
Appears after the RETURN button or E-key have been
pressed if the PIO position is not found within a fixed
time period.
What to if the message if the message reappears.

Refer to message INF363 "RETURNING....wait".
INF368 Remove Ceph soft tissue filter

Meaning:
The unit is in the pan position and the ceph soft tissue
filter has not been removed.
Rotate the soft tissue filter knob until the message
clears - all the soft tissue LEDs on the ceph head sup-
port must go out.
For information on how to use the soft tissue filter refer
to the ceph section in the User’s Manual.

not clear:
The potentiometer at the end of the soft tissue filter
mechanism, in front of the tube head, is not working.
Use service code 9700 option 4 "Ceph setup/test
menu", second level option 4 Read Ceph filter A/D-
values" (or 9791 option 4) to check the operation of the
potentiometer. If the potentiometer is broken replace it.
Doc. code 8200629 7 - 41

7. Trouble shooting
No power signal.
If the potentiometer is working the problem is with the
signal to N600. The filter position signal passes through
N1400, N1100 and N900, where it is converted in to
SPI communication. If the signal is zero at any board,
the board is faulty and must be replaced.
INF371 Set cassette head to side position

INF372 Set cassette head to normal position
Meaning:
The cassette head is in the wrong position for the expo-
sure to be taken. When it is moved to the correct posi-
tion, the message will clear.

not clear:
The cassette head microswitches have failed.
option 6 - sensor tests. If one or more of the
microswitches are not working, replace the faulty one.

INF374 Close mirror
Meaning:
The mirror was opened so that the patient could be
positioned, and must be closed before an exposure can
be taken. When the mirror is closed the message will
clear.

not clear:
The mirror position microswitch has failed.
option 6 - sensor tests. If the microswitch is not working,
replace it.

microswitch have been replaced, replace N600.
INF376 Close cassette shields

INF377 Open cassette shields

7. Trouble shooting
Meaning:
The cassette shields are in the wrong position for the
exposure to be taken. When the cassette shields are
moved to the correct position, the message will clear.

not clear:
The cassette shield microswitches have failed.
option 6 - sensor tests. If the microswitches are not
working, replace the faulty one.

INF379 Remove cephalo cassette
Meaning:
The ceph cassette must be removed when the unit is in
the pan position.
When the ceph cassette is removed the message will
clear.

not clear:
One or more of the cassette identification switches in
the ceph cassette holder has failed.
Check the microswitch operation using service code
9700, option 4 Ceph setup/test menu, second level
option 5 Test Ceph cassette switches. If the
microswitches are not working, replace the board,
N1900/1901/2200/2201.
No power signal.
If the microswitches are working there is a problem with
N1700 and it must be replaced.
INF380 Insert cephalo cassette 8AV

INF381 Insert cephalo cassette 8AH
INF382 Insert cephalo cassette 8SV
Doc. code 8200629 7 - 43

7. Trouble shooting
Meaning:
A ceph cassette must be inserted into the ceph cas-
sette holder before a ceph exposure can be taken.
When a ceph cassette is inserted the message will
clear.

not clear:
Refer to INF379 "Remove cephalo cassette".
INF412 KV-FEEDBACK LOW
Meaning:
No kV feedback from the tubehead.

Check fuse F4 on N200. If OK check cable from
tubehead to N1000 and the service switch. The cable
must be connected and the service switch on.
If OK refer to "Generator problems".
Other problems that may occur during use
The soft tissue LEDs do not function.

Solution
Use service code 9700 option 4 "Ceph setup/test
menu", second level option 4 Read Ceph filter A/D-
values" (or 9791 option 4) to see if the filter position
signals are correct (Refer to INF386). If the signals are
correct use service code 9700 option 6 "Test Ceph filter
position leds", third level option 8 - all LEDs.
If the LEDs do not work replace N1700.

7. Trouble shooting
Patient positioning/exposure lights do not function.

Solution
Use service code 9770 option 4 "Test lights" to test the
lights. Replace the lamps if they do not work.
If the lamps work using this service code but the expo-
sure warning light does not operate in normal use, the
control circuit on N300 is defective. Replace N300.
If the focal trough and TMJ (Y) lights do not operate in

normal use, the control circuit on N900 is defective.
Replace N900.
If the midsagittal (X) and Frankfort (Z) lights do not

operate in normal use, the control circuit on N700 is
defective. Replace N700.
The unit will not move when the up/down keys are
pressed.
Solution
The control signals (SREF1/2) from the up/down keys
(there are up/down keyy on the keyboard and on the
side of the ceph unit) do not reach N300.
For the keyboard keys check voltage at TP8 on N300. If
there is no signal replace N1600.
For the ceph keys check voltage at TP9 on N300. If
there is no signal replace N1700.
The voltages are as follows:

up movement 3.7V
down movement 1.3V
stop 2.5V
If the voltages are OK, check the output from N300,

TP13/14. If there is no output replace N300. If there is
output replace the Z-motor.
Doc. code 8200629 7 - 45

7. Trouble shooting

7. Trouble shooting
Blown fuses
If a fuse blows repeatedly, it can indicate that there is a
wiring or board problem. This section describes how to
identify the problem if a fuse keeps blowing,
Support arm
N100, N300, N1700
High power Low power Moving column
N600, N700, N800, N1600
Rotating unit
N900, N1100, N1200, N1400
N200
F1
+9V1,2,3
Moving column
N600, N700, N1600
F2
+19V1,2,3
Rotating unit
N900, N1100, N1200, N1400
F3
-19V1,2,3
N2000 Rotating unit

F4 N900, N1200, N1400
F7 +28V1
F1
F5 Rotating unit
+28v2 N900, N1000, N1400
F6 Moving column
+28V3 N700, N800
Rotating unit Support arm

N1000 N300
Fuse guide
Doc. code 8200629 7 - 49

7. Trouble shooting
Fuse guide
Fuse F1 - N2000
1. Switch power off.

2. Disconnect connectors J201 and J202 from N200.
3. Check that wiring between N2000 and N200 is ok. Replace it if needed.
4. If wiring is ok, switch power on
Fuse F1 blows Yes Replace mains switch
No

2. Disconnect connector J203 from N200.
3. Connect connectors J201 and J202 to N200.
4. Switch power on.
Fuse F1 blows Yes Replace N200
No
Check wiring between N200 connector J203 and N1000 connector J1002.
If wiring is ok, replace N1000

7. Trouble shooting
Fuse F1 on N2000
Fuse F1 on N200
If the +9V power supply to the display short-circuits,
fuse F1 on N200 may blow. Switch power off. Discon-
nect connectors J603 and J604 from N600. Switch the
power on. If fuse F1 on N200 blows the problem is NOT
with N1600 NOR with the display module. Refer to
section "Power supply problems"
Fuse F1 - N200
A1 (2)

2. Disconnect connectors J204, J205, J206, J207 and J208 from N200.
3. Switch power on
Fuse F1
Yes Replace N200.
blows
No

3. Switch power on
Fuse F1 Check wiring between N200 and

Yes
blows N300. If wiring is ok, replace N300.
No

2. Connect connectors J204, J205 and J206 on N200.
4. Switch power on.

Yes
blows N100. If wiring is ok, replace N100
No
A2 (2)
Doc. code 8200629 7 - 51

7. Trouble shooting
A2 (2) F1 - N200

3. Switch power on.
Fuse F1 Continues
No
blows F1 - N200 B1 (2)
Yes

2. Disconnect connectors J602, J603, J604 and J605 from N600.
4. Switch power on.

Yes
No

2. Connect connector J602 to N600.
3. Switch power on.

Yes
No

2. Connect connectors J605 on N600 and J706 to N700.
3. Check wiring between N600 and N800.
4. If wiring is ok, switch power on
Fuse F1
Yes Replace N800
blows
No
Check wiring between N600 and N1600. If wiring is ok, replace N1600.

7. Trouble shooting
Fuse F1 N200
B1 (2)

4. Switch power on.
Fuse F1 blows Yes Check wiring between N100 and N900
No

4. Switch power on
No

3. Switch power on.
Check wiring between N900 and N1200.

Fuse F1 blows Yes
If wiring is ok, replace N1200.
No
B2 (2)
Doc. code 8200629 7 - 53

7. Trouble shooting
B2 (2) Fuse F1 N200

4. Switch power on
Check wiring between N900 and N1100.

Fuse F1 blows Yes
No

3. Check wiring between N1100 and N1400. If wiring is ok, replace N1400

7. Trouble shooting
Fuse F2 on N200
If the +19V power supply to the display short-circuits,
fuse F2 on N200 may blow. Switch power off.
Disconnect connectors J603 and from N600.
Switch the power on. If fuse F1 on N200 blows the
problem is NOT with N1600 NOR with the display mod-
ule. Refer to section "Power supply problems"
Fuse F2 - N200
A1 (2)

3. Switch power on.
Fuse F2
Yes Replace N200.
blows
No

2. Connect connectors J204, J205, J206, J207 and J208 to N200.
4. Switch power on

Yes
No

2. Connect connector J107 and J115 to N100.
3. Switch power on.
Fuse F2 Continues
No
blows F2 - N200 B1 (2)
No
A2 (2)
Doc. code 8200629 7 - 55

7. Trouble shooting
A2 (2) F2 - N200
No

2. Disconnect connectors J602 and J603 on N600 and J706 on N700.
3. Switch power on
Fuse F2 Check wiring between N600 and N100.

Yes
blows If wiring is ok, replace N600.
No

2. Connect connectors J602 to N600 and J706 to N700.
3. Switch power on

Yes
No

4. Switch power on.

Yes
blows If wiring is ok, replace N1600
No
Replace electroluminecent display module

7. Trouble shooting
Fuse F2 - N200
B1 (2)

4. Switch power on
Fuse F2
Yes Replace wiring between N100 and N900
blows
No

4. Switch power on
Fuse F2
Yes Replace N900
blows
No

3. Switch power on

Yes
blows If wiring is ok, replace N1200
No
B2 (2)
Doc. code 8200629 7 - 57

7. Trouble shooting
B2 (2) F2 - N200

4. Switch power on

Yes
No

4. If wiring is ok, replace N1400

7. Trouble shooting
Fuse F3 on N200
Fuse F3 - N200
1 (2)

3. Switch power on
Fuse F3
Yes Replace N200
blows
No

2. Connect connectors J204, J205, J206, J207 and J208 to N200
4. Switch power on

Yes
No

2. Connect connector J107 and J115 to N100.
3. Switch power on
Check wiring in fixed column

Fuse F3
Yes (-19V2 is wired to fixed column but
blows
none of the boards use it).
No

4. Switch power on.
2 (2)
Doc. code 8200629 7 - 59

7. Trouble shooting
2 (2) F3 - N200
Fuse F3 Replace wiring between N100 and

Yes
blows N900
No

4. Switch power on
Fuse F3
Yes Replace N900
blows
No

3. Switch power on.
Check wiring between N900 and

Fuse F3
Yes N1200. If wiring is ok, replace
blows
N1200
No

4. Switch power on.
Check wiring between N900 and

Fuse F3
Yes N1100. If wiring is ok, replace
blows
N1100
No

4. If wiring is ok, replace N1400.

7. Trouble shooting
Fuse F4 on N200
Fuse F4 on N200 protects the Y-lights on N900, the x-
ray tube filament drive on N1400 and the power FET
gate drive on N1000. If the fuse blows when the unit is
switched on, the flow chart below will help you find
where the problem is.
If the fuse keeps blowing when the patient positioning

lights are switched on (focal trough keys are pressed or
the mirror is opened) the problem is with the Y-lights
(focal trough or TMJ) or the wiring to these lights.
Fuse F4 - N200
A1 (2)

3. Switch power on.
No

5. If wiring is OK, switch power on.
Fuse F4 blows Yes Replace N100.
No

5. If wiring is OK, switch power on.
2 (2)
Doc. code 8200629 7 - 61

7. Trouble shooting
F4 - N200
2 (2)
No

3. Disconnect connectors J1103 from N1100.
4. Check wiring between N900 and N1200 and also between N900 and N1100.
5. If wiring is OK, switch power on
No
Replace N1400

7. Trouble shooting
Fuse F5 on N200
Fuse F5 on N200 protects the stepper motor driver and
the X and Z-lights on N700. It also protects any external
device connected to N800. If the fuse blows when the
unit is switched on, the flow chart below will help you
find where the problem is.
Fuse F5 - N200

3. Switch power on.
Fuse F5
Yes Replace N200
blows
No

5. If wiring is ok, switch power on.
Fuse F5
Yes Replace N100
blows
No

5. If wiring is ok, switch power on.

Yes
No
Check wiring between N100 and N700 and also

between N600 and N700. If wiring is ok, replace N700
Doc. code 8200629 7 - 63

7. Trouble shooting
If the fuse keeps blowing when the patient positioning

lights are switched on (focal trough keys are pressed or
the mirror is opened) the problem is with the X or Y-
lights (focal trough or TMJ) or the wiring to these lights.
If the fuse keeps blowing when the stepper motors are

operated, for example, for focal trough keys are
pressed, the E-key or R button are pressed or an expo-
sure is taken, N700 of the wiring to this board may be
faulty.

7. Trouble shooting
Fuse F6 on N200
Replace N300 (ZMC). If fuse F6 on N200 (AVS) board
did not blow, check Z-motor wiring. If wiring is ok, re-
place motor. Fuse F 6 on N200 protects N300. Switch
power off. Disconnect connector J303 on N300. Switch
power on and try to drive the unit up and down (press
height adjusting keys one at a time).
If fuse F6 on N200 blows, the problem is with N300. If

the fuse blows when the unit is switched on, the flow
chart below will help you find where the problem is.
Fuse F6 - N200

3. Switch power on.
Fuse F6
Yes Replace N200
blows
No

3. If wiring is ok replace N300.
Doc. code 8200629 7 - 65

7. Trouble shooting
Fuse F1 on N1000
If N1000 is damaged the F1, on N1000 or F1 on N2000
may blow.
Check the FETs on N1000. If shorted, replace N1000. If
the FETs are OK but the fuse keeps blowing, replace
the tubehead.

7. Trouble Shooting
Generator problems
Generator Test Program

A special x-ray generator test program is included in the
unit software.
If there is a problem with the generator during unit start
up or operation an error message will appear on the
display, for example:
The generator test program automatically carries out a
number of tests that can identify what the problem is
Running the generator test program
Open service code 9779, X-ray generator test menu,

and then select option #2 - Exposure sequence test.

#?. 2
Press the E key. A second menu will appear on the

display. Select option #1 - Analyze generator
2 #0.
#1.
Back to upper menu
Analyze generator
#?. 1
Press the E key. A warning message will appear on the

display.
3 Press and hold exposure button until exposure
lights are turned off.
WARNING

audible signal. These indicate that X-rays are being
generated.
Doc. code 8200629 7 - 67

7. Trouble Shooting

test. During the test information will appear on the
display as the X-ray generator is checked.
When the warning lights go out and the signal tone

stops the test is complete.
The results of the X-ray generator test will appear on

the display. If all the tests were successful the X-ray
generator is working properly, example below.
Tube Voltage:__57__60__63__66__70__73__77__81__85
3 kV test passed...
mA control check: passed...
Tube current:__1.0__1.3__1.6__2.0__2.5__3.2__4.0
__5.0__6.4__8.0__10.0__13.0__15.0
mA check passed...
Tube Voltage:__57__60__63__66__70__73__77__81__85
kV check passed.
Generator OK.
WAIT : 270 sec

If the unit does not pass the generator test a generator
error message will appear on the display. The error
messages are described below,
Generator error codes
GE1 "KVFBM error. xxV detected, 0V expected."

The tube voltage feedback signal is not ok.
GE2 "MAFBM error. xxV detected, 1.6V expected."

The tube current feedback signal is not ok.
GE3 "Net voltage is not ok."

The network voltage was too low during the test. Refer
to the Technical specifications.
GE4 "Tube voltage is not ok."
GE5 "Tube voltage error. xxkV measured, xxkV expected."

7. Trouble Shooting
Start of test Possible error messges
TEST 1 GE1 "KVFBM error xxV detected, 0V expected."

Generator off (check feedbacks). GE2 "MAFBM error xxV detected, 1.6V expected."
TEST 2 GE3 "Net voltage is not OK."

Raise tube voltage without filament GE4 "Tube voltage is not OK."
heating. GE5 "Tube voltage error.xxkV measured, xxkV expected"
GE6 "Net voltage is not OK."

TEST 3 GE7 "No tube current."
Tube voltage with filament heating GE8 "Too much tube current."
(filament voltage feedback). GE9 "KVFAIL error. Tube voltage is not OK."
GE10 "Tube voltage error. xxkV measured, xxkV expected.

Tube voltage with filament heating GE12 "Tube current is not OK.
(tube current feedback). GE13 "Tube voltage is not OK"

Raise tube current to its maximum GE15 "Tube voltage error. xxkV measured, xxkV expected"
value when tube voltage is on. GE16 "Tube current error.xxmA measured, xxmA expected"
TEST 5 GE17 "Net voltage is not OK.

Raise tube current to its maximum GE18 "Tube voltage error. xxkV measured, xxkV expected"
vale when tube voltage is on. GE19 "Tube current error.xxmA measured, xxmA expected"
End of test
Doc. code 8200629 7 - 69

7. Trouble Shooting
GE1 1(2)
"KVFBM error. xxV detected, 0V expected."
Check power LEDS on boards on N900, N1000, N1100

and N1400 to see if the boards are receiving power.
Receiving
No Refer to "Power supply problems"
power
Yes
Measure KVFBM (TP19 on N1100) with DMM. Voltage must be under +0.15VDC.
Voltage Check cables between N1100 and N900.

Yes
correct If cables are OK replace N900.
No
Measure KVFB (TP8 on N1400) with DMM. Voltage must be under +0.15VDC.
Voltage Check cables between N1400 and N100.

Yes
correct If cables are OK replace N1100.
No
Measure KVFB (TP1 on N1400) with DMM. Voltage must be under +0.15VDC.
GE1
2 (2)

7. Trouble Shooting
2 (2) GE1

2. Disconnect J1402 from N1400.
Voltage
No 3. Measure KVFB+ resistance across tubehead
correct
(between pins 1 and 3) with a DMM. Resistance
must be 46-49 kohm.
Resistance
No Replace tubehead.
correct
Yes
Yes
Replace N1400.
Measure KVFB- (TP3 on N1400) with DMM. Voltage must be between -0.15 and 0VDC.
Voltage Switch power off.

No
correct Disconnect J1402 from N1400.
Yes
Measure KVFB- resistance across tubehead (between pins 1
and 4) with a DMM. Resistance must be 46-49 kohm.
Replace N1400
Resistance
No Replace tubehead.
correct
Yes
Replace N1400.
Doc. code 8200629 7 - 71

7. Trouble Shooting
GE2 "MAFBM error. xxV detected, 1.6V expected."
Check that boards N900, N1000, N1100 and N1400 are receiving power.
Receiving
No Refer to "Power supply problems"
power
Yes
Measure MAFBM (TP20 on N1100) with DMM.

Voltage must be between +1.5 - 1.7VDC.
Voltage Measure MAFB (TP4 on N1400) with DMM.

No
correct Voltage must be between +1.5 - 1.7VDC.
Voltage Check wiring between N1400 and

Yes
correct N1100.If wiring is ok, replace N1100.
No

Yes 2. Disconnect connector J1402.
3. Measure MAFB resistance in tube head (between pins 1 and 5)
with DMM. Resistance must be between 170 - 190ohm.
Resistance
Replace N1400 Yes No Replace tube head.
correct
Measure MAFBM (TP24 on N900) with DMM. Voltage must be between +1.5 - 1.7VDC.
Check wiring between N1100 - N900.

OK No
If wiring is OK, replace N900.
Yes
Replace N900

7. Trouble Shooting

The line voltage was too low during the test. Refer to
technical specifications
GE7 "No tube current."

The tube voltage and filament heating are on but there
is no tube current.
GE 4/5 A1 (3)
GE4 "Tube voltage not ok."
GE5 "Tube voltage error. xxkV measured, 0V expected."

2. Disable kV monitoring (SW1 on N1100 opened).
3. Disconnect connector J1003.
4. Switch power on.
1. Select service code 9779.

2. Select 2 ("Exposure sequence test").
3. Select 2 ("Tube voltage without current").
D33
on N1000 is No Continues on flow diagram GE4/5 B1 (1)
on
Yes
Press and hold exposure button down and check

that LEDs D19 and D20 on N1000 are on.
LEDS
No Continues on flow diagram GE4/5 C1 (2)
are on
Yes
A2 (3)
Doc. code 8200629 7 - 73

7. Trouble Shooting
A2 (3) GE 4/5
Measure KVREF (TP16 on N1100) with DMM.

Voltage must be between +3.0 - 3.15VDC
Voltage
No Continues on flow diagram GE4/5 D1 (1)
OK
Yes

2. Connect J1003.
3. Measure KVFB+ (TP1 on N1400) with DMM while exposure button is
pressed.Voltage must be between +2.4 - 3.7VDC.
A3 (3)

7. Trouble Shooting
A3 (3) GE4/5
Voltage Check wiring between N1000 and tuhehead and also between
No
OK N1400 and tubehead.If wirings are ok, replace tubehead.
Yes
Measure KVFB- (TP3 on N1400) with DMM while exposure button is pressed.
Voltage must be between -2.4VDC and -3.7VDC.
Voltage Check wiring between N1000 and tuhehead and also between
No
OK N1400 and tubehead.If wirings are ok, replace tubehead.
Yes
Measure KVFB (TP8 on N1400) with DMM while exposure button is pressed.
Voltage
No Replace N1400.
OK
Yes
Measure KVFBM (TP19 on N1100) with DMM while exposure button is

pressed. Voltage must be between +3.0 - 3.15VDC.
Voltage Check wiring between N1400 and N1100.

No
OK If wiring is ok, replace N1100.
Yes

Doc. code 8200629 7 - 75

7. Trouble Shooting
Flow diagram GE4/5

B1 (1)
Check that fuse F1 on N1000 has not blown.
Replace fuse. If fuse blows frequently,

Fuse blown Yes
refer to section "Blown fuses"
No
Check that LED D21 on N1000 is on.
LED on Yes Replace N1100 (N1000 if required)
No

3. Switch power on.

Measure AVC* (TP7 on N900) with DMM.

Voltage must be under +0.5VDC.
Voltage
No Replace N900
OK
Yes

7. Trouble Shooting
Flow diagram GE4/5

C1 (2)
Check that LED D20 on N1100 is on while exposure button is pressed
LED is on Yes Replace N1000
No
Check that exposure button is not locked. If it was, rerun test the program
Measure EXPC* (TP13 on N900) with DMM while exposure button is

pressed. Voltage must be under +0.5VDC.
Measure EXPC2* (TP9 on N900) with a DMM while the exposure

Voltage OK Yes
button is pressed. The voltage must be under +0.5VDC.
No
Measure EXP* (TP36 on N600) with a Voltage OK Yes Replace N900

DMM while the exposure button is pressed.
The voltage must be under +0.5VDC
No
Check wiring between N900 - N1100
Measure EXPC* (TP34 on N600) with a DMM while the exposure

Voltage OK Yes
button is pressed. The voltage must be under +0.5VDC.
No
Voltage OK Yes Replace N600
Check that LED D20 on N800 is on while
exposure button is pressed.
No
Check wiring between N600 - N100 and between N100 - N900

C2 (2)
Doc. code 8200629 7 - 77

7. Trouble Shooting
C2 (2) GE4/5
LED is on Yes Check wiring between N800 - N600

no
No yes
Check N800 operating powers. LEDS D6,

D14, and D18 must be on.
LEDs are on No Refer to section " Power supply problems
Yes

3. Use a DMM to measure the resistance across pins 1 and 2.
The resistance must be zero when the exposure button is pressed.
Resistance
No Replace exposure button.
is zero
Yes

3. Use a DMM to measure the resistance across pins 1 and 2.
The resistance must be zero when the exposure button is pressed.
Resistance
No Replace exposure lock.
is zero
Yes
Replace N800

7. Trouble Shooting
Flow diagram GE4/5

D1 (1)

3. Switch power on.

Measure KVREF (TP27 on N900) with DMM.

KVREF must be between +3.0 - 3.15VDC.
Voltage OK No Replace N900
No

If the wiring is OK. replace N1100
Doc. code 8200629 7 - 79

7. Trouble Shooting

7. Trouble Shooting
GE 7 "No tube current"

A1 (3)
Check that correct x-ray tube type is configured. Sevice code 9420
Check operating powers of boards N900, N1000, N1100 and N1400.

3. Select 3 ("Exposure with filament feedback").
LED
No Continues on flow diagram GE7 B1 (1)
is on
Yes
Press exposure button and check that LED D1 on N1100 is on.
LED
No Continues on flow diagram GE7 C1 (1)
is on
Yes
Check if LED D19 on N1100 is on.
LED
Yes Continues on flow diagram GE7 D1 (1)
is on
No
GE7
A2 (3)
Doc. code 8200629 7 - 81

7. Trouble Shooting
GE7
A2 (3)
No
Measure MAREF (TP17 on N1100) with DMM. Voltage must be between

displayed limits.
MAREF OK No Continues on flow diagram GE7 E1 (1)
Yes
Press exposure button and measure FILFB (TP11 on N1400) with a DMM.
Voltage must be between displayed MAREF limits.
MAREF OK No Continues on flow diagram GE7 F1 (1)
Yes
Press exposure button and measure FILFB (TP10 on N1100) with a DMM.

MAREF OK No
Replace N1100 if needed
Yes
Press exposure button and measure MAFB (TP4 on N1400) with DMM.
MAREF OK No Continues on flow diagram GE7 G1 (1)
Yes
GE7
A3 (3)

7. Trouble Shooting
GE7
A3 (3)
No
Press exposure button and measure MAFBM (TP20 on N1100) with DMM.

MAFBM OK No
Replace N1100 if required.
Yes

Replace N900 if required.
Doc. code 8200629 7 - 83

7. Trouble Shooting
Flow diagram GE7

B1 (1)
Switch power off.
Check if fuse F1 on N1400 is ok.
Fuse Replace fuse.

No
is ok If it blows fequently, refer to section "Blown fuses".
Yes


7. Trouble Shooting
Flow diagram GE7

C1 (1)

3. Switch power on.

Press exposure button and measure HEAT* (TP8 on N900)

with DMM. Voltage must be between 0VDC - +1.0VDC.
Voltage OK No Replace N900.
Yes

Doc. code 8200629 7 - 85

7. Trouble Shooting
Flow diagram GE7

D1 (1)

3. Switch power on.

Measure F/MA* (TP6 on N900) with DMM.

Voltage must be between +4.0VDC - 5.5VDC.
Yes


7. Trouble Shooting
Flow diagram GE7

E1 (1)

3. Switch power on.

Measure MAREF (TP26 on N900) with DMM.

Yes

Doc. code 8200629 7 - 87

7. Trouble Shooting
Flow diagram GE7

F1 (1)

2. Disconnect connector J1402
Measure resistance between tube head pins 6 and 7 and

between pins 6 and 8. Resistances must be under 1 ohm
Resistance OK No Replace tubehead and N1400
Yes
Check wiring between N1400 - tubehead.


7. Trouble Shooting
Flow diagram GE7

G1 (1)

Measure resistance between tube head pins 1 and 5 with

DMM. Resistance must be between 170 - 190 ohm
Resistance OK No Replace tubehead
Yes
Measure resistance between tube head pins 6 and 7 and

between pins 6 and 8. Resistances must be under 1ohm
Resistance OK No Replace tubehead and N1400
Yes
Check wiring between N1400 - tube head.

If wiring is ok, replace tube head
Doc. code 8200629 7 - 89

7. Trouble Shooting
GE8 "Too much tube current."

Tube current too high.
GE 8 "Too much tube current"

A1 (3)
Check that correct x-ray tube type is configured. Sevice code 9420
Check operating powers of boards N900, N1000, N1100 and N1400.

3. Select 4 ("X-ray tube filament heating").
Measure MAREF (TP17 on N1100) with DMM.

Voltage must be between displayed limits
Voltage OK No Continues on flow diagram GE8 B1 (1)
Yes
Measure MAFB (TP4 on N1400) with DMM.

GE8
A2 (3)

7. Trouble Shooting
GE8
A2 (3)
Voltage OK No Continues on flow diagram GE8 C1 (1)
Yes
Measure MAFB (TP4 on N1400) with DMM.

LED
No Continues on flow diagram GE8 D1 (1)
is on
Yes
GE8
A3 (3)
Doc. code 8200629 7 - 91

7. Trouble Shooting
GE8
A3 (3)
Yes
LED
D19 on 1100 Yes
is on
No

Press exposure button and measure MAFB (TP4 on N1400) with

DMM. Voltage must be between +1.5 - 3.3VDC.
Voltage OK No Continues on flow diagram GE8 E1 (1)
Yes
Measure MAFBM (TP20 on N1100) with DMM.


Voltage OK No
Yes


7. Trouble Shooting
Flow diagram
B1 (1)
MAFB is Check wiring between N1400 - N1100.

No
< +1.5VDC If wiring is ok, replace N1400.
Yes
Replace N1100.
Doc. code 8200629 7 - 93

7. Trouble Shooting
Flow diagram
C1 (1)

Measure MAFB+ resistance between

tube head pins 1 and 5. Resistances
must be between 170 - 190W.
OK No Replace tube head
Yes
Check wiring between N1400 - tube

head. If wiring is ok, replace N1400

7. Trouble Shooting
Flow diagram
D1 (1)
Measure FILFB (TP11 on N1400) with

DMM. Voltage must be between
displayed MAREF limits.
OK No Replace N1400
Yes

Doc. code 8200629 7 - 95

7. Trouble Shooting
GE9 "KVFAIL error. Tube voltage is not ok."

KVFAIL* signal active. The line voltage is not within its
limits.
Replace tube head.
Flow diagram
E 1 (1)

3. Switch power on

3. Select 4 ("X-ray tube filament heating").
Measure MAREF (TP26 on N900) with

DMM. Voltage must be between displayed
limits
OK No Replace N900
Yes


7. Trouble Shooting

The tube voltage is not within its limits.
Replace tube head.

Net voltage is detected to be too low during test. See
power requirements in Cranex TOME Service manual
section "Technical specifications".
GE12 "Tube current is not ok."

The tube current is not within its limits.
GE13 "Tube voltage is not ok."

The tube voltage is not within its limits.
Replace tube head.
Doc. code 8200629 7 - 97

7. Trouble Shooting

section "Technical specifications". Refer to GE 4/5.
GE12
Check operating powers of boards N900,

N1000, N1100 and N1400

3. Select 5 ("Filament feedback selection").
Check that LED D19 on N1100 is on
OK Yes Replace N1100
No

2. Disconnect connector J904 from N1100
3. Switch power on.

3. Select 5 ("Filament feedback selection").
Measure F/MA*(TP6 on N900) with DMM.

OK No Replace N900
Yes


7. Trouble Shooting

Check that correct x-ray tube type is configured.
See service code 9420. Refer to GE 4/5.
GE16 "Tube current error. xxmA measured, xxmA expected."

See service code 9420. Refer to GE 12.

section "Technical specifications".

See service code 9420. Refer to GE 4/5.
GE19 "Tube current error. xxmA measured, xxmA expected."

See service code 9420. Refer to GE 2.
Doc. code 8200629 7 - 99

7. Trouble Shooting

8. Mechanical Parts Contents
8. Mechanical Parts
Contents
Replacing the tube head .................................................................................... 8-1
Removing the tube head .................................................................................. 8-1
Installing a new tube head ................................................................................ 8-4
Doc. code 8200629 8-i

Contents 8. Mechanical Parts

8. Mechanical Parts
Replacing the tube head
Removing the tube head

1. Remove the tube head cover. See section 3 - Cov-
ers and cover removal.
2. Slide the collimator assembly out of the collimator

holder. Disconnect cables from connectors J1404,
J1402, J1401 on the N1400 board. If the unit is a
pan/ceph also disconnect J1403.
J1402 J1401
J1404
J1403
N1400 (Optional - Pan/ceph units only)
Collimator assembly
Collimator holder
Doc. code 8200629 8-1

8. Mechanical Parts
3. Remove the N1400 board. Disconnect the red

connector that connects the power cable that runs
from the C-arm to the tube head. Also disconnect
the tube head ground lead. It is screwed to the C-
arm frame.
Power cable Red connector
C-arm frame
Tube head ground lead
N1400
4. From the under side of the tube head assembly,

remove the two screws that hold the tube head
support clips to the rear cover.
Tube head support clips
Tube head
Rear cover

8. Mechanical Parts
5. Remove the four screws that hold the tube head in

position and then remove the tube head.
Tube head
6. Remove the collimator holder, the ground lead and

the support clips from the tube head.
Ground lead
Tube
Collimator holder head
Support clips
Doc. code 8200629 8-3

8. Mechanical Parts
Installing a new tube head

1. Attach the collimator holder, the ground lead and
the support clips to the new tube head.
2. Instal the new tube head by following, in the reverse

order, the instructions for removing the tube head.
3. If the new tube head is a different type than the

existing one, the new tube type must be pro-
grammed into the unit memory. Refer to service
code 9420.
4. Check and if necessary adjust the beam alignment

of the unit. Refer to the "Installation and set-up
manual".

9. Annual Service Contents
9. Annual Service
Contents
Annual tests and inspections ............................................................................ 9-1
mA test .............................................................................................................. 9-1
kV test ............................................................................................................... 9-1
Exposure time test ............................................................................................ 9-2
Motor Movement ............................................................................................... 9-2
Position Detectors ............................................................................................ 9-3
Cassette Sensors ............................................................................................. 9-3
Panoramic Alignment ....................................................................................... 9-4
Cephalometric Alignment ................................................................................. 9-4
Soft Filter Alignment ......................................................................................... 9-4
Patient Positioning Lights ................................................................................. 9-4
Covers and Labels............................................................................................ 9-4
Doc. code 8200629 9-i

Contents 9. Annual Service

9. Annual Service
Annual tests and inspections

The following inspections and tests must be carried out
annually by an authorized service person to verify that
the Cranex Tome X-ray unit meets the specifications
and performance criteria essential for correct operation.
When taking measurements that require a multimeter,
always use a calibrated digital multimeter (DMM).
mA test
Protect yourself from radiation when carrying out this
test.
Connect the +probe of a DMM to test pin TP24 and the
-probe to TP18, 29, 42 or 43.
Select service code 9779 option #1.
Select different mA values, listed below, take exposures

using these values and check the feedback values from
the DMM. The feedback values must be within the
tolerances shown.
Selected mA mAfb1 (V) Tolerance (V)

1 1.79 ±0.02
3.2 2.15 ±0.06
10 3.24 ±0.16
If the values are not with the recommended tolerances,

there may be a problem with the N1000 and/or N1100.
kV test
test.
Connect the +probe of a DMM to test pin TP25 and the
-probe to TP18, 29, 42 or 43.
Select service code 9779 option #1.
Select different kV values, listed below, take exposures

using these values and check the feedback values from
the DMM. The feedback values must be within the
tolerances shown.
Doc. code 8200629 9-1

9. Annual Service
Selected kV kVfb1 (V) Tolerance (V)

57 3.08 ±0.05
70 3.76 ±0.05
85 4.55 ±0.05
If the values are not with the recommended tolerances,

there may be a problem with the N1000 and/or N1100.
Exposure time test

test.
Set the unit up to take any cephalometric program.
Connect the +probe of a storage oscilloscope to test pin

TP25 and the -probe to TP18, 29, 42 or 43.
Select different exposure times, listed below, take expo-

sures using these times and, using the oscilloscope,
check that the times are within the tolerances shown.
Time selected Tolerance

0.32 sec. ±0.03 sec.
1 sec. ±0.08 sec.
3.3 sec. ±0.26 sec.
Motor Movements
Switch the unit off and then manually check that all the
stepper motors move freely and without any looseness:
– rotate the C-arm to check the R-motor
– push the rotating unit in and out to check the Y-

motor
– push the rotating unit from side to side to check the

x-motor
– push the tubehead up and down to check the V-

motor
– push the cassette carriage in and out to check the

C-motor
Also take various exposures, with x-rays turned off, to
check that the motors operate smoothly and without
any noise. Press the up/down keys to check the Z-
motor.

9. Annual Service
Position Detectors
Cassette Shield Microswitches
Select panoramic program 001. Make sure that the
program is ready when the cassette shields are closed.
Select tomography program 381. Make sure that the
program is ready when the cassette shields are open.
Chin rest Microswitches

program is ready when the chin rest is in the upper
position. Select a tomography program 331, the upper
jaw. Make sure that the program is ready when the chin
rest is in the lower position.
Cassette Head Microswitches

program is ready when the cassette head is in the
normal pan position.
Select cephalometric program 023. Make sure that the
program is ready when the cassette head is in the ceph
position.
Z-Move Sensors
Press the up key and drive the unit slowly up. Make
sure that the unit stops moving at its uppermost posi-
tion.
Press the down key and drive the unit slowly down.
Make sure that the unit stops moving at its lowermost
position.
Cassette Sensors
Panoramic
Select the pan program 001. Insert a pan cassette into
the cassette carriage. Make sure that exposure is
ready when the cassette is cassette. Also that pano-
ramic cassette sensitivity detection functions correctly.
The sensitivity number (SN) will appear briefly on the
display when a cassette is inserted.
Cephalometric
Select the a ceph program and then insert the correct
cassette in the correct orientation for that program.
Make sure that the exposure is ready when the cas-
sette is inserted. Repeat this test with all cassette sizes
used.
Doc. code 8200629 9-3

9. Annual Service
Panoramic Alignment
Take a panoramic exposure (001) with the lowest kV.
Develop the film. Make sure that the exposed area on
the film does not extend beyond any of the edges of
film.
If it does the unit will have to be realigned.
Refer to the installation manual for information on how
to do this.
Cephalometric Alignment
Take a cephalometric exposure with the lowest kV and
shortest exposure time. Develop the film. Make sure
that the exposed area on the film does not extend
beyond any of the edges of film.
If it does the unit will have to be realigned.
to do this.
Repeat this test with all the different ceph cassettes.
Soft Filter Alignment

Set the unit up to take any AH or AV ceph program.
Turn soft tissue filter knob to the middle position, three
lights on. Tape a coin on the cassette roughly where the
filter line lies. Take an exposure and process the film.
Check that the filter edge coincides with the image of
the coin on the film. The accuracy is ±5mm. If the filter
is not correctly positioned it will have to be adjusted.
to do this.
Also make sure that the soft tissue filter lights do not
operate when the unit is in the pan position.
Patient Positioning Lights

Use the ball phantom to check the operation and align-
ment of the patient positioning lights. Refer to installa-
tion manual for information on how to do this.
Covers and Labels

Check that all covers are correctly installed and in good
condition. Also check that all the labels are attached to
the unit and that they are all legible.

Appendix A. Technical Specifications
Technical Specifications
Type
SRC-1
Classification
Complies with IEC 601-1, IEC 601-2-7, IEC 601-2-28, IEC 601-2-32, IEC 878,
UL 2601-1 (for products with UL Classification Mark) and EN 55011 standards.
Complies with DHHS Radiation Performance Standard, 21CFR Subchapter J.
Safety according to IEC 601-1
Protection against electric shock - Class I
Degree of protection - Type B applied parts with no conductive connection to
patient
Protection against ingress of liquids - IPX 0
Disinfection methods:
- mild soapy water
- non-alcohol based disinfectant for the chin rest
- disposable plastic covers for bite piece/chin support
For use in environments where no flammable anaesthetics and/or flammable
cleaning agents are present.
Mode of operation - continuous operation/intermittent loading
Description
A dental panoramic/cephalometric unit with a high frequency switching mode x-ray
generator. In addition to panoramic exposures, the unit can also take tomograms
and scanograms. An optional cephalometric device is available that uses the
panoramic x-ray source. The unit must be permanently installed and shall comply
with National Electric Codes.
Generator
High-frequency DC, operating frequency modulated 60-110 kHz.
TUBE
- OPX/105, DE 100/15 or D-051, XL 90
FOCAL SPOT
- 0,5 IEC 336 for tubes OPX/105, DE 100/15 and D-051
- 0,4 IEC 336 for tube XL90
TARGET ANGLE
- 5º
TARGET MATERIAL
- Tungsten
OPERATING TUBE POTENTIAL
- Panoramic 57 - 81 kV (±1 kV)
- Cephalometric 60 - 85 kV (±1 kV)
- Maximum (nominal) 85 kV, 10 mA
OPERATING TUBE CURRENT
- 1 mA to 10 mA (average values, peak value 15 mA maximum)
- maximum 10 mA at 85 kV
Doc. code 8200629 A-1

MAXIMUM OUTPUT POWER

- 850 W nominal at 85 kV, 10 mA
REFERENCE CURRENT TIME PRODUCT
- 3.2 mAs at 60 kV, 10 mA, 0.32 s
FILTRATION
- Inherent filtration minimum 2.5 mm Al at 70 kV
- Total filtration (Pan, scano, ceph and TMJ scano) minimum 2.7 mm Al at
70 kV
- Additional tomo aperture 3 filtration: minimum 3.0 mm Al at 47 kV
(Material 0.4 mm Cd2O2S:Tb)
- Additional tomo aperture 4 filtration: minimum 8.4 mm Al at 47 kV
- Patient support attenuation equivalent: less than 0.2 mm Al
BEAM QUALITY
- HVL (Pan, scano, ceph and TMJ scano) minimum 3.1 mm Al at 70 kV
- HVL, tomo aperture 3, minimum 2.1 mm Al at 47 kV
- HVL, tomo aperture 4, minimum 3.2 mm Al at 47 kV
PRIMARY PROTECTIVE SHIELDING
- Minimum 0.5 mm Pb or equivalent
OUTER SHELL TEMPERATURE
- +50ºC (122ºF) maximum
DUTY CYCLE
- Panoramic: 1:15, 81 kV/10mA
- Cephalometric: 1:15, 85 kV/10mA
Power requirements
INPUT VOLTAGE
- 115/220-240 VAC (±10%), 50/60 Hz single phase, permanently installed
LINE CURRENT
- Long-time: 115/220-240 VAC, 1A (cont.)
- Momentary: 115/220-240 VAC, 16A /8A, 60/50hz
MAXIMUM LINE RESISTANCE
- 1 ohm
MAXIMUM LINE FUSING
- 10 A slow (main fuse 8A slow in device) @ 220-240 VAC
- 25 A slow (main fuse 16A slow in device) @ 115 VAC
LINE SAFETY SWITCH (when required)
- Approved type, min. 10 A 250 VAC
EARTH LEAKAGE CIRCUIT BREAKER (when required)
- Approved type, min. 16 A 250 VAC, breaker activation leakage current in
accordance with local regulations.
A -2 Cranex Tome Service Manual

Mechanical parameters
PANORAMIC
- SID 560 mm (±20 mm)
- Magnification factor from 1.25 to 1.5
CEPHALOMETRIC
- SID 1632 - 1707mm
- SOD (Source object distance) 1497
- Magnification factor from 1.09 to 1.14
WEIGHT
- Pan 150 kg
- Pan/Ceph 160 kg
DIMENSIONS
- Pan (HxWxD) 2405 x 1000 x 1480 mm (90" x 40" x 58")
- Pan/Ceph (HxWxD) 2405 x 1868 x 1480 mm (90" x 74" x 58")
VERTICAL HEIGHT OF CHIN REST
- 984-1774 mm (39"-70")
Cassettes
PANORAMIC
- 15 x 30 cm (6" x 12")
CEPHALOMETRIC
- 18 x 24 cm, 24 x 30 cm, and 8" x 10"
Recommended film/screen combinations

CASS1
- Kodak T-MAT G/RA 15 - Kodak Lanex MEDIUM
CASS2
- Kodak T-MAT G/RA 15 - Kodak Lanex FINE
CASS3
- Kodak T-MAT G/RA 15 - Kodak Lanex FINE
Timer
PANORAMIC EXPOSURE TIMES:
- Panoramic 11 - 24 sec
- Scanograms 6 - 24 sec
- Tomograms 14 - 56 sec
- Cephalometric 0.32 - 3.2 sec
Leakage technique factors

PANORAMIC
- 81 kV, 2400 mAs/h (81 kV, 10 mA, duty cycle 1:15, for example normal
exposure per 4 minutes cool-down period)
CEPHALOMETRIC
- 85 kV, 2250 mAs/h (85 kV, 10 mA, duty cycle 1:16, for example 3.2 s expo
sure per 1 minute cool-down period)
Doc. code 8200629 A-3

Measurement bases
- The kV is measured by monitoring differentially the current flowing through
450 Mohm, 1% feedback resistors connected between the tube anode/
cathode and ground.
- The mA is measured by monitoring current in the HT return line, which
equals the tube current.
Tube housing assembly cooling characteristics
Collimator
Six collimators are available:
- Standard metric, left and right-hand versions
It includes: adult panoramic slit, child panoramic slit, two tomography
apertures, 18 x 24 cm AV aperture, 18 x 24 cm AH aperture, 18 x 24 cm
SV aperture, and a 24 x 30 cm AV aperture.
- Large metric, left and right-hand versions
apertures, 24 x 30 cm SV aperture, 24 x 30 cm AV aperture, and a
24 x 30 cm AH aperture.
- Inch size, left and right-hand versions
apertures, 8 x 10 in AV aperture, 8 x 10 in SV aperture, and a 8 x 10 in
AH aperture.

Environmental data
Operating
- ambienttemperature from +10º to +40ºC
- relative humidity 20 to 90% no condensation
Storage/transportation
- ambient temperature from -25º to +50ºC
- relative humidity 5 to 90% no condensation
- atmospheric pressure 500 - 1080 mbar
Interface
RS-232C type interface. See section "Warnings and precautions".
Doc. code 8200629 A-5

Tube rating chart Anode thermal characteristics
OPX/105
Tube rating chart Anode thermal characteristic
XL-90

DE 100/15 ö and DOA 100
D-051
Doc. code 8200629 A-7

Unit dimensions

Doc. code 8200629 A-9


Appendix B:
CRANEX TOME
Installation and
set-up manual
Medical Device Directive

93/42/EEC
August 2005
Cranex Tome Installation and Setup Manual

Document code 5149547
Original approved English-language version
Manufactured by SOREDEX
P.O. BOX 148
04301 TUUSULA, FINLAND
Tel. +358 45 7228 2500
Fax. +358 9 701 5261
I
Soredex endeavours to produce product documentation that is accurate
and up to date. However, our policy of continual product development
may result in changes to products that are not reflected in the product
documentation. Therefore, this document should not be regarded as an
infallible guide to current product specifications. Soredex maintains the
right to make changes and alterations without prior notice.
II
Contents
1. Introduction ............................................................ 1
Scope of this document ....................................................................................... 1
General ................................................................................................................ 1
Warnings and precautions ................................................................................... 1
Associated documents ........................................................................................ 1
Identifying the unit version ................................................................................... 2
Pre-installation requirements ............................................................................... 3
Main parts - Panoramic unit ................................................................................ 4
Main parts - Cephalometric unit .......................................................................... 5
Space requirements............................................................................................. 6
Space requirements – Pan unit ..................................................................... 7
Space requirements – Pan/Ceph unit ........................................................... 8
Installation tools, setup tools, and installation hardware ..................................... 9
Hardware ....................................................................................................... 9
Standard tools ................................................................................................ 9
Special tools .................................................................................................. 9
2. Installing the unit.................................................. 11
Checking the serial number ................................................................................ 11
Fixing the column to the floor .............................................................................. 12
Option - Installing the Cephalometric arm ........................................................... 17
Securing the column to the wall ........................................................................... 19
Installing the C-arm ............................................................................................. 20
Installing the Cephalometric unit ......................................................................... 24
Connecting the unit to a power supply ................................................................ 25
Connecting the unit to a power supply .......................................................... 25
USA only/UL approved units ..................................................................... 25
Installing the collimator assembly ........................................................................ 27
Levelling the unit ................................................................................................. 28
Changing the maximum height of the unit ........................................................... 29
Installing a remote exposure warning light ........................................................... 30
Installing options ................................................................................................. 31
PC and interface cable ................................................................................. 31
Switching the unit on ........................................................................................... 32
III
3. Checking the alignment of the unit .................... 33
Overview of the alignment checking procedure ................................................... 34
The horizontal position of the C-arm ................................................................... 39
Checking that the C-arm is horizontal ........................................................... 39
Levelling the C-arm ...................................................................................... 40
The height of the aperture plate .......................................................................... 41
Checking the height of the aperture plate ..................................................... 41
Adjusting the height of the aperture plate ...................................................... 44
The centre of rotation of the beam ...................................................................... 45
Checking the centre of rotation of the beam ................................................. 45
Adjusting the centre of rotation of the beam .................................................. 47
The position of the secondary slit........................................................................ 49
Checking the position of the secondary slit ................................................... 49
Aligning the secondary slit ............................................................................ 51
The patient in/out rotation (PIO) position ............................................................. 53
Checking that the patient in/out (PIO) position is correct ............................... 53
Adjusting the patient in/out (PIO) position ..................................................... 55
The position of the rotating unit in the X and Y directions .................................... 57
Checking the position of the rotating unit ...................................................... 57
Adjusting the position of the rotating unit ...................................................... 58
The position of the rotating unit axis .................................................................... 60
Checking the position of the rotating unit axis ............................................... 61
Adjusting the position of the tube head ......................................................... 63
Ball/pin phantom test .......................................................................................... 64
Positioning lights ................................................................................................ 65
Checking the position patient positioning lights ............................................ 65
Adjusting the patient positioning lights .......................................................... 66
Midsagittal light ......................................................................................... 66
Focal trough light and TMJ light ............................................................... 67
Frankfort light ............................................................................................ 68
Optional task ................................................................................................ 68
IV
4. Aligning the cephalostat (optional) .................... 69
Beam alignment ................................................................................................. 69
Checking the horizontal (y-axis) position of the ceph unit .............................. 69
Adjusting the position of the beam horizontally (y-axis) ................................. 71
Repositioning the Ceph head ................................................................... 71
Rotating the C-arm .................................................................................... 73
Adjusting the position of the beam vertically (x-axis, vertical offset) ............... 75
The position of the ear posts .............................................................................. 80
Checking the position of the ear posts.......................................................... 80
Adjusting the position of the ear posts .......................................................... 81
Horizontal direction ................................................................................... 81
Vertical direction ....................................................................................... 82
Checking and adjusting the soft tissue filter ........................................................ 83
Checking/adjusting the minimum filtration position ....................................... 83
Checking/adjusting the maximum filtration position ...................................... 85
Storing the filter positions in the memory ...................................................... 86
5. Setting the unit up for the user .......................... 87

Setting the user display language and the time ................................................... 87
Cassette identification ........................................................................................ 91
Cassette identification stickers .................................................................... 91
Applying the cassette identification stickers ................................................. 91
The film/screen sensitivity number (S/N) ....................................................... 92
Determining the film/screen sensitivity number (S/N) .................................... 92
6. Symbols, markings that appear on the unit ....... 99

Symbols that appear on the aperture labels ...................................................... 101
Standard metric version .......................................................................... 101
Large metric version ............................................................................... 102
Inch version ............................................................................................. 102
7. Technical specifications .................................... 103
V
VI
1. Introduction
1. Introduction
Scope of this document

These instructions explain how to install and setup
all versions of the X-ray unit.
General
You will need to operate the unit during the setup
procedure. Make sure that you know how to oper-
ate the unit before starting the set up procedure.
Warnings and precautions

VERY IMPORTANT
All pan and ceph units are factory set to operated
using either a 115 VAC or 230 VAC power supply.
When installing the unit always observe local and

national safety regulation concerning the installa-
tion and use of dental x-ray equipment.
Failure to install the unit in an approved location

may be dangerous to both patient and operator.
Do not install the unit in environments where there

are corrosive or explosive vapours.
When checking the alignment of the radiation

beam take the necessary steps to protect yourself
from the radiation.
The aperture plate in the collimator is made of

lead (Pb) which is a toxic material. Do not touch it
with your bare hands.
Associated documents
The user's manual.
The service manual.
Installation and set-up manual 1

1. Introduction

The unit type label is located at the rear of the unit
next to the main power cable. The type code
allows the version of the unit to be identified.
SRC1 1 2 3 - 4 5 6

00 General (English)
01 UK only
02 Germany
03 USA
04 Australia
05 France
07 Russia
08 Italy
09 Spain
10 Portugal
2X OEM version
3X OEM version
X-ray tube version

0 OPX/105
1 DE 100/15ö
2 D-051
3 XL 90

1 Left-hand ceph - standard metric cassettes
2 Left-hand ceph - large metric cassettes
3 Left-hand ceph - inch size cassettes
4 Right-hand ceph - standard metric cassettes
5 Right-hand ceph - large metric cassettes
6 Right-hand ceph - inch size cassettes

0 Pilot production version
1 1st production version
2 2nd production version
etc.
2 Installation and set-up manual

1. Introduction
Pre-installation requirements
The room in which the unit is to be installed and
the position from where the user will take expo-
sures must be correctly shielded from the radia-
tion that is generated when the unit is operated.
Since radiation safety requirements vary from
country to country and state to state it is the re-
sponsibility of the installer to ensure that all safety
regulations are met.
The unit is supplied partially assembled in two

boxes, a large one and a small one. The large box
contains the column, and the small box the C-arm.
The sizes of the boxes are as follows:
Length Width Height

Large box 173 cm 72 cm 117 cm
(Column) (68 in) (28.5 in) (46 in)
Small box 94 cm 80 cm 81 cm
(C-arm) (37 in) (31.5 in) (32 in)
The installed unit weighs 150 kg (330 lb).

Make sure that the floor in the room where the
unit is to be used can support the weight
WARNING of the unit.
Also make sure that the wall to which the unit
is attached and the fixing hardware used to
attach the unit to the wall can withstand a
continuous pull-out force of 300 kg (660 lb).
If the unit is not used with the show stand (part

no.9801755) the unit MUST be attached to the
wall and floor. Use 8 mm (5/16 in) diameter fixing
hardware to secure the unit to the wall. The type
and length of hardware must be suitable for the
wall to which the unit will be fixed.
Note that if the wall is made of thin material, you
may have to use a reinforcing backing plate on the
rear of the wall to hold the securing screws, bolts
or nuts.

1. Introduction
Main parts – Panoramic unit
Support arm Head support
Sliding assembly
Rotating
assembly
C-arm
Rotating
unit
C-arm
assembly
Tube head assembly
Cassette
carriage Cassette head
assembly
Cassette
head
Patient support assembly

Control panel
Moving column
Fixed column

1. Introduction
Main parts – Cephalometric unit
Ceph arm
Z-carriage
Ceph head
support Ceph unit
Cassette holder

1. Introduction
Space requirements
The dimensions of the X-ray unit are shown in the
following diagrams. When installing the unit, leave
sufficient space at the front and sides of the unit to
allow patient entry and exit. Patients using wheel-
chairs will require more space around the cephalo-
metric unit than standing patients.
Note that units with the ceph mounted on the left-
hand side require more space than units with the
ceph mounted on the right-hand side.
NOTE
The maximum height that the unit can be driven to
is 2410 mm (95"). If the ceiling in the room where
the unit is to be installed is lower than this, there is
a danger that the unit will hit the ceiling if it is
driven up too far.
In this situation the maximum height to which the
unit can be driven must be reduced. This is done
by changing the position of one of the top/bottom
sensors.
The height can be reduced by either 125 mm (5
in), this gives a maximum height of 2285 mm (90
in) or 250 mm (10 in), which gives a maximum
height of 2180 mm (85 in). For information on how
to do this see the section, "Changing the maxi-
mum height of the unit".

1. Introduction
Space requirements – Pan unit
Note
The maximum height
can be changed to
either 2285 mm (90
in) or 2180 mm (85 in)

1. Introduction
Space requirements – Pan/Ceph unit
Left-hand ceph Right-hand ceph
Note
The maximum height
can be changed to
either 2285 mm (90
in) or 2180 mm (85 in)

1. Introduction
Installation tools, setup tools, and installation hardware

The following tools and hardware are required to
install and setup the unit.
NOTE: THESE ARE NOT INCLUDED IN THE
DELIVERY OF THE UNIT, UNLESS OTHERWISE
STATED.
Hardware
Mounting hardware for installing the wall
bracket(s) and floor bracket.
Standard tools
- Electric drill
- Spanners (wrenches) to fit the following metric
size screws/nuts M4, M5, M6, M8, M10
- Allen keys (Hexagon socket wrenches) to fit
allen screws from M1.5 to M8
- Flat blade and Philips screwdrivers
- Spirit level
- Pliers and wire cutters
- Scissors
Cephalometric units only

- Socket for M8 nut and extension
(for installing the ceph arm)
Special tools
Panoramic units:
- Panoramic beam alignment tool
i) part no.6902910 for units up to s/n X90327,
and again from X52001–
ii) part no.6903650 for unit s/n X90328–X52000
- Ball/pin phantom, part no.6902930
- Mesh phantom, part no.6902940
- Brass radiation filter (included)
- Levelling bar, part no.6408430
- Centring tool, part no.6902920
Addition tools for pan units with cephalostat

Old version with Cephalostat beam alignment tools:
straight filter only - metric version, L and R, part no.6902960
- inch version, L and R, part no.6902980
- old metric version L-H only, part no.6902970
- old inch version L-H only, part no.6902990
- Soft tissue filter alignment tool, part no.6902950

1. Introduction

2. Installation
2. Installing the unit
Checking the serial number

The unit is supplied, partially assembled, in two
boxes, a large one and a small one. The large
box, 173 x 72 x 117 cm, (68 x 28.5 x 46 in) con-
tains the column, the accessory box and, if the
unit is a pan/ceph, the cephalometric unit. The
small box, 94 x 80 x 81 cm, (37 x 31.5 x 32 in)
contains the C-arm.
Before installing the unit make sure that the serial
numbers on the two boxes are the same. DO NOT
install the unit if the serial numbers are different.
Large box
Small box
Box number
Serial number

Fixing the column to the floor

NOTE
Keep all the packaging materials as they will be
required if you move the unit to a new location.
1. Transport the two boxes to the room where the

unit is to be installed.
2. Remove the top and then the end of the box

next to the accessory box from the large box.
Remove the two support beams that hold the
accessory box in position, and then lift out the
accessory box.
Top
Support beams
Accessory
box
End
Remove all the remaining support beams and

box sides.

2. Installation
3. Remove the floor bracket, the wall bracket, the

wall bar, the bag of screws and, if the unit is a
pan/ceph, the ceph arm from the wooden
pallet.
Remove the packing materials and the protec-
tive plastic from the column.
KEEP the four corner packing pieces as they
will be needed to protect the column when it is
attached to the wall.
Floor bracket
Ceph arm
(optional)
Corner packing
pieces
Wall bar
Accessory
Wall bracket Pallet box
4. Place the floor bracket on the floor where the

unit is to be used and position it so that the
144 mm rear of the bracket is 144 mm (5 13/16 in) from
(5 13/16 in) the wall. Make sure that the bracket is parallel
to the wall.
Minimum distance to wall:

- Pan 385 mm (15 3/16 in)
- R-H ceph 1220 mm (48 1/16 in)
Floor bracket
Distance to wall:
- minimum, Pan 600 mm (23 5/8 in) L-H ceph 1260 mm (49 11/16 in)
- recommended Pan 800 mm (31 1/2 in)

NOTE
If the floor bracket cannot be fixed to the floor,
attach the wall bracket to the lower two holes
in the floor bracket and then attach the wall
bracket to the wall in the position required.
M10 x 16
Wall bracket
Floor bracket
5. If you are fixing the floor bracket to the floor,

use the adjusting slots in the floor bracket as a
template to mark the positions of the two fixing
holes. Position the holes in the centre of the
slots so that the floor bracket can be moved
backwards and forwards, if required, when the
X-ray unit is levelled.
Adjusting
slots
6. Remove the floor bracket and then drill two

holes for the screws that are to be used to
secure the floor bracket to the floor or wall.
7. Secure the floor bracket to the floor (or wall). If

the floor is uneven or not level you may have
to place packing pieces, thin pieces of metal or
wood, under the bracket to level it.

2. Installation
8. Place the four corner packing pieces on the

floor, stacked in pairs, by the side of the pallet.
Four packing pieces

- stacked in pairs
9. Lift the column off the pallet, turn it over and

place it on the floor so that the front of the
support arm rests on the four packing pieces,
and the support block at the base of the col-
umn rests on the ground.
Front of the
support arm
Support block
Four packing pieces

10. Slide the column towards the floor bracket until

it touches it. Remove the two screws that hold
the hinge plate in position. Swing the hinge
plate up until it touches the base of the col-
umn. Place the two M10 securing screws
through the hinge plate into the holes in the
base of the column at the rear. Note that you
may have to lift the base of the column slightly
to get the screws in. Tighten the screws.
Hinge plate M 10 securing screws
Screw Base of
column
Support block
Floor bracket
11. Screw the short threaded end of the two

spacers into the holding bar at the rear of the
column. Place a nut and washer on each
Wall bar spacer, and then attach the wall bar to the
spacers with the other two nuts and washers.
Centre the wall bar.
Nuts and washers
Spacers
Holding bar

2. Installation
12. Remove the top column from the unit. It is held

in place with twelve screws, ten on top and two
at the back.
Top cover
Z-carriage
Option - Installing the cephalometric arm

If you are installing a pan/ceph Tome, the ceph
arm must now be installed.
1. Check that the ceph arm is correct for the

ceph, left or right, you are installing. To do this
position the ceph arm horizontally so that the
ceph cable at one end comes out from the top
of the arm and the angled plate at the other
end faces you. Note that the ceph arm is the
same for both left- and right-hand versions of
the ceph. The only differences between the
two versions are the side from which the ceph
cable exits, and the positions of the two stop
screws.
Ceph cable
Left-hand ceph arm
Right-hand ceph arm

2. Position the ceph arm so that the ceph cable

exits towards the top of the column, and then
Nuts slide the arm on to the four fixing studs at the
rear of the column. Make sure that the two
Ceph arm positioning pins in the ceph arm go into the
positioning holes at the rear of the column.
Ceph cable Secure the arm in position with four nuts.
Fixing studs
Positioning holes
3. Connect the ceph cable to connector J7 that is

at the end of the cable that comes the N100
board. (the board is at the front of the support
arm). Secure the ceph cable in position with
the ceph cable cover.
Ceph cable cover
Connector J7
Ceph cable
Support arm

2. Installation
Securing the column to the wall

1. Lift the column up until the wall bar touches
Fixing holes the wall. Mark on the wall the positions of the
two fixing holes in the wall bar.
Wall bar
2. Lower the column back to the floor and then

drill two holes for the screws that are to be
used to secure the column to the wall.
3. Swing the unit up to the wall again and attach

the wall bar to the wall. Replace the two
screws in the floor bracket and remove the
support block from the base of the column.

Installing the C-arm

1. Remove the top from the small box and then
remove the head support and cover from the
support beam.
Parts attached to support beam
2. Remove the support beam and the four sides

of the box. Remove the protective plastic
cover from the C-arm, but do NOT remove the
wrapping film.
N.B. Do not remove the wrapping film

2. Installation
3. Lift the C-arm so that the sliding assembly is

horizontal, and the y-movement stepper motor
is towards the support arm.
Support arm
Stepper motor
Sliding assembly
4. Slide the sliding assembly into the support

arm.
Secure the sliding assembly in position with
four M6 screws. The two nearest the column
M6 x 40mm are M6 x 40, and the two at the front of the
unit are M6 x 12.
M6 x 12mm

5. Route cables marked J101, J102 and J103

(coming from the N200 board) through the
brace plate and connect them to J101, J102
and J103 on the N100 board.
Connect cables marked J107, J108, J109,
J114 and J115 (they come from the column) to
connectors J107, J108, J109, J114 and J115
on the N100 board.
Route cable marked J203 (it comes from the
C-arm) through the brace plate to connector
J203 on the N200 board.
Connect the green/yellow ground lead (it
comes from the C-arm) to the ground point on
the brace plate.

2. Installation
5. Remove the protective wrapping film from the

C-arm.
Remove the lower cover from the head sup-
port. It is held in place with two screws. Attach
the upper half of the head support to the short
shaft on the underside of the C-arm with the
M8 x 60 screw.
Do not tighten the screw yet as the position
of the head support must be adjusted. This
can only be done after the unit has been
connected to the power supply.
Short shaft
Upper half of
head support
M8 screw
Forehead support
Lower cover
M4 screws
To position the head support, press either

focal trough position key to switch the patient
positioning lights on (refer to user's manual).
Rotate the head support until the midsagittal
light beam is positioned in the middle of the
forehead support. Tighten the holding screw
and then replace the lower cover.

Installing the cephalometric unit
The cephalometric head unit is packed separately.
1. Take the ceph head unit carefully out of its

packaging
2. Release and remove the four retaining screws
and remove the ceph cover.
3. Remove the horizontal adjustment bolts and
the adjustment screw retaining bolts.
4. Install the head support and connect the flat
cables to their marked connectors, and the
ground wire to the grounding point in the ceph
head. Reinstall the horizontal adjustment bolts
and the adjustment screw retaining bolts.
Ceph cover screws

Ceph cover
Cassette holder and

head support assembly
Ceph support frame
Adjustment screw Ceph interface board

retaining bolts
Horizontal adjustment bolts

2. Installation
Connecting the unit to a power supply
Connecting the unit to a power supply
The units are set up at the factory for either 230

VAC or 115 VAC mains voltage, and the voltage
can NOT be modified on site.
The Tome unit must be connected permanently to

the mains power supply. Do not use a plug to
connect the unit to the power supply.
The main power supply cable fitted to the unit is

two metres long. If you require a longer cable, the
extra length must be permanently attached to the
existing cable by using an installation box. The
cable used is 3 x 1.5 mm².
USA only /UL approved units
Units supplied to the USA are equipped with a

field wiring box for permanent installation. A
suitable AWG cord and conduit must be used to
connect the field wiring box to the branch circuit.
Follow the National Electric Code when
connecting the unit to the branch circuit.
IMPORTANT NOTE
If the X-ray unit is ever moved to a new location,
CHECK
that the voltage at the new location is equivalent to
the mains voltage marked on the unit type label.
Never connect the unit to any other mains voltage
than that specified on the type label.
1. Before connecting the unit to the power

supply, make sure that the voltage is 230 VAC
(or 115 VAC) ±10% based on the voltage
ratings on the unit´s type label.
The power supply is fitted with a 16 A (25 A)
slow blow fuse rated for 230 VAC (115 VAC).
The power supply should also be equipped
with proper circuit breaker according to local
requirements.

2. Switch the main power supply off.
3. Connect the power supply cable from the X-

ray unit to the power supply.
Also be sure to observe any other national and
local requirements regarding the connection of
dental X-ray equipment to a power supply.
4. Switch the main power supply on and then

switch the unit on with the on/off switch
located on the left-hand side of the unit.
5. Press the up arrow key briefly to drive the unit

up slightly so that it is no longer resting on the
transportation frame.
WARNING
Do not press any other keys until you have
removed the transportation frame.
6. Switch the unit off.
7. Remove the transportation frame and the

pallet on which the X-ray unit is mounted.
Switching the unit on
1. Switch the X-ray on with the power switch (0/I)

located on the left side of the column. The unit
will automatically carry out a self-test during
which the software version numbers will
appear briefly on the display.
After the self-test has been successfully
completed, the normal panoramic program will
be automatically selected.

2. Installation
2. Make sure that the exposure button is

unlocked. The key in the lock at the rear of the
column must be in the horizontal position. If
the key is not in the horizontal position, rotate
it clockwise to the correct position.
3. Verify that all controls are functioning properly

before you start testing the alignment of the
unit. In case of any errors consult the User
manual and Service manual.
Installing the collimator assembly

1. Remove the inner cover from the tube head
assembly.
2. Slide the collimator assembly into the collima-

tor holder so that all the four roller bearings on
the rear of the collimator are located in the two
V-shaped grooves in the collimator holder.
WARNING
The aperture plate is made of lead (Pb) which
is a toxic material. Do not touch it with your
bare hands.
NOTE
Do not replace the inner cover yet as you may
need to adjust the collimator when you check
the alignment of the unit.

Levelling the unit

The unit is levelled by using the bearing guide
rods in the support arm. These can be accessed
from the top of the unit.
1. To level the unit in the front/rear direction,

place the levelling bar on one of the bearing
guide rods so that the levelling bar is parallel
to the side of the unit. Place the spirit level on
the levelling bar and level the unit in the front/
rear direction by tightening or loosening the
adjusting nuts on the two spacers.
Levelling bar and spirit level
Bearing guide rods
2. To level the unit in the left/right direction place

the across the two bearing guide rods so that it
is parallel to the front of the unit. Place a spirit
level on top of the levelling bar and level the
unit by slightly loosening the nuts that hold the
unit to the wall bar and the screws that hold it
to the floor bracket and then pushing the
column to the left or right.
Bearing guide rods
Levelling bar and spirit level
3. Check that the unit is still level in front/rear

direction, and then tighten all the screws and
nuts.

2. Installation
Changing the maximum height of the unit

The maximum height that the unit can be driven to
is 2410 mm (95"), the factory setting. If the ceiling
in the room where the unit is to be installed is
lower than this you must reduce the height to
which the unit can be driven. This is done by
changing the position of the lower top/bottom
sensor (N2100). The lower top/bottom sensor is
attached to the moving column and is positioned
over the lowest of three square holes. By
repositiong the sensor over either of the other
holes, the maximum height of the unit can be
reset.
Note that the lower top/bottom sensor controls the
maximum height of the unit.
1. Remove the patient support assembly cover

and then the front column cover. If you wish to
Moving use the highest sensor location, you must
column remove the positioning mirror.
2. Remove the top/bottom sensor and reposition

it over the hole that will give you the unit height
you require:
- lowest hole, 2410 mm (95 in) factory setting.

Square holes
- middle hole, 2285 mm (90 in).
- top hole, 2180 mm (85 in)

(behind the positioning mirror).
Top/bottom sensor 3. Replace the covers.

(2100)

Installing a remote exposure warning light

If you plan to install a remote exposure warning/
ready state light it must be connected to the DIN-3
external warning device connector at the rear of
the column.
The warning light assembly must be located out-

side the room in which the X-ray is being used in
the place where it can be clearly seen. For further
information on how to install the remote exposure
warning light, refer to the instructions supplied with
the light and the relevant circuit diagram in the
service manual (board N800).

2. Installation
Installing options
PC and interface cable

An IBM PC or 100% compatible PC from another
manufacturer can be connected to the unit with
the RS-232-C cable (part number 4801199) sup-
plied by the manufacturer.
Before connecting the cable switch both the PC
and unit off. Connect the 9-pin male "D"
connector at one end of the cable, to the appropri-
ate female connector at the rear of the unit. Se-
cure the connector in place with the holding
screws. Connect the female connector at the other
end of the cable to the male "D" connector (COM1
or COM2) at the rear of the PC. Secure the con-
nector in place with the holding screws.

Switching the unit on

1. Switch the X-ray on with the power switch (0/I)
which is located on the side of the moving
column just above the control panel. The unit
will automatically carry out a self test during
which the software version numbers will ap-
pear briefly on the display. After the self test
has been successfully completed, the normal
panoramic program (001) will be automatically
selected, together with an average kV value
and patient size.
Unlocked 2. Make sure that the exposure button is un-

locked. The key in the lock at the rear of the
column, near the power switch (0/I), must be in
the horizontal position. If the key is not in the
horizontal position rotate it clockwise until it is.
Key

3. Checking the alignment of the unit

This section describes how to check and adjust
the alignment of the unit. The section is divided
into steps which first describe how to check the
alignment of the different assemblies and parts
and then how to adjust them.
Special test programs are used to carry out the

alignment procedures. These test programs are
selected by keying in an appropriate four-digit
program number in the control panel. All test
program numbers begin with 99xx.
Adjusting the alignment of the different assemblies
and parts is either carried out manually or by using
one of the four-digit service codes. Service code
numbers begin with 90xx -97xx.
Note that when a test program or service code is
selected, its number and name will appear on the
display in the program description field.
IMPORTANT NOTE
Every time a key is pressed or a setting is made a
message will appear on the display in the informa-
tion field telling you either what to do next or giving
you the status of the unit. The unit will not let you
continue with the alignment checking procedure
until you have carried out the instruction that
appears in the information field.
For further information on how to use the control

panel refer to the section "Using the control panel
and understanding the display" in the User's
Manual.
Program description window
Information field

Overview of the alignment checking procedure

Check that the C-arm
is horizontal.
The
C-arm is No Level the
horizontal C-arm
Yes
Check the height of the

aperture plate.
Test program 9975
The
aperture
plate is in No Adjust the
the correct position
position
Yes
Check the centre of

rotation of the beam.
Test program 9974
The
beam is No
Centre the beam
centred
Yes
1A

1A
Check the position of the

secondary slit.
Test program 9975
The
secondary slit No Position the
is correctly secondary slit
positioned
Yes
Check the PIO rotational start

position Test program 9977
The PIO No Position the

position is start position
correct
Yes
Check the position of rotating

unit in the x and y directions.
Test program 9977
The
rotating unit is No Position the
correctly posi- rotating unit
tioned
Yes
1B

1B
Check the position of

the rotating unit axis
Program 381
The
axis is cor- No Position the
rectly posi- tube head
tioned
Yes
Take ball/pin phantom exposure

and check ball positions
Correct No
Recheck alignment
positions
Yes
Check the positioning lights
The lights
No
are correctly Position the lights
positioned
Yes
1C

1C
OPTIONAL
Align ceph 2A
(see below)
Set cassette S/N number
Set user interface

language and time
Alignment check complete
2A
Check that the horizontal

position of the cephalostat
The
cephalostat No Adjust the cephalostat
is horizon- so that it is horizontal
tal
Yes
2B

2B
Check that the vertical

position of the cephalostat
The
cephalostat No Adjust the cephalostat
is vertical so that it is vertical
Yes
Check the horizontal and vertical

alignment of the ear posts
The ear
posts are No
Align the ear posts
correctly
aligned
Yes
Check the position of

the soft tissue filter
The the No
filter is Adjust the position
correctly of the filter
positioned
Yes
Alignment check complete S/N calibration

The horizontal position of the C-arm

You must first make sure that the C-arm is hori-
zontal. If the C-arm is not horizontal, the lower
edge of the patient's mandible may not appear on
the film when a panoramic exposure is taken.
Checking that the C-arm is horizontal

1. Press the Return button (it is on the side of the
cassette carriage assembly) or E (enter) key to
drive the C-arm to the ready/PIO (patient in
out position).
2. Remove the inner tube head cover.
3. Slide the cassette carriage to the side (ceph)

position.
4. Hold a spirit level so that it touches the under-

sides of the C-arm. The C-arm must be hori-
zontal. If it is not level refer to the next section
for information on how to level it.
NOTE
If you move the C-arm while you are checking
it, press the Return button or E (enter) key
again to drive the C-arm back to the ready/
PIO.
Column
C-arm
Spirit level
Cassette carriage Tube head
C-arm viewed from the front of the unit
5. Slide the cassette carriage back to the normal

(pan) position.

Levelling the C-arm

The C-arm can be levelled by adjusting the posi-
tion of the optosensor positioning block.
1 Press the E key or Return button to drive the

unit to the ready position.
2. Remove the curved C-arm covers.
3. Loosen the optosensor positioning block and

slide it to the right or left to level the C-arm. If
the tube head side is too low when you are
looking at the unit from the front, the position-
ing block must be moved to the right to raise
the tube head. If the tube head side is too high
slide the block to the left.
This direction to
raise tubehead
This direction to Column
lower tubehead
Optosensor
positioning block
Tube head
C-arm viewed from the front of the unit
4. When the C-arm is level tighten the positioning

block.

The height of the aperture plate

The aperture plate must be checked to ensure
that it is at the right height and perpendicular. If
the aperture plate is too high or too low the image
will not appear in the correct position on the film. If
the aperture plate is not perpendicular you may
not get a complete image on the film.
Checking the height of the aperture plate

1. Slide aperture selector knob to aperture 1, if it
is not already in that position.
2. Slide the cassette head to the normal (PAN)

position, if it is not already in that position.
3. Close the cassette shields, if they are not

already closed.
4. Place the appropriate panoramic beam align-

ment tool in position on the front of the cas-
Beam alignment tool sette head. Magnets hold the alignment tools
(6902910) in place. Make sure that the pins on the left-
hand side and bottom of the tool are pushed
against the cassette carriage with the beam
alignment tool.
5. Press the C (clear) key, on the control panel,

twice to enter the special program mode. The
patient size numbers along the bottom row of
the display will be replaced by program num-
bers.

9975 6. Key in the calibration program 9975 (multipur-

pose test exposure). The program number will
appear on the display. If you make a mistake
press the C (clear) key once to remove the
number and then key in the correct number.
7. Press the E (enter) key to select the multipur-

pose test exposure.
xxxx 8. Key in your password. The number will appear

on the display as a series of stars.
IMPORTANT NOTE
When using test programs (they begin with
99xx) you only have to enter your password
once during the alignment checking proce-
dure. If, however, you switch the unit off during
the alignment procedure, you must key this
number in again.
9. Press the E (enter) key.
70 kV 10. Select a kV value of 70 if it is not already

selected.
11. Darken the room. Position yourself behind the

WARNING tube head so that you can see the beam align-
Radiation ment tool and protect yourself from radia-
generated tion. Press and hold down the exposure but-
ton. You will be able to see the position of the
radiation beam on the beam alignment tool, as
the beam will cause the surface of the beam
alignment tool to fluoresce.

The beam must be vertical and touching the

lower border of the rectangle drawn on the
beam alignment tool. The beam is shown as a
shaded (////) area in the illustration below.
Beam alignment
tool
Beam in Beam Beam Beam not

correct position too high too low vertical
If the beam is not vertical or too high or low,

the position of the aperture plate must be
adjusted.
NOTE
At this stage it does not matter if the beam is
too far to the left or right. Centring the beam is
described later.

Adjusting the height of the aperture plate

1. Slightly loosen the four screws that hold the
aperture plate in position. Then loosen the two
levelling screw lock nuts and then level or
adjust the vertical height of the aperture plate
by turning either one or both of the levelling
screws. One revolution of a levelling screw will
move the image of the beam that appears on
the beam alignment tool approximately four (4)
millimetres.
Aperture plate screws
Aperture plate
Levelling screws
2. Check the position of the beam again and

readjust the position of the aperture plate if
necessary.
3. When the aperture plate is perpendicular and

within the top and bottom border lines, tighten
all the screws and nuts.
4. Remove the beam alignment tool.

The centre of rotation of the beam

The position of the beam in relation to the centre
of rotation of the (C-arm) rotating unit must be
checked. If the beam does not pass through the
centre of rotation the image will not be sharp.
Checking the centre of rotation of the beam

bers.
9974 2. Key in the calibration program 9974 (Mainte-

nance X-ray beam centre test) using the pro-
gram number keys.
3. Press the E (enter) key to select the mainte-

nance beam alignment test.
XXXX 4. If you are not in the test program mode key in

your password and press the E (enter) key
5. Select aperture 1.
6. Set the chin rest so that it is in the upper posi-

tion.
7. Slide the pin phantom onto the chin support.
8. Place a sheet of film, in its light-proof packet

on top of the pin phantom and press the film
down so that ALL the small pins on the pin
phantom go through the light-proof packet and
penetrate the film.
9. Select a kV value of 77.

10. Protect yourself from exposure to radiation

WARNING and then press and hold down the exposure
Radiation button. The unit will perform a test cycle during
generated which the C-arm will rotate around the patient
positioning mechanism (the sheet of film) and
stop briefly, at several points, and take an
"exposure". The test exposure last about 30
seconds.
11. Process the film. The result of the test is a
series of black “beam exposure lines” that
crisscross the film.
If the beam passes through the centre of

rotation, all the beam exposure lines will cross
at the same point and form a small black
centre point.
If the beam does not pass through the centre
of rotation, the lines will not pass through a
centre point and there will be no black centre
point.
If the beam is not centred, the position of the
primary slit must be adjusted.
Direction of column
Crossing point of beam exposure lines
Centre point
Beam exposure lines
No centre point

Adjusting the centre of rotation of the beam

CAUTION
Do not centre the beam by moving the aperture
plate.
1. Loosen the adjusting nut at the end of the

collimator plate, and turn the hex socket head
adjusting screw clockwise or anticlockwise to
adjust the position of the aperture plate holder.
Note that you only have to move the aperture
plate holder half the error distance.
If the lines are misaligned with exposure line 1

Direction too near to the column, the aperture plate
of column holder must be moved away from the column.
Do this by rotating the adjusting screw clock-
wise.
Exposure line 1 too near the column

Adjusting screw
Nut
Column
Collimator plate
One rotation of the screw will move the pri-

mary slit 1.0 mm, which will result in a beam
movement of approximately 3 mm when
measured at the centre of rotation.

If the lines are misaligned with exposure line 1

too far from the column, the aperture plate
holder must be moved towards from the col-
Direction umn. Do this by rotating the adjusting screw
of column anticlockwise.
Adjusting screw
Nut
Collimator plate
Exposure line 1 too far from the column
2. Take another exposure to check the position

and readjust if necessary.
3. When the beam is centred, tighten the holding

screw and remove the pin phantom.

The position of the secondary slit

If the secondary slit (the cassette carriage side) is
not centred, the image will not be sharp.
Checking the position of the secondary slit

bers.
9975 2. Key in the calibration program 9975 (multipur-

pose test exposure).
3. Press the E (enter) key
XXXX 4. If you are not in test program mode, key in

6. Darken the room.
7. Place the appropriate panoramic beam align-

ment tool in position on the front of the cas-
sette head. Magnets hold the alignment tools
in place.
Beam alignment tool

(6902910)


WARNING and press and hold down the exposure button.
Radiation You will be able to see the position of the
generated radiation beam on the beam alignment tool, as
the beam will cause the surface of the tool to
fluoresce.
The beam should be in the centre of the beam

alignment tool, within the black lines marked
on the tool.
If the image of the beam is not within the black
lines, the position of the secondary slit must
be adjusted.
Beam in Beam too Beam too

Beam alignment correct position far to left far to right
tool

Aligning the secondary slit

1. First remove the back cover of the cassette
carriage. Then remove the upper cassette
cover held in place by two screws located
inside the cassette carriage. Loosen the four
screws that hold the secondary slit cover in
position, two at the top and two at the bottom,
and slide it left or right until it is in the correct
position.
Back cover Upper cassette cover
Secondary slit cover
2. Take another exposure to check the position

and readjust if necessary.
3. When the secondary slit is correctly aligned

remove the panoramic beam alignment tool
and replace all the covers.


The patient in/out rotation (PIO) position

The rotating unit must start from the correct posi-
tion before an exposure is taken. If it does not, the
image may be distorted or part of the image may
not appear on the exposure.
Checking that the patient in/out (PIO) position is correct

bers.
9977 2. Key in the calibration program 9977 (Beam

alignment test) using the program number
keys.
3. Press the E (enter) key.
XXXX 4. If you are not in test program mode, key in

6. Slide the pin phantom onto the chin support.
7. Place a sheet of film, in its light-proof packet

on top of the pin phantom and press the film
down so that the small pins on the package go
through the light-proof packet and penetrate
the film
8. Select a kV value of 77

WARNING and then press and hold down the exposure
Radiation button.
generated

10. Process the film.
The result of the test is a series of black

“beam exposure lines” that crisscross the film.
The exposure line that runs from front to back

(y-axis) and exposure line that runs from right
to left (x-axis) must pass through or be parallel
to the four main pin holes.
If exposure beams are not parallel to the pin
holes, for example the beam passes to the
right of one pin hole and then to the left of the
other, the rotating unit is not in the correct
position and must be adjusted.
Correctly positioned exposure lines Incorrectly positioned exposure lines
Exposure lines Pin holes
Y-axis X-axis Exposure lines not

parallel to axes
IMPORTANT NOTE
It does not matter if the beam lines do not
pass through the centres of the pin holes. If
the beam lines are parallel to the axes but too
far to the left or right, or too far forwards or
backwards, it indicates that the x and y axes
must be adjusted. This is described in the next
section.

Adjusting the patient in/out (PIO) position

1. Remove the lower part of the head support
(two screws) and then remove holding screw
in the centre of the upper part of the head
support and then slide it off the support spigot.
Head support
2. Tilt the C-arm and then remove the two halves

of the C-arm cover.
3. Look up in side the C arm and you will see the

short black plastic positioning block. Loosen
the two screws that hold the positioning block
in position and slide it clockwise or anticlock-
wise until the rotating unit is in the correct
patient in/out position.
Moves beam lines

anticlockwise
Positioning block
Moves beam Screws

lines clockwise
C-arm viewed from below

To rotate the beam exposure lines clockwise

move the positioning block anticlockwise.
To rotate the beam exposure lines anticlock-

wise move the positioning block clockwise.
Moving the stop positioning block 2 mm will

alter the angle of rotation by approximately
0.5º.
4. Tighten all the screws and take another expo-
sure to check that the rotating unit is in the
correct position. If it is not, readjust.

The position of the rotating unit in the X and Y directions

The rotating unit (C-arm) must be correctly posi-
tioned in the front to back (Y-axis) direction and
right to left (X-axis) direction (The centre of
rotation of the C-arm). If it is not, images will be
unclear or distorted.
Checking the position of the rotating unit

1. Examine the test exposure that you took when
the C-arm was correctly aligned in the PIO
position (the previous alignment check).
The exposure line that runs from front to back
(Y-axis) and exposure line that runs from right
to left (X-axis) must pass through the four
main pin holes.
If the exposure lines do not pass through the
centres of the pin holes, the rotating unit is not
in the correct position and must be adjusted.
Correctly positioned exposure lines Incorrectly positioned exposure lines
Exposure lines Pin holes
Y axis X axis Y axis X axis

Adjusting the position of the rotating unit

To adjust the position of the rotating unit in the X-
axis (left/right direction).
1. Remove the front cover from the unit and the
two small cover plates.
Front cover Cover plates
2. At the front of the sliding unit there is a black

positioning rail. Slightly loosen the two screws
that hold it in position and slide the rail to the
left or right until the rotating unit is in the cor-
rect position.
If the exposure line is too far to the right move

the stop positioning plate (rail) to the right.
If the exposure line is too far to the left move

the stop positioning plate (rail) to the left.
3. Take another exposure to make sure that the

exposure line is correctly positioned.

To adjust the position of the rotating unit along the

Y-axis (front/rear direction).
1. Remove the top cover from the unit if it has
not already been removed.
Top cover
2. In the top of the unit on the right-hand side

there is a black positioning rail. Slightly loosen
the two screws that hold it in position and slide
the rail backwards or forwards until the rotating
unit is in the correct position.
If the exposure line is too near the column

move the stop positioning rail towards the
column.
If the exposure line is too far from the column

move the stop positioning rail away from the
column.
3. Take another exposure to make sure that the

exposure line is correctly positioned.

The position of the rotating unit axis

If the vertical rotating axis of the C-arm assembly
(the C-arm moves in the horizontal plane) does
not coincide with the horizontal tilting axis of the
C-arm assembly (the C-arm tilts in the vertical
direction), exposures taken using tomograph
programs will be unclear.
Correctly aligned Incorrectly aligned

Vertical rotating axis
Horizontal tilting axis
Axes coincide Axes do not coincide
IMPORTANT NOTE
This alignment should not change in normal use
or during transportation. It is unlikely that this
alignment procedure will have to be carried out
during normal installation.

Checking the position of the rotating unit axis

1. Place the ball phantom into the chin rest.
2. Place the mesh phantom into position 8a on

the ball phantom (fourth set of holes on the
left, from the centre), at an angle of 45º. The
different size pins in the base of the mesh
phantom ensure that is installed the right way
round,
Ball phantom
3. From the control panel select program number

381. This program takes four tomographic cuts
of the net phantom.
5. Open the cassette shields.
6. Select exposure values 70kV and 1mA.
7. Install the inner tube head cover and then

place the brass radiation filter on the tube
head filtration label. Marks on the label indi-
cate where the radiation filter must be placed.
Radiation filter

8. Protect yourself from radiation, and take an

WARNING exposure. The program will take four tomo-
Radiation graphic cuts of the net phantom.
generated
9. Process the film and examine the four images.

In each image there will be a band across the
film in which the horizontal and vertical mesh
wires from the phantom will be clearly in focus.
If both the horizontal and vertical mesh wires

are in focus where they cross each other, it
indicates that the tube head is correctly posi-
tioned.
Horizontal and vertical wires in focus coincide
If the horizontal and vertical mesh wires that

are in focus do not coincide, it indicates that
the tube head is incorrectly positioned and
must be adjusted.
Horizontal and vertical wires in focus do not coincide

Adjusting the position of the tube head

1. Remove the holding screw in the centre of the
head support and then slide the head support
from the support spigot.
2. Tilt the C-arm and then remove the two halves

of the C-arm cover.
3. Look up inside the C-arm and you will see five

M6 nuts that hold the rotating unit in position.
M6 nuts
Centring tool
Cassette Tube
carriage head
M6 nuts C-arm viewed from below
4. Attach the centring tool to the side of the rotat-

ing unit and turn the tool to adjust the position
of the tube head.
If the vertical wires that are in focus appear
below the horizontal wires in focus, turn the
adjustment tool anticlockwise
If the vertical wires that are in focus appear
above the horizontal wires in focus, turn the
adjustment tool clockwise
5. Tighten the nuts and take another exposure to

make sure that all the tube head is correctly
positioned. Readjust if necessary. Remove the
radiation filter and the centring tool.

Ball/pin phantom test

To check that the unit is correctly aligned you must
now take an exposure using the ball pin phantom.
1. Place the ball pin phantom in the chin rest.
2. Set the unit up to a normal panoramic expo-

sure, program number 001. Refer to the user's
manual for information on how to do this.
3. Take an exposure and then process the film.

Compare the ball/pin exposure that you have
just taken with the one that is supplied with the
unit.
The distance from the centre pin to the last

ball on the left and from the centre pin to the
last ball on the right must be 130 ±2 mm.
If these dimensions are not within the limits
you must align the unit again.
Ball/pin exposure

Positioning lights
If the lights are not correctly positioned the patient
cannot be accurately positioned.
NOTE
The unit must be correctly aligned before the
position of the lights is checked.
Checking the position of patient positioning lights

1. Place the ball phantom into the chin rest.
2. Select the Pan program (001). With this pro-

gram the midsaggital, focal trough and Frank-
furt plane lights are activated. To activate the
TMJ light select one of the TMJ programs, for
example TMJ Tomo.
3. Slide the cassette carriage to the ceph position
4. Press one of the up/down keys and the patient

positioning lights will come on.
The light beams must strike the appropriate

notch on the side of the ball phantom.
Notch for the TMJ light beam
Notch for the focal trough light beam
Notch for the midsaggital light beam

Note that the focal trough light beam must

strike the notch on the side of the ball phan-
tom and then pass through the pin.
Pin
Notch for focal trough light beam
Wrong position
Correct position
To check that the Frankfurt plane light works,

hold a piece of cardboard vertically on top of
the ball phantom so the you can see the
beam.
If any of the light beams are incorrectly posi-

tioned, they must be adjusted.
Adjusting the patient positioning lights
Midsagittal light
1. Remove the patient support assembly cover.
2. To adjust the position of the light, loosen the

two screws that hold the light assembly in
place and move the whole light assembly
sideways until the light beam is in the correct
position.
3. Tighten the two screws and check the position

again. Readjust if necessary.
4. Replace the patient support assembly cover.

Focal trough light and TMJ light

Both the focal trough light and the TMJ light are
attached to the same holding plate.
1. Slide the cassette head to the cephalometric

position.
2. Remove the light cover from the underside of

the C-arm. It is held in place by one screw.
3. Loosening the two screws that hold the light

assembly in position and moving the whole
light assembly sideways until the light beam
strikes the appropriate notch on the side of the
ball phantom.

5. Replace the light cover.

Frankfort light
1. Remove the adjusting knob and the light cover
from the rear of the column.
2. The beam can be levelled by loosening the

two scews that hold the light to the slide
mechanism and then adjusting the position of
the light

4. Replace the cover and adjusting knob
Optional task
If the unit is a pan/ceph, you must now check the
alignment of the cephalostat.
Section 4 - Aligning the cephalostat.
If the unit is a pan you must now set the unit up for
the user.
Section 5 - Setting the unit up for the user.

4. Aligning the cephalostat
4. Aligning the cephalostat (optional)

If you are installing a pan/ceph unit the ceph unit
must be aligned and set up.
CAUTION
The ceph alignment information given here is
for a LEFT-HAND CEPH. If you are installing a
right-hand ceph you will have to reverse some
of the alignment movements.
Beam alignment
You must check, and if necessary adjust, the
position of cassette holder so that the beam is in
the correct position. You must first check the
horizontal position (adjust ceph unit) and then the
vertical position (adjust the tube head).
Checking the horizontal (Y-axis) position of the ceph unit

1. Set the ceph head to maximum magnification
by loosening the locking knob on top of the
ceph head and sliding the ceph cassette
holder as far back as it will go. Tighten the
locking knob.
Select procedure
2. Press the ceph key to select the ceph proce-

dure
Select program
3. Select the ceph AV program (18 AV or 24 AV

with metric units and 8 AV with inch units) by
pressing the AV program selection key on the
right-hand side of the control panel. A frame
will appear around the program selected.
Select exposure time
4. Select the shortest exposure time (0.4 sec-

onds) by pressing the appropriate key.

Remove cassette
5. If the panoramic cassette is in the cassette

carriage remove the cassette.
Set cassette head to side position
6. Slide the cassette head to the side position.
7. Rotate the soft tissue filter knob anticlockwise

as far as it will go to remove all filtration. All of
the leds on the ceph head support will come
off.
Insert ceph cassette XXXX
8. Place the cephalometric cassette loaded with

film (or an imaging plate) in the cassette
holder. The left-hand side of the cassette must
line up with the black line on the left-hand side
of the cassette holder.
Select aperture (X)
9. If the ceph unit is standard metric size select

aperture 8 if you are using a 24 x 30 cassette
and aperture 5 if you are using a 18 x 24
cassette.
If the ceph unit is large metric size select
aperture 6.
If the ceph unit is inch size select aperture 5.
Press RETURN button or E-key
10. Press the RETURN button or the E key to

drive the C-arm to the ceph position.

exposure.

12. Process the film or scan the imaging plate.

The exposed area must be in the middle of the
film/scanned image, and you MUST be able to
see unexposed margins around the four sides
of the exposed area.
Exposed area on film / scanned imaging plate
Margins around exposed area
If the exposed area is not in the middle of the

film/scanned image and margins cannot be
seen on one or two sides of the exposed area,
the exposed area (beam) must be reposi-
tioned.
If the exposed area (beam) is too far the right
or left, it must be moved horizontally (y-axis).
See section "Adjusting the position of the
beam horizontally" for information on how to
do this.
If the exposed area (beam) is too high or low,
it must be moved vertically (x-axis). See sec-
tion "Adjusting the position of the beam verti-
cally" for information on how to do this.
Adjusting the position of the beam horizontally (Y-axis)

There are two ways to position the beam (exposed
area) horizontally:
- Repositioning the ceph head and
- Rotating the C-arm
If the beam (exposed area) is less than 5 mm out
of alignment, you only need to reposition the ceph
head.
If the beam (exposed area) is more than 5 mm out
of alignment, you must rotate the C-arm first and
then make fine adjustments by repositioning the
ceph head.
Repositioning the ceph head

1. First loosen the four cover screws that hold
the ceph cover in place. Then loosen the four
bolts, two on each side, that fasten the alloy
cassette holder and head support assembly to
the ceph support frame. These are located
underneath the metal ceph support frame.

2. Slide the cassette holder to the left or right to

centre the beam.
If the beam is too far to the left, the cassette
holder and head support assembly must be
moved to the left.
If the beam is too far to the right, the cassette
holder and head support assembly must be
moved to the right.
Tighten the bolts and take another exposure to
check the position. Readjust if necessary.
Ceph cover screws
Ceph cover
Cassette holder and

head support assembly
Ceph support frame
Adjustment screw Ceph interface board

retaining bolts
Horizontal adjustment bolts
Beam too far to the left. Move Beam too far to the right. Move
cassette holder to left cassette holder to right

Rotating the C-arm

1. Remove the holding screw in the centre of the
head support and then slide the head support
from the support spigot.
2. Remove the curved C-arm cover.
3. Look up inside the C arm and you will see the

long black curved ceph positioning rail. Loosen
the three screws that hold the positioning rail
in position and move it clockwise or anticlock-
wise until the rotating unit is in the correct
ceph position.
Move the rail clockwise to move the beam to

the left.
Move the plate anticlockwise to move the

beam to the right.
Screws
Clockwise moves
beam to left
Positioning rail
Anticlockwise
moves beam to right C-arm viewed from below

One millimetre movement of the positioning

rail will move the beam approximately 15 mm
when measured at the cassette holder.
Beam on left, move rail anticlockwise Beam on right, move rail clockwise
4. Take another exposure to check that the beam

is in the correct position. Readjust if necessary
and then make fine adjustments by moving the
cassette holder and head support assembly,
described previously, in the "Moving the Ceph
head" section.
5. Tighten all the screws when the beam is cor-

rectly positioned.

Adjusting the position of the beam vertically (X-axis,

vertical offset)
The vertical position of the beam is adjusted by
changing the angle (vertical offset) that the C-arm
automatically moves to when a ceph exposure is
taken. To move the beam up the tube head must
be moved down and to move the beam down the
tube head must be moved up. Note that although
the angle of the C-arm is changed the adjustment
is measured in millimetres at the cassette holder.
Tube head up,

Beam up beam down
Beam down Tube head down,

beam up

bers.
Enter program number and press E
9791 2. Key in the 9791 and press the E key to enter

the ceph installation setup mode.

xxxx 3. Key in your password using the keys at the

bottom of the display and press the E key The
ceph installation setup menu will appear on
the display.

--- Ceph: H/W test utilities ------------------
#?.
#?. 2 4. To select the vertical offset menu key in

number 2, it will appear on the last line of the
installation setup menu, and press the E key.
The Set Vertical Offset menu will appear on
the display .

-- Current setting: Beam Up, offset: 15[mm]
#1. Beam down
#2. Beam up
#?.
The current position of the C-arm appears in

the Current setting line. In the example above
the beam is up and offset distance is 15 mm.
This means that the beam is angled upwards
so that it is 15 mm above an imaginary centre
line that runs from the tube head to the cas-
sette holder. The beam can be moved above
or below the centre line by up to 35 mm.

5. Decide how much the beam must be moved to

position it correctly, and in which direction.
Beam too high, move down Beam too low, move up
#?. 1 If the beam must be moved in the opposite

or direction to the current setting, press either the
#?. 2 1 or the 2 key to change the offset direction,
and then press E.
For example, if the beam is currently set at
15mm above the line (Beam up, offset
15mm) and you must move the beam down
20mm to centre it, then you must change the
direction in which the beam moves, select
beam down, before you can key in the offset
value, which in this case will be 5mm. The
result will be: Beam down, offset 5mm
#?. 3 6. Key in 3 and press the E key. The offset value

can now be entered.

-- Current setting: Beam down, offset: 15[mm]
#1. Beam down
#2. Beam up
#?. 0
-- set value 0..35 mm:

mm: 5 7. Key in the offset value required to centre the

beam, and press the E key. The value is en-
tered in millimetres and will appear at the end
of the last line on the display.

-- Current setting: Beam down, offset: 15 [mm]
#1. Beam down
#2. Beam up
#?. 0
-- set value 0..35 mm: 5
For example, the beam is currently set 15 mm

above the centre line. To centre the beam it
must be lowered 10 mm.
Beam must be lowered by 10 mm
Although the beam must be lowered, it still

remains above the imaginary centre line so the
offset angle is 5 mm up (the value you key in
is 15 mm - 10 mm = 5 mm). Note that if the
beam had to be lowered by 15 mm you would
enter an offset value of 0, and if the beam had
to be lowered by 20 mm you would have to
change the direction of the beam, beam down,
and then enter an offset value of 5.
8. Exit the special program mode and then take

another exposure to recheck the position of
the beam. Readjust if necessary.

9. The new offset value MUST now be stored in

the memory.
IMPORTANT NOTE
0 If the value is not stored, it will be lost when
the unit is switched off.
0 Press the 0 key and the E key to return to the
previous menu, and both the keys a second
time to return to the main (user's) display.
10. Select the maintenance mode by using the

keys on the left-hand side of the display.
11. Select the store settings mode by using the

keys on the right-hand side of the display.
xxxx 12. Key in your password (number) using the keys

at the bottom of the display and press the E
key. You will hear a long signal tone that indi-
cates that the new offset value has been
stored in memory

The position of the ear posts

The ear posts must both line up with the axis that
runs between the tube head focus and the cas-
sette holder.
Checking the position of the ear posts

1. Use the same unit settings that you used to
check the beam alignment.

3. Rotate the head support so that the two ear

posts are on the centre line that runs from the
tube head to the cassette holder.
4. Push the forehead support in as far as it will

go. An image of the support will appear on the
film and allow you to orient the film so that you
know in which direction to adjust the earposts
5. Protect yourself from radiation and take an

exposure. Process the film. The image of two
rings will appear on the film. The smaller ring
must be within the larger one. If it is not, the
Rings position of the ear posts must be adjusted.
Good Acceptable Unacceptable
Film or imaging plate

Adjusting the position of the Ear posts

IMPORTANT NOTE
The larger ring on the film is an image of the ring
in the ear post that is nearer the tube head.
Horizontal direction
To adjust the position of the earposts in the hori-
zontal direction, the position of the lever must be
adjusted.
1. Loosen the locking screw located underneath
the metal ceph support frame and push the
lever to reposition the earposts.
Push the lever anticlockwise to move the large
circle to the left.
Push the lever clockwise to move the large
circle to the right.
Lever Locking screw
To move large circle

to left, push lever in
an anti-clockwise
direction
To move large circle

to right, push lever in
a clockwise direction
2. Tighten the locking screw and check the posi-

tion again. If necessary readjust.

Vertical direction
To adjust the position of the earposts in the verti-
cal direction the position of the ceph unit must be
adjusted.
1. To move the large circle up, turn the adjust-

ment screw anti-clockwise.
To move the large circle down, turn the adjust-
ment screw clockwise.
Vertical adjustment screw
Large circle up – Large circle down

turn adjustment – turn adjustment
screw anti- screw clockwise .
clockwise
2. Check the position again and readjust if nec-

essary.

Checking and adjusting the soft tissue filter

The position of the soft tissue filter must corre-
spond to the position of the soft tissue filter LEDs
on the cephalometric unit. To do this, turn the soft
tissue filter knob until the appropriate LEDs come
on and then check the position of the soft tissue
filter.
NOTE: In units manufactured up to August 2002,

the edge of the soft tissue filter is straight. Units
manufactured from August 2002 have a curved
soft tissue filter.
NOTE: The instructions below are for a LEFT-

HAND ceph.
Checking/adjusting the minimum filtration position

1. Use the same parameters and unit settings
that you used to check the beam alignment.

3. Pull the forehead support OUT as far as it will

go.
4. Rotate the soft tissue filter knob anticlockwise

until ONE led on the ceph head support
comes on. This indicates minimum filtration (
First filter position ).

exposure.


The edge of the curved soft tissue filter must
be level with the front of the forehead support.
(The straight filter it must be 1 cm (3/8") away
from the forehead support).
Forehead support If the soft tissue filter is in the correct minimum
filtration position, check the maximum filtration
position. See section Checking and adjust-
ing the maximum filtration position.
Edge of the curved filter
Edge of the straight filter

If the soft tissue filter is NOT in the correct
position, adjust its position as follows.
7. Turn the so soft tissue knob to adjust the

position of the soft tissue filter.
If there is too little filtration turn the knob clock-
wise to increase the filtration.
If there is too much filtration turn the knob anti

(counter) clockwise to decrease the filtration.
8. After adjusting the position of the filter, the

new setting MUST be stored. See section:
Storing the filter positions in the memory.
After storing the new filter setting take another

exposure to check that the soft tissue filter is in
the correct position.
If it is not, readjust and save again as de-
scribed above.

Checking/adjusting the maximum filtration position

1. Use the same parameters and unit settings
that you used to check the beam alignment.
3. Push the forehead support IN as far as it will
go.
4. Rotate the soft tissue filter knob clockwise until
ALL FIVE leds on the ceph head support come
on (NOT FLASHING). This indicates maximum
filtration ( Last filter position ).
5. Protec yourself from radiation, and take an
exposure.
The edge of the curved soft tissue filter must
be level with the front of the forehead support
(The straight filter it must be 1 cm (3/8") away
from the forehead support).
If the soft tissue filter is NOT in the correct
position, adjust its position as follows.
7. Turn the soft tissue knob to adjust the position
of the soft tissue filter.
If there is too little filtration, turn the knob
clockwise to increase the filtration.
If there is too much filtration, turn the knob
anti(counter) clockwise to decrease the filtra-
tion.
8. After adjusting the position of the filter, the
new setting MUST be stored. See section:
Storing the filter positions in the memory.
After storing the new filter setting take another

exposure to check that the soft tissue filter is in
the correct position. If it is not, readjust and
save again as described above. The display
will clear briefly and the filter calibration menu
will reappear.

Storing the filter positions in the memory

The new filter positions MUST now be stored
permanently in memory. If they are not, the new
positions will be lost when the unit is switched off.
Forehead
support 1. Press the 0 key and then the E key to return to
the previous menu, and both the keys a
second time to return to the main (user's)
display.
Edge of the curved filter
Edge of the straight filter


4. Key in your password (number) using the keys

cates that the new filter positions have been
stored in memory.
5. Set the ceph magnification to the doctor's

requirements.

5. Setting the unit up for the user
Setting the user display language and the time

twice to enter the special program mode.
Enter program number and press E
9700 2. Key in the 9700 and press the E key to enter

the ceph system setup mode.
xxxx 3. Key in your password (number) using the keys

key The system setup menu will appear on the
display.

--- Installation setups:--------------
#7. More setups
#?.
#?. 6 4. Key in number 6 to select the interface lan-

guage menu and then press the E key. The
interface language menu will appear on the
display.

== User Interface language selection : 3

-- 0. Previous menu
-- 1. English
-- 2. Italiano
-- 3. Deutsch
-- 4. Suomi
-- 5. Français
-- 6. Polski
-- 7. Español
#?. 0
#?. (5) 6. Key in number of the language the user re-

quires, for example 5 is French and press the
E key. The user language will now appear in
the language selected.
0 7. Press the 0 key and then E key to return to the

previous menu.

--- Installation setups:--------------
#7. More setups
#?.
#?. 6 8. Key in number 5 to select the clock setup

menu and then press the E key. The clock
setup menu will appear on the display.

=== Clock Setup:===============================

DATE: 1997.09.23 Tu 14:39

#9. Saturday
#?:
#?. 1 8. Key in number 1 and then press the E key so

that you can set the date.
97.01.01 9. Key in the year, dot (period), the month, dot

(period), the day and then press the E key.
The last line of the clock setup menu will clear
which indicates that the date has been set.
#?. 2 10. Key in number 2 and then press the E key so

that you can set the time.
12.30 11. Key in hours (24 hour clock), dot (period), the
minutes and then press the E key. The last line
of the clock setup menu will clear which indi-
cates that the time has been set.
#?. 8 12. If the day is different to the one indicated, in

other time zones the day may be different and
you must reset the day.
Key in the number of the day you require and

0 13. The customer settings MUST now be stored in

memory.
Press the 0 key and then the E key to return to
0
the previous menu, and both the keys a
second time to return to the main (user's)
display.



xxxx
16. Key in your password (number) using the keys
cates that the new filter positions have been
stored in the memory.

Cassette identification
Cassette identification stickers

All the panoramic cassettes supplied with the unit
have cassette identification stickers attached to
them. These stickers allow the unit to "identify" the
Cass1
film/screen combination of the cassette. If
additional panoramic cassettes will be used with
Cassette identification the unit, you must attach an appropriate cassette
sticker identification sticker (supplied with the unit) to
each cassette.
Note that panoramic cassettes without identifica-
tion stickers will not operate with the unit.
Applying the cassette identification stickers

The stickers must be attached to the rear of the
cassette in the position shown in the picture be-
low. The stickers are for the following screens:
- Cass 1 sticker is for Kodak Lanex Medium

screens
- Cass 2 sticker is for Kodak Lanex Fine screens
- Cass 3 sticker is for Kodak Lanex Regular

screens
Cassette identification sticker
NOTE
If the customer wishes to use film/screen combi-
nations other than the recommended Kodak com-
binations, they must replace the existing combina-
tions.
A maximum of three film/screen combinations can
be used

The film/screen sensitivity number (S/N)

You must determine the sensitivity numbers for
every film/screen combination the user wishes to
use and program this information into the unit. By
doing this, you ensure that the optical density of
the image is correct for your imaging technique
and film processing system.
Determining the film/screen sensitivity number (S/N)

NOTE
The information messages in the following instruc-
tions will only appear if a setting is incorrect. If the
correct setting has already been selected the
information message will NOT appear on the
display.
1. Switch the X-ray on with the power switch (0/I).
2. Press the RETURN button or the E key to

drive the C-arm to the ready position.
Insert cassette
3. Slide a panoramic cassette, loaded with unex-

posed film, into the cassette carriage. Make
sure that the identification sticker is at the top.
Identification sticker
Cassette head
Cassette
Cassette carriage
Cassette
The cassette is in the correct position when

the end of the cassette is level with the indica-
Indicator slot tor slot in the cassette carriage.

4. Press the Menu selection key repeatedly until

the set cassette sensitivity program appears
on the left-hand side of the display.
Select procedure
5. Press the key next to the program to select it.

A frame will appear around the program text.
Adjust sensitivity number (SN)
6. Select the sensitivity number calibration pro-

gram by pressing the program key on the right-
hand side of the control panel. A frame will
appear around the program text and a series
of bars will appear on the display.
Set chin-rest to lower position
7. Set the chin rest so that it is in the lower posi-

tion. Do this by sliding the positioning knob to
the right, pushing it down as far as it will go
and then sliding the positioning knob to the left
to lock the chin rest in position.
Lower position
Chinrest
Positioning knob

Aperture 2 is selected automatically
9. Attach the brass radiation filter to the tube

head assembly (positioning marks on the tube
head filtration label indicate where the radia-
tion filter must be placed).
NOTE
If you forget to use the radiation filter, all the
density bars on the test exposure will be black.
Magnetic pads Tube head filtration label
Radiation filter Positioning marks

NOTE - CEPH UNITS ONLY

Remove soft tissue filter
If the unit is a ceph version, the soft tissue filter
must be in the No filtration position.
To do this, turn the soft tissue knob anticlockwise
as far as it will go. All the green lights on the ceph
unit will go out.
Decrease Increase
filtration filtration

(With right-hand ceph units the knob is
Tube head assembly on the other side)
Close cassette shields
10. If the cassette shields are open, close them by

pushing the shield knob to the left as far as it
will go.

Set cassette head to normal position
11. Slide the cassette carriage back to the normal

position.
Close mirror
12. Close the positioning mirror if it is open.
WARNING 13. Move at least two metres away from the X-ray
Radiation unit and protect yourself from radiation. Press
generated and hold down the exposure button on the
remote control for the duration of the expo-
sure. During the exposure cycle you will hear
an audible signal and the radiation warning
lights will come on when radiation is gener-
ated.
14. When the exposure cycle is finished lift the

cassette slightly and remove it from the cas-
sette carriage. Process the film.
15. Press the RETURN button or the E key.

16. On the calibration radiograph there will be a

series of vertical bars each at a different den-
sity. Select the bar with a density of between
1.2 and 1.5. This can be done either with a
densitometer or with the reference radiograph
supplied with the unit.
To select the correct density using the refer-
ence radiograph, compare the reference radio-
graph with the calibration radiograph (the
radiograph you have just taken) and decide
which bar on the calibration radiograph has a
density closest to the bar marked (density
between 1.2 and 1.5) on the reference radio-
graph. Determine the number of the bar on the
calibration radiograph by counting the bars
from the darkest one on the right-hand side.
The picture on the display indicates the posi-
tion of the numbers.
Lightest Darkest
L
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Density bars

17. Select the number of the cassette that you are

calibrating by pressing the appropriate cas-
sette key. Cassette sensitivity numbers will
appear on bottom row of the display.
SN 18. Press either of the sensitivity number keys to

8 until the number of the density bar you se-
lected from the film appears on the display.
19. Press the save sensitivity number key. It is on

the right-hand side of the display.
Press E to accept
20. Press the E (Enter) key to accept the value.
21. Repeat the above procedure with the other

film screen combinations.
22. When you have finished calibrating the cas-

sette sensitivity numbers, remove the radiation
filter.

6. Symbols, markings that appear on the unit
Symbols, markings that appear on the unit
I On (power)
Power on symbol
0 Off (power)
Power off symbol
Radiographic control
Exposure button symbol
Stand-by or preparatory state for a part of equip-

ment
Exposure button enabled (unlocked) symbol
"Off" only for a part of equipment

Exposure button disabled (locked) symbol
Handheld switch
This symbol identifies the connector for the expo-
sure switch.
This symbol identifies the connector for an exter-

nal exposure warning device.
Attention, consult accompanying documents

The RS232C connector for a PC. See also the
section "Warnings and precautions"
This symbol and the letter R (Return) identify the

return button. Press this button to return the C-
arm to the patient in/out (PIO) position.
Ionizing radiation
Radiation symbol. Appears on the display during
an exposure when radiation is generated.
Connection point for the neutral conductor on

permanently installed equipment.
Connection point for the live conductor on perma-

nently installed equipment.
Alternating current
Protective earth (ground)

Earth (ground)
Dangerous voltage
Type B equipment
CE (0537) symbol
MDD 93/42/EEC
UL Classification Symbol
DENTAL X-RAY EQUIPMENT MODEL SRC1

CLASSIFIED BY UNDERWRITERS
LABORATORIES INC.
WITH RESPECT TO ELECTRIC
SHOCK, FIRE, MECHANICAL AND
OTHER SPECIFIED HAZARDS ONLY
IN ACCORDANCE WITH UL 2601-1 AND
CAN/CSA C22.2 NO 601.1 - M90
5D42
The enter (E) key. Press this key to return the C-

arm to the patient in/out (PIO) position.
The clear (C) key. Press this key to remove infor-

mation from the display
The up and down arrows are on the height

adjusting keys and indicate the direction of travel.
The left and right arrows are on the focal trough

positioning keys and indicate the direction of
travel.
This symbol indicates that the waste of electrical

and electronic equipment must not be disposed as
unsorted municipal waste and must be collected
separately. Please contact an authorized
representative of the manufacturer for information
concerning the decommissioning of your
equipment.

Symbols that appear on the aperture labels
Standard metric version

3 Low filtration tomography aperture
4 High filtration tomography aperture
5 Asymmetric vertical aperture for 18 x 24 cm
film
film
7 Symmetric vertical aperture for 18 x 24 cm
film
film.

Large metric version

5 Symmetric vertical aperture for 24 x 30 cm film
film
film.
Inch version

5 Asymmetric vertical aperture for 8 x 10 in film.
6 Symmetric vertical aperture for 8 x 10 in film.
7 Asymmetric horizontal aperture for 8 x 10 in
film.

7. Technical specifications
Type
SRC-1
Classification
Complies with IEC 60601-1/1995, IEC 60601-2-7/1998, IEC 60601-2-28/1993,
IEC 60601-2-32/1994, IEC 878,
UL 2601-1/1997 (for products with UL Classification Mark) and EN 55011
standards.
Complies with DHHS Radiation Performance Standard, 21CFR Subchapter J.
Safety according to IEC 60601-1
Protection against electric shock - Class I
Degree of protection - Type B applied parts with no conductive connection to
patient
Protection against ingress of liquids - IPX 0
Disinfection methods:
• mild soapy water
• non-alcohol based disinfectant for the chin rest
• disposable plastic covers for bite piece/chin support
For use in environments where no flammable anaesthetics and/or flammable
cleaning agents are present.
Mode of operation - continuous operation/intermittent loading
Description
A dental panoramic/cephalometric unit with a high frequency switching mode x-ray
generator. In addition to panoramic exposures, the unit can also take tomograms
and scanograms. An optional cephalometric device is available that uses the
panoramic x-ray source.
Generator
TUBE
• OPX 105/S
FOCAL SPOT Tube housing assembly
• 0,5 IEC 336
TARGET ANGLE Longditudinal
• 5º axis of the tube
TARGET MATERIAL
• Tungsten
Target
Target angle 5º
Reference axis

OPERATING TUBE POTENTIAL

• Panoramic 57 - 81 kV (±1 kV) R'10
• Cephalometric 60 - 85 kV (±1 kV) R'10
• Maximum (nominal) 85 kV, 10 mA
OPERATING TUBE CURRENT
• 1 mA to 10 mA (average values, peak value 15 mA maximum) R'10
• maximum 10 mA at 85 kV
NOMINAL ANODE INPUT POWER
• 810 W nominal at 85 kV, 10 mA
MAXIMUM OUTPUT POWER (ANODE OUTPUT POWER)
• 850 W nominal at 85 kV, 10 mA, 0.1 sec.
REFERENCE CURRENT TIME PRODUCT
• 3.2 mAs at 60 kV, 10 mA, 0.32 s
FILTRATION
• Inherent filtration minimum 2.5 mm Al at 70 kV
• Total filtration (Pan, Scano, Ceph and TMJ Scano) > 2.7 mm Al at 70 kV
• Additional tomo aperture 3 filtration: minimum 3.0 mm Al at 47 kV
• Additional tomo aperture 4 filtration: minimum 8.4 mm Al at 47 kV
• Patient support attenuation equivalent: less than 0.2 mm Al
BEAM QUALITY
• HVL (Pan, Scano, Ceph and TMJ scano) minimum 3.1 mm Al at 70 kV
• HVL, tomo aperture 3, minimum 2.1 mm Al at 47 kV
• HVL, tomo aperture 4, minimum 3.2 mm Al at 47 kV
PRIMARY PROTECTIVE SHIELDING
• Minimum 0.5 mm Pb or equivalent
OUTER SHELL TEMPERATURE
• +50ºC (122ºF) maximum
DUTY CYCLE
• Panoramic: 1:15, 81 kV/10mA
• Cephalometric: 1:15, 85 kV/10mA
Power requirements
INPUT VOLTAGE
• 115/230 VAC (±10%), 50/60 Hz single phase
LINE CURRENT
• Long-term: 115/230 VAC, 1A (cont.)
• Momentary: 115/230 VAC, 16A /10A, 60/50hz
MAXIMUM LINE RESISTANCE
• 1 ohm
MAXIMUM LINE FUSING
• 16 A slow (main fuse 10A slow in device) @ 230 VAC
• 25 A slow (main fuse 16A slow in device) @ 115 VAC
LINE SAFETY SWITCH (when required)
• Approved type, min. 10 A 250 VAC
EARTH LEAKAGE CIRCUIT BREAKER (when required)
• Approved type, min. 16 A 250 VAC, breaker activation leakage current in
accordance with local regulations.

Mechanical parameters
PANORAMIC
• SID 560 mm (±20 mm)
• Magnification factor from 1.25 to 1.5
CEPHALOMETRIC
• SID 1654.4 (range 1632 – 1707 mm)
• SOD (Source Object Distance) 1472.4 mm
• Magnification factor 1.1236 (range 1.09 – 1.14)
WEIGHT
• Pan 150 kg
• Pan/Ceph 160 kg
DIMENSIONS
• Pan (HxWxD) 2405 x 1000 x 1480 mm (90" x 40" x 58")
• Pan/Ceph (HxWxD) 2405 x 1868 x 1480 mm (90" x 74" x 58")
VERTICAL HEIGHT OF CHIN REST
• 984 – 1774 mm (39" – 70")
Cassettes
PANORAMIC
• 15 x 30 cm (6" x 12") or 24 x 30 cm (10" x 12") with optional hardware
CEPHALOMETRIC
• 18 x 24 cm, 24 x 30 cm, and 8" x 10"
Film/screen combinations and image receptors

CASS1
• Medium
CASS3
• Regular
IMAGE PLATES
• all types of imaging plates intended for extra oral imaging
Timer
EXPOSURE TIMES:
• Panoramic 12 - 24 sec
• Scanograms 6 - 24 sec
• Tomograms 14 - 56 sec
• Cephalometric 0.32 - 3.2 sec R'10
SINGLE LOAD RATING
• 81 kV, 10 mA, 24 sec. panoramic
SERIAL LOAD RATING
• 4 partial tomograms at 81 kV, 6.4 mA, 14 sec. each at 1 sec. intervals

Leakage technique factors

PANORAMIC
• 81 kV, 2400 mAs/h (81 kV, 10 mA, duty cycle 1:15, for example normal
exposure per 4 minutes cool-down period)
CEPHALOMETRIC
• 85 kV, 2250 mAs/h (85 kV, 10 mA, duty cycle 1:16, for example 3.2 s
exposure per 1 minute cool-down period)
Measurement bases
• The kV is measured by monitoring differentially the current flowing
through 450 Mohm, 1% feedback resistors connected between the tube
anode/cathode and ground.
• The mA is measured by monitoring current in the HT return line, which
equals the tube current.
Tube housing assembly cooling/heating characteristics
MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS HEAT DISSIPATION OF X-RAY TUBE

ASSEMBLY:
• 27 W

Collimator
Six collimators are available:
• Standard metric, left and right-hand versions

Features: adult panoramic slit, child panoramic slit, two tomography
apertures, 18 x 24 cm AV aperture, 18 x 24 cm AH aperture, 18 x 24 cm
SV aperture, and a 24 x 30 cm AV aperture.
• Large metric, left and right-hand versions

apertures, 24 x 30 cm SV aperture, 24 x 30 cm AV aperture, and a 24 x
30 cm AH aperture.
• Inch size, left and right-hand versions

apertures, three apertures: 8 x 10 in AV , 8 x 10 in SV, and 8 x 10 in AH.
The collimator apertures are automatically selected according to the selected

imaging program. The tomography apertures 3 or 4 can be selected manually for
any tomographic imaging program.
Environmental data
Operating
• ambient temperature from +10ºC to +40ºC
• relative humidity 10 to 95% no condensation
Storage/transportation
• ambient temperature from -25º to +50ºC
• relative humidity 5 to 90% no condensation
• atmospheric pressure 500 - 1080 mbar
Recommended PC and interface specifications

For use with Cranex Tome, Digora PCT Imaging Plate system, and Digora for
Windows software:
• Windows 2000 or XP OS
• 512 MB RAM, > 20 GB HDD
• 32 MB Video RAM
• Pentium 4 processor or similar
• one available COM-port or USB-RS adapter (for Cranex Tome)
• one Ethernet 10/100 Base-T network adapter (for Digora PCT)
• 19" CRT, 17" TFT LCD or touch panel with 1280 x 1024 pixel true colour
display (min. resolution 1024 x 768 pixels with Digora for Windows),
• For Cranex Tome use only, any Pentium PC with a min. display resolution
of 800 x 600 pixels is sufficient.

N.B.
• Always connect the PC to a separate electric power source
• Locate the PC at least 1.5 m (59") from the nearest part of the Cranex
Tome power unit
• The PC must be certified according to the IEC 60950 standard
• Multiple portable socket outlets must not be placed on the floor
• Additional multiple portable socket outlets or extension cables must not
be connected to the system. Items that are not specified as part of the
system must also not be connected as they may pose a threat to
operational safety
• Multiple portable socket outlets provided with the system must only be
used for supplying power to equipment intended to form part of the
system
Tube rating chart
Anode thermal characteristics OPX/105

Unit dimensions

Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration – electromagnetic emissions

The TOME is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The
customer or the user of the TOME should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Emissions test Compliance Electromagnetic environment - guidance
RF emissions Group 1 The TOME uses RF energy only for its internal
CISPR 11 function. Therefore, its RF emissions are very low and
are not likely to cause any interference in nearby
electronic equipment.
RF emissions Class B The TOME is suitable for use in all establishments,
CISPR 11 including domestic establishments and those directly
Harmonic Class A connected to the public low-voltage power supply
emissions network that supplies buildings used for domestic
IEC 61000-3-2 purposes.
Voltage Complies
fluctuations/ flicker
emissions
IEC 61000-3-3

Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration – electromagnetic immunity

Immunity test IEC 60601 test level Compliance level Electromagnetic
environment - guidance
Electrostatic ±6 kV contact ±6 kV contact Floors should be wood,
discharge (ESD) concrete or ceramic tile.
IEC 61000-4-2 ±8 kV air ±8 kV air If floors are covered with
synthetic material, the
relative humidity should
be at least 30 %.
Electrical fast ±2 kV for power supply ±2 kV for power Mains power quality
transients/bursts lines supply lines should be that of a
IEC 61000-4-4 ±1 kV for input/output ±1 kV for typical commercial or
lines input/output lines hospital environment.
Surge ±1 kV differential mode ±1 kV differential Mains power quality
IEC 61000-4-5 ±2 kV common mode mode should be that of a
±2 kV common typical commercial or
mode hospital environment.
Voltage dips, <5 % UT <5 % UT Mains power quality
short (>95 % dip in UT) (>95 % dip in UT) should be that of a
interruptions and for 0.5 cycle for 0.5 cycle typical commercial or
voltage variations hospital environment. If
on power supply 40 % UT 40 % UT user of the TOME
lines (60 % dip in UT) (60 % dip in UT) requires continued
IEC 61000-4-11 for 5 cycles for 5 cycles operation during power
mains interruptions, it is
70 % UT 70 % UT recommended that the
(30 % dip in UT) (30 % dip in UT) TOME be powered from
for 25 cycles for 25 cycles an uninterruptible power
supply or a battery.
<5 % UT <5 % UT
(>95 % dip in UT) (>95 % dip in UT)
for 5 sec for 5 sec
Power frequency 3 A/m 3 A/m Power frequency
(50/60 Hz) magnetic field should be
magnetic field at levels characteristic
IEC 61000-4-8 of a typical location in a
typical commercial or
hospital environment.
NOTE UT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.

Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration – electromagnetic immunity

Immunity IEC 60601 test Compliance Electromagnetic environment - guidance
test level level
Portable and mobile RF communications
equipment should be used no closer to any
part of the TOME, including cables, than the
recommended separation distance calculated
from the equation applicable to the frequency
of the transmitter.
Recommended separation distance

Conducted 3 Vrms 3V d = 1.2 P
RF 150 kHz to
IEC 61000- 80 MHz d = 1.2 P 80 MHz to 800 MHz
4-6
d = 2.3 P 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
Radiated 3 V/m 3 V/m
where P is the maximum output power rating
RF 80 MHz to
of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the
IEC 61000- 2.5 GHz
transmitter manufacturer and d is the
4-3
recommended separation distance in
metres (m).
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, as
determined by an electromagnetic site survey,
a
should be less than the compliance level in
b
each frequency range.
Interference may occur in the vicinity of
equipment marked with the following symbol:
NOTE 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is
affected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.
a
Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless)
telephones and land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV
broadcast cannot be predicated theoretically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic
environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be considered.
If the measured field strength in the location in which the TOME is used exceeds the applicable
RF compliance level above, the TOME should be observed to verify normal operation. If
abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as reorienting
of relocating the TOME.
b
Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strengths should be less than 3 V/m.

Recommended separation distances between portable and mobile RF communications

equipment and the TOME.
The TOME is intended for use in an electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF
disturbances are controlled. The customer or the user of the TOME can help prevent
electromagnetic interference by maintaining a minimum distance between portable and
mobile RF communications equipment (transmitters) and the TOME as recommended below,
according to the maximum output power of the communications equipment.
Rated maximum Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter m
output power of 150 kHz to 80 MHz 80 MHz to 800 MHz 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
transmitter W d = 1.2 P d = 1.2 P d = 2.3 P
0.01 0.12 0.12 0.23
0.1 0.38 0.38 0.73
1 1.2 1.2 2.3
10 3.8 3.8 7.3
100 12 12 23
For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended
separation distance d in meters (m) can be estimated using the equation applicable to the
frequency of the transmitter, where P is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter
in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer.
NOTE 1. At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range
applies.
NOTE 2. These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is
affected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.

Changes to New Model
New model from serial number S/N X52001 (October 2005)
The following chapters describe the new

components and modifications pertaining to units
from serial number S/N X52001 onwards and
which were delivered after October 2005.
The main new features are:
• Automated primary and secondary collimators

• Z-Motor type AC instead of DC
• Important: The 230 V and 115 V units are
separate units. The mains input voltage cannot
be modified in the field due to the Z-motor
• Internal power supply type linear instead of
switched mode
• Cephalometric cassette detection system
simplified with one micro switch only
• Panoramic and cephalometric patient holder
mechanics modified
• Optional graphic user interface (GUI) running
on PC can be connected via RS-232 serial
cable
• Optional large cassette holder 24x30 cm/
10x12" available for panoramic imaging
Service Manual 8200629 C-1

Table of Contents
The main parts and assemblies of the Tome Pan ...........................................C-3

The main parts and assemplies of the Tome Pan /Ceph ................................C-4
Circuit board location .........................................................................................C-5
Cephalostat circuit board ..................................................................................C-7
Identifying the unit version ................................................................................C-8
Introduction .........................................................................................................C-9
Circuit boards
N200-1 Auxiliary Voltage Supply (AVS) .......................................................... C-10

N301 Z-Motor Controller (ZMC) ................................................................... C-14
N800 External Connectors Interface (ECI) ................................................. C-18
N900 Connector unit (CU2) .......................................................................... C-19
N1400 Tubehead Controller (THC) ................................................................ C-20
N1701 Ceph Interface (CI) .............................................................................. C-22
N2001 Line Interface Unit (LIU) ..................................................................... C-24
N2670 Standard Metric (SM) .......................................................................... C-26
N2671 Inch (In) ................................................................................................ C-27
N2672 Large Metric (LM) ................................................................................ C-28
N2700 Secondary Motor Controller (SMC) ................................................... C-29
N2750 Primary Slit Motor Driver (PMD) ......................................................... C-37
N2800 Secondary Slit Motor Driver (SMD) ................................................... C-43
Service code descriptions .............................................................................. C-51
Wiring diagrams
N2750 Secondary Motor Controller (SMC) ................................................... C-33

N2750 Primary Slit Motor Driver (PMD) ......................................................... C-39
N2800 Secondary Slit Motor Driver (SMD) ................................................... C-47
C-2 Service Manual 8200629

The main parts and assemblies of the Tome Pan
Support arm Sliding assembly Head support
Rotating
assembly
C-arm Rotating
unit
On/off switch
Tube head
C-arm
Cassette head assembly
Control panel
Moving column
Fixed column
Patient support mechanism

The main parts and assemblies of the Tome Pan /Ceph
Ceph head support Ceph arm
Cassette holder

Circuit board location


Cephalostat circuit board

The unit type/serial number label is located at the

rear of the unit, on the right-hand side, above the
main power cable. The type number allows the
version of the unit to be identified.

00 General (English) 07 Russia
01 UK only 08 Italy
02 Germany 09 Spain
03 USA 10 Portugal
04 Australia 2X OEM version
05 France 3X OEM version
X-ray tube version

0 OPX/105
1 DE 100/15ö
2 D-051
3 XL 90

1 Left-hand ceph – standard metric cassettes
2 Left-hand ceph – large metric cassettes
3 Left-hand ceph – inch size cassettes
4 Right-hand ceph – standard metric cassettes
5 Right-hand ceph – large metric cassettes
6 Right-hand ceph – inch size cassettes

Introduction
The following chapters describe the new

components and modifications pertaining to units
from serial number S/N X52001 onwards and
which were delivered after October 2005.

Appendix C: Changes to Facelift model
To N2700 To N2750 To N1100 To N1000
PGND
PGND
HPA
HPA
HPB
HPB
4 * AWG18
POWGND1
SLVSEL0
SLVSEL1
SLVSEL2
SLVSEL3
MRESET*
FILTPOS
SENSPOW
CSTEP0
CSTEP1
CSTEP2
CSTEP3
ANGND1
MOSIA
MOSIB
MISOA
MISOB
SCLKA
SCLKB
+19V1
-19V1
TOMOA
+28V
+9V1
GND1
GND1
GND POINT 9 GND POINT 9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
J2801
CODE 4800780
SECONDARY SLIT SEC SLIT SSSENS11* 1 J1204 LATCH-26 J2803 1 SSMOTOR1 SEC
IN NARROW BEAM POS SENS 1 GND1 2 MODUIIB-1X2M90 MODUIIB-1X2M 2 SSMOTOR2 SLIT
MOTOR
J10
1
2
5
6
POSITION
SECONDARY SLIT
J1205 MOTOR DRIVER
METRI-6F
MODUIIB-1X2M
MODUIIB-1X2M
SECONDARY SLIT SEC SLIT NO SSSENS21* 1
GND1 METRI-6M
IN TOMOGRAPHY POS SENS 2 C 2 MODUIIB-1X2M90
(SMD) N2800
J2805
J2804
POSITION
1
2
5
6
SYSTEM GROUND
J2802
(FANDIS*)
IS CONNECTED
SLVSEL9*
MRESET*
SENSPOW
TUBEHOT
POWGND1
POWGND1
FILTPOS
PGND
LATCH-26 TO PGND ONLY
F1GATE
POWGND
F2GATE
POWGND
SCLKA
SCLKB
MOSI1
MOSIB
MISOA
MISOB
+28V1
+28V1
+19V1
ANGND
-19V1
ANGND
ANGND
ANGND
ANGND
FILFB
ANGND
IN TUBEHEAD
GND1
GND1
AVC1
+9V1
GND1
KVFB
MAFB
HPA
HPA
HPB
HPB
GND POINT 10
SSSENS1*
SSSENS2*
POWGND1
SLVSEL0
SLVSEL1
SLVSEL2
SLVSEL3
MRESET*
FILTPOS
SENSPOW
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
4 * ZL2019
CSTEP0
CSTEP1
CSTEP2
CSTEP3
ANGND1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
MOSIA
MOSIB
MISOA
MISOB
SCLKA
SCLKB
+19V1
-19V1
TOMOA
+28V
+9V1
GND1
GND1
GND1
GND1
J1401 12
LATCH-40
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
S11A 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
1
2
S21A 2 J1405 11
J1201
J1205
MODUIIB-1X2M
J1204
MODUIIB-1X2M
S31A 3 MODUIIB-1X4M
LATCH-26 S41A 4
10
FIXED
ANODE
9 TUBE
HEAD
CH1IN 1 J1202 1 CPOS1* NO CASS HEAD CASS HEAD 1 AGND1 1 (TH)
AUTOMATIC INTRES 2 2 GND1 C IN NORMAL 2 TUBEHOT 2
EXPOSURE CH2IN 3
MODUIIB-1X2M POS SENS 1
IMAGING POS 3 KVFB+ 3 N1500
SENSORS CH3IN 4 J1402 4 KVFB- 4
N1300 CH4IN 5 J1203 1 CPOS2* NO CASS HEAD CASS HEAD MODUIIB-1X8M 5 MAFB+ 5
ANGND1 6 MODUIIB-1X2M 2 GND1 C IN POSITION 4DIN 6 FILV 6
J1207 POS SENS 2
OR IN CEPH POS SLVADDR 9 7 F2 7
MODUIIB-12X1M 8 F1 8
AEC IS CH5IN 7 J1206 1 SENSPOW SLIT
OPTIONAL CH6IN 8 MODUIIB-1X4M 2 CTO* J2401 N2400
CASS POSITION SENSORS
+15V 9 CT1* MODUIIB-1X4M90 TYPE
-15V 10 GND1 SENSOR J1404 1 INT28V COOLING
ANGND1 11 MODUIIB-1X2M 2 FAN3-
ANGND1 12 TUBEHEAD FAN 3
1 FM+5V
2 FMMRESET* CONTROLLER
ANGND
J1211
3
4
FMMOSI
FMMISO
OPTIONAL
FILM
(THC) 1 +5V 3
MODUIIB-1X8M 5 FMSCLK MARKER N1200 J1403 2 FILTPOS 2
FILTER
SENSOR
6 FMSLVSEL14* MODUIIB-1X4M 3 GND1 1
NO RETURN* 1 7 GND1 PnP 4
RETURN
BUTTON C GND1 2 J1210 8 GND1
(RTNLIGHT) 3 MODUIIB-1X4M
GND1 4
1 SENSPOW
9 DIN J1208 2 SSSENS1* J2501 N2500
CASS
2 DOT MODUIIB-1X4M 3 SSSENS2* MODUIIB-1X4M90 CADRIAGE
6 ANIN 4 GND1 SENSORS
SLVADDR 11-14
1 CSTEP0
CASS HEAD 2 CSTEP1 CASS
STEP
3 CSTEP2
CONTROLLER J1209 4 CSTEP3 MOTOR
(CHC) MODUIIB-1X8M 5
6
N1200 7
Wiring diagram 1/3
8

To N900
PGND
POWGND1
SLVSEL0
SLVSEL1
SLVSEL2
SLVSEL3
MRESET*
FILTPOS
SENSPOW
CSTEP0
CSTEP1
CSTEP2
CSTEP3
ANGND1
MOSIA
MOSIB
MISOA
MISOB
SCLKA
SCLKB
+19V1
-19V1
TOMOA
+28V
+9V1
GND1
GND1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
J2704 1 KEY2
LATCH-26 2 KEY1
1 +28V1 1 3 GND1 PRIMARY SLIT
2 POWGND1 2 J2754 4 CK
POSITION
3 +28V1 3 MODUIIB-1X8M 5 POS1
4
5
POWGND
KEY1
4
5
6
7
POS2
POS3
DISPLAY UNIT
RXD 1 6 KEY2 6 8 POS4
SERVICE TXD 2 J2701 7 S11 7 9 POS5
CONNECTOR GND 3 MODUIIB-1X4M 8 S21 8 10 POS6 N2670
(RS232 PORT) 4 9
10
S31
S41
9
10
11
12
POS7
POS8 (N2671)
11
12
+5V
GND1
11
12
13
14
CHGND
CHGND
(N2672)
J2702 13 +5V 13 J2751
LATCH-26 14 GND1 14 LATCH-26
15 HOME* 15 CHGND
16 GND1 16 DISPLAY UNIT'S
17 SENSPOW 17 RFI-SHIELD AND
18 GND1 18 PLATED EMC-FILTERS
19 HICUR 19 MOUNTING CHGND GROUNDING TO
20 GND1 20 HOLES CHASSIS GROUND
21 CLK 21 (3PCS) WITH MOUNTING
MOSI 1 22 GND1 22 SCREWS
+5V 2 23 DIR 23 CHGND
GND 3 24 GND1 24
SERVICE GND 4 25 ENA 25
CONNECTOR AVRRST* 5 J2703 26 GND1 26
(ISP PORT) GND 6 2X5PIN
SCLK 7 PRIMARY & SECONDARY
GND 8 SLIT MOTOR'S MCU
MISO 9 SLIT POSITION
SENSOR'S DECODER
J2755 1 HOME* NO PRIM SLIT PRIMARY SLIT
GND 10 SLVADDR 8 MODUIIB-1X2M 2 GND1 C HOME POS IN HOME
POSITION
SECONDARY MOTOR PRIMARY SLIT
CONTROLLER MOTOR DRIVER 1 PH1-A PRIM
(SMC) (PMD) J2752 2 PH1-B SLIT
3 PH2-A
N2700 N2750 MODUIIB-1X4M
4 PH2-B
STEP
MOTOR
J2753
J2705 MODUIIB-1X6M
LATCH-26
1
2
3
4
5
6
S11A
S21A
S31A
S41A
DGND
DGND
CODE 4800765
POWGND1
SLVSEL0
SLVSEL1
SLVSEL2
SLVSEL3
MRESET*
FILTPOS
SENSPOW
CSTEP0
CSTEP1
CSTEP2
CSTEP3
ANGND1
MOSIA
MOSIB
MISOA
MISOB
SCLKA
SCLKB
+19V1
-19V1
TOMOA
+28V
+9V1
GND1
GND1
PGND
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
To N2800 To N1400
Wiring diagram 2/3

L AC1 AC1 AC1

LINE FUSE
N RFI-FILTER AC2 AC2 AC2
N2001 HPA
PGND (LIU)
PGND FIRST
SIGNALS THAT ARE N1000
COMMON WITH DIFFERENT (HVS)
AC1 GROUNDING POINT
GROUNDING GROUPS:
- SPI COMM. (RS-485) HPB
ISOLATED AC2 - SPI ADDRESSES
AC-MOTOR - MRESET*
DRIVER - EXPOSURE CONTROL
- Z-MOTOR SPEED REFS
AVS PRIMARY SIDE
GROUNDING - Z-MOTOR LIMIT SIGNALS
POWER CIRCUITS
GROUP 3 - EXP. LIGHT CONTROL
(Z-MOTOR GROUNDING GROUP 1
POWGND1
ANGND1
CONTROLLER) (ROTATING AND
+28V1
+19V1
-19V1
VERTICAL PARTS)
+9V1
GND1
N200-1
POWGND
ANGND-
N301
ANGND
(AVS)
+28V
+19V
119V
(ZMC)
+9V
GND
+28V3 +28V +28V +28V1 +28V1 +28V1
POWGND3 POWGND POWGND POWGND1 POWGND1 POWGND1
+9V3 +9V +9V +9V1 N100 +9V1 N900 +9V1 N1100

GND3 GND +28V GND1
(CU1) GND1
(CU2) GND1
(HVC)
+19V +19V +19V1 +19V1 +19V1
ANGND ANGND
ANGND1 ANGND1 ANGND1
ANGND- ANGND-
-19V -19V -19V1 -19V1 MAIN LOADS: -19V1

MAIN LOADS: POS. LIGHTS
- Z-MOTOR
- EXP-LIGHTS
-19V1
+19V1
GND1
+9V1
POWGND1
+28V1
-19V1
+19V1
GND1
+9V1
POWGND1
+28V1
ANGND1
ANGND1
ANGND2
+28V2
POWGND2
+9V2
GND2
+19V2
-19V2
GROUNDING GROUP 2
(LOWER PART OF
TELESCOPE AND CEPH)
+28V1
(NEAR TUBEHEAD)
N2700
N2750 POWGND1 (SMC)
+9V2 (PSMD)
N100 MAIN LOADS:
N1700 GND2 (CU1) SLIT DRIVER
(CI) MAIN LOADS:
PRIM. SLIT N1400
STEP MOTOR (THC)
-19V1
+19V1
GND1
+9V1
POWGND1
+28V1
ANGND1
ANGND2
+28V2
POWGND2
+9V2
GND2
+19V2
-19V2
+9V2 +28V2
N2800
N1600 GND2 POWGND2 (SSMD)
(DKI) MAIN LOADS:
+19V2 N600 +9V2 N700 SEC. SLIT DC-MOTOR
ANGND2
(IMC) GND2
(MC)
-19V1
+19V1
GND1
+9V1
POWGND1
+28V1
ANGND1
ANGND1
+19V2
SYSTEM
HPB
HPA
ANGND2 GROUNDING
+28V2 MAIN LOADS: POINT
-19V2 - 5 STEP MOT
+5V POWER
POWGND2 - POS.LIGHTS
ISOLATED
N800 N1200
(ECI) +9V2 (CHC) N1500
GND2
(TH)
Wiring diagram 3/3


N200-1 Auxiliary Voltage Supply (AVS)
Location
At the top of the support arm. To access, remove
the top cover.

• Fuse F1 – 3.2 AT, 250 VAC @ 230 VAC mains
– 6.3 AT, 250 VAC @ 115 VAC mains
• Fuse F2 – 1 AT, 250 VAC
• Fuse F3 – 1.6 AT, 250 VAC
• Fuse F4 – 2 AT, 250 VAC
• Fuse F5 – 3.2 AT, 250 VAC
• Fuse F6 – 3.2 AT, 250 VAC
• Fuse F7 – 3.2 AT, 250 VAC
N.B. There is a 10AT, 250 VAC fuse between

transformer T1 and board N200-1.
All fuses are 6.3 mm x 32 mm.

Warning!
Replace only with the same type and rating of use.
• Cooling fan 24VDC. Part number 4800955.
Description
The N200-1 Auxiliary Voltage Supply board and
transformer T1 produces all the low power supply
voltages for the unit. From the mains voltage it
generates +28VDC, +9VDC, +19VDC and
-19VDC low power supply voltages.
The mains voltage (115 or 230 VAC) is supplied to

the transformer T1.
N.B.
Select 115 or 230 VAC operation by connecting
the transformer connector either to J212 for 230
VAC operation or to J210 for 115 VAC operation.
See also N1000 board description.
The N200-1 Auxiliary Voltage Supply board is a

low-noise (EMC), linear type power supply.

Indicator LED‘s
D11 Green +9V
D12 Green -19V
D13 Green +19V
D14 Green +28V
D24 Green +28V1
D25 Green +28V2
D26 Green +28V3
Test points
TP1 GND Gnd for +9V
TP2 +9V -
TP3 ANGND Gnd for +/-19V
TP4 -19V -
TP5 +19V -
TP6 “28V” 35-48VDC
TP7 POWGND Gnd for +28V
TP16 NETV Signal proportional to mains voltage
Under or over voltage detection (mains)
TP17 Pfail Not in use
Connectors
J201
1 AC Mains voltage
J202
1 AC Mains voltage
J204
1 +28V1 -
4 POWGND -
J205
1 +28V2 -
4 POWGND -

J206
1,2 +9V2 -
3-5 GND2 -
6 +9V1 -
7,8 GND1 -
9 +19V2 -
10 +19V1 -
11,12 ANGND2 -
13 -19V2 -
14 -19V1 -
15,16 ANGND1 -
17 (sync) Not used
18 PFAIL* Not used, fixed
20,21 SREF1,2 Analog signal to control up/down Z-movement
22,23 (ON1,2) Not used
26 EXPLGHT* Signal which activates exposure lights
J207
1,2,3 +28V3 -
6,7,8 POWGND -
J208
1,2 +9V Logic supply voltage
3,4 GND Logic GND
5 +19V Logic supply voltage
6 ANGND Not used
7 -19V Logic supply voltage
10 (ON1) Not used
11 (ON2) Not used
14 EXPLGHT* Signal which activates exposure lights
J209
1 +24V Cooling fan
2 POWGND Cooling fan

J210
1,5 115VAC To transformer T1
2,6 115VAC To transformer T1
J211
1 GND Chassis GND
J212
1 230VAC To transformer T1
2,5 — 2 and 5 connected together, to transformer T1
6 230VAC To transformer T1
J213
1 AC Mains voltage to N301 Z-motor controller
J214
1 AC Mains voltage to N301 Z-motor controller
J215
1 12VAC From transformer T1
J216
J217
J218
1 +24VDC Cooling fan (Optional)
2 POWGND Cooling fan (Optional)

N200-1 schematics

N200-1 silkscreen drawing

N301 Z-Motor Controller (ZMC)
Location
At the top of the support arm. To access, remove the
top cover.

Replaceable motor fuse.
Fuse F1:
• 2 AT, 250 VAC @ 230 VAC mains
Size 6.3 mm x 32 mm
Warning!
Description
The N301 Z-Motor (AC-synchron) controller board
receives control signals from the up/down keys on
the control panel and the side of the cephalostat,
and the N2100Top/Bottom sensors.
These signals come through the N600, N100 and
N200 boards.
There are three main sectors for Z-drive on the
N301 board.
The board also switches the exposure lights on
(Tr7).
Comparator sector
This sector consists of comparators and reference
voltages.
Comparators compare incoming SREF1 (pan
mode) and SREF2 (ceph mode)
Up/down signals to reference voltages.
SREF value 2.5V=stand by, <1.7V down and
>3.5V up.
(There is also circuitry that disables “down”
function if SREF value is less than 1.7V
This happens when mains power is switched on).
Logic sector
This sector controls that the up and down functions
are executed within limits:
TOP and BOTTOM, and
ON1 (panoramic mode) or ON2 (cephalo mode).

Power drive sector

This sector connects power to the Z-motor through
Triacs.
Triacs SRC3 and SRC2 are on during up
movement, and Triacs SCR3 and SRC1 are on
during down movement.
N301 Z-Motor Controller
Connector J301
1,2,3 +28V3 -
6,7,8 POWGND -
Connector J302
1,2 +9V Logic supply voltage
3,4 GND Logic gnd
5,7 +/-19V Not used
6 ANGND Not used
10 ON1 Z-motor enable in panoramic mode
SREF Z-movement direction
<1.7V down, 2.5V stopped, >3.5V up
11 ON2 Z-motor enable in cephalo mode
14 EXPLGHT* Signal that activates exposure lights
15 - Not used
16 GND
Connector J303
1-2 Exposure light -
Connector J304
1-2 Exposure light -
Connector J305
1 AC Z-motor down
4 AC Z-motor common
5 AC Z-motor up

Connector J306
1-4 Phase Z-motor capacitor
Connector J307
1 AC IN Mains power input
Connector J308
1 AC IN Mains power input
Connector J309
1 Grounding Tome schassis
Indication LEDs
D1 Green +5V is on
D6 Green ZENA active
D7 Yellow ZDIR active
Test pins
Pin Signal
TP1 +2.3V
TP2 +3.2V
TP3 ZDIR
TP4 ZENA
TP5 +28V (measure against POWGND)
TP6 +1.4V
TP7 +5V
TP8 GND
TP9 POWGND
TP10 EXPLIGHT*
TP11 SREF1F
TP12 SREF2F
N.B. * asterisk after signal name means inverted operation!

N301 Schematics 1/3

N301 schematics 2/3

N301 schematics 3/3

N301 assembly drawing

N301 silkscreen drawing

N800 External Connectors Interface (ECI)
Location
On the left-hand side of the moving column. To
access, remove the left-hand column cover plate.

Fuse F1:
• 630 mAF, 250 VAC @ 230 VAC mains
Size 5 mm x 20 mm
Warning!
Description
Note: the resistor R16 on the original N800 board
has been replaced by the fuse F1. No other
changes have been made to the N800 board

N900 Connector Unit (CU2)
Location
To access, remove the rotating assembly cover
from the cassette carriage side.

None.
Description
The Connector Unit 2 (CU2) board connects
boards N100, N1000, N1200, N2700, and N2800.
In addition to these boards, V-axis and R-axis
stepper motors, and their corresponding position
sensors N2600 and N2300, and focal trough and
TMJ patient positioning lights are connected to
this board.

N1400 Tubehead Controller (THC)
Location
In the rotating unit in front of the tubehead.
To access, remove the tube head cover.

Fuse F1 - 3.2AT @ 250 VAC (6.3 mm x 32 mm)
Warning!
Description
No other changes have been made to the N1400
board
Primary Aperture Detection

The primary aperture selected by the user is
detected using four opto switches IC4-IC7 that
read coded slots in a positioning rail. This position
information is transferred using MISOA/MISOB-
signalling to both the microprocessor and in
parallel format to board N2750. Primary aperture
coding is shown in the table below:
Aperture S41 S31 S21 S11

1 1 0 0 0 Normal aperture
2 1 0 0 1 Child aperture
(Nomal filtration)
(Thick filtration)
Moving 0 0 0 0 None selected

Connector J1405

1 SSENS11* Primary aperture position, opto switch 1
N.B.
This connector replaces test pins TP16, TP17, TP18, and TP19.

N1701 Ceph Interface (CI)
Location
To access, remove the cephalostat cover.

None.
Description
The N1701 board no longer indicates the size of
the cephalometric cassette but only detects if a
cassette is in place or not. This information is sent
to the N600 board via the SPI bus (MISOA,
MISOB). The board also controls the soft tissue
filter positioning LEDs on the N1800 board, using
data coming from N600 via the SPI bus, and
controls the Z-motor movement using an analog
signal.
One micro switch connected to CCSENS8* only

detects if a cassette is in place in the cassette
holder. This information is converted into serial
format by IC6 and sent to the microprocessor on
the N600 board.
IC7 converts the serial data from the

microprocessor to parallel outputs that switch on
LEDs which indicate the position of the soft tissue
filter.
There are two Z-motor switches on the side of the

cephalostat, one for driving the unit up and one for
driving it down. The circuitry on N1701 for these
switches generates a reference signal that goes to
the N301 board and controls the Z-motor move-
ment according to the table below:
Z-Movement TP1 Voltage

up 3.7V
down 1.3V
stop 2.5V

Connector J1702
1 CCSENS2* * NOT IN USE
7 CCSENS8* Ceph cassette microswitch
9 GND2 Gnd
10 GND2 * NOT IN USE

N2001 Line Interface Unit (LIU)
Location
On the side of moving column.
To access remove the right-hand column cover.

Fuse F1
Size 6.3 mm x 32 mm
Warning!
Description
The N2001 board is a connector board for
supplying mains voltage (230 VAC or 115 VAC) to
the unit. The board include a mains fuse and
mains over-voltage protection varistors.
The board also includes EMC-filtering chokes.
Blown fuses
If a fuse blows repeatedly, it can indicate that
there is a wiring or board problem. This section
describes how to identify the problem if a fuse
keeps blowing,


N2670 Standard metric (SM)
Location
In the rotating assembly.

None.
Description
The LEDs indicate which aperture is selected.
Use KEY1 or KEY2 to select high or low filtering
for Tome exposures.
code: 6600 910

N2671 Inch (In)
Location

None.
Description
for Tome exposures.
code: 6600 911

N2672 Large metric (LM)
Location

None.
Description
for Tome exposures.
code: 6600 912

N2700 Secondary Motor Controller (SMC)
Location
In rotating assembly. To access the board, remove
the rotating assembly cover from the cassette
carriage side.

None.
Description
The secondary motor controller controls two motor
driver boards, the primary slit stepper motor driver
(N2750) and secondary slit DC motor driver
(N2800).
The N2700 board has a microcontroller that
creates a motor drivers control signal according to
commands transferred by the SPI serial bus. The
primary slit positions 3 and 4 can be toggled with
two push buttons.
The board is configured with jumpers JP1 and JP2
as follows:
Jumper Indicates
JP1 shorted RH (Right-hand) Cephalo
JP1 open LH (Left-hand) Cephalo or
Cephalo not installed
JP2 shorted LM (Large Metric)
JP2 open SM (Standard Metric) or Inch
Indicator LEDs
D3 Yellow Sensor power is OK
D4 Red Reset is active
D5 Green +5V is OK
D6 Yellow SPI active
D7 Green DC-motor TOMO signal state
D8 Green Step motor CLK signal state
D9 Green Step motor DIR signal state
D10 Green Step motor power on signal
D11 Green Step motor high current mode active
Test points
TP1 SCLK SPI logic level clock signal
TP2 MOSI SPI logic level MOSI signal
TP3,5,7 GND -
TP4 CLK_595 SPI shift register clock signal

TP6 *SLV8 SPI slave selection (active = low)

TP8 +9V1F RC-filtered supply voltage for logic
TP9,12 GND -
TP10 +9V1 Unregulated supply voltage for logic
TP11 +5V +5V supply voltage for logic
Connector J2701
1 RXD RS232 RX signal (diagnostics)
2 TXD RS232 TX signal (diagnostics)
3 GND -
4 - Not connected
Connector J2702
1 +28V1 Motor supply voltage
2 POWGND1 Motor supply ground
3 +28V1 Motor supply voltage
4 POWGND1 Motor supply ground
5 KEY1 Primary slit tomo position toggle button (Aperture 3)
6 KEY2 Primary slit tomo position toggle button (Aperture 4)
7 S11 Primary slit position sensor S1 signal
11 +5V Logic voltage for N2750
13 +5V Logic voltage for N2750
15 HOME* Primary slit home position sensor (active low)
17 SENSPOW Sensor power (N600 controlled)
19 HICUR Step motor driver high current mode
21 CLK Step motor driver clock signal
23 DIR Step motor driver direction signal
25 ENA Step motor driver enable (active = power on)
12,14,16 GND Logic supply ground
18,20,22 GND Logic supply ground
24,26 GND Logic supply ground
Connector J2703
1 MOSI_ISP Micro-controller programming port signal (ISP)
2 +5V -
3,4,6 GND -
5 AVRRESET* Micro-controller reset signal
7 SCLK_ISP Micro-controller programming port signal (ISP)
9 MISO_ISP Micro-controller programming port signal (ISP)
8,10 GND -

Connector J2704
1-4 CSTEP0-3 Phases 0-3 to cassette carriage stepper motor on
CHC pcb
6 POWGND Gnd for power units
8 GND Logic supply gnd
11 MISOA Differential RS485 signal (Master In/Slave Out)
12 MISOB Differential RS485 signal (Master In/Slave Out)
13 SCLKA Differential RS485 clock signal from IMC
14 SCLKB Differential RS485 clock signal from IMC
15-18 SLVSEL0-3 Slave selection 0-3
21 -19V1 -
22 AGND Analog gnd
25 GND1 -
26 -
Connector J2705
1-4 CSTEP0-3 Phases 0-3 to cassette carriage stepper motor on
CHC pcb
6 POWGND Gnd for power units
21 -19V1 -
22 AGND Analog gnd
25 GND1 -
26 TOMOA Secondary slit tomograph position control signal


N2700 Schematics 1/2




N2750 Primary Slit Motor Driver (PMD)
Location
In rotating unit in the top of the tube head. To access
the board, remove the tubehead cover.

None.
Description
The primary slit motor driver has two functions: to
drive primary slit stepper motor and collect position
information for N2700. The motor control part of the
board drives a stepper motor according to
commands from N2700. Motor is driven in half-step
mode, and it has two switchable operating current
ranges. Position information for N2700 is buffered
from N1400 with a simple filter network and Schmitt
triggers. As the detectors power supply is
occasionally switched off, the signals are latched.
Latched signals have buffers for N2700 and a
decoder for the LED display unit.
The motor driver is optically isolated from controller
and position circuitry, and the board has two
separate grounds and relative supply voltages:
digital ground (logic for position information) and
power ground (for motor driver). Digital ground is
connected to N2700 ground and +5V is also
connected to N2700 +5V voltage.
Indicator LEDs
D1 Green +V_MOTOR OK
D4 Green +5VDIG supply voltage for logic OK
D7 Green +5V supply voltage for isolated motor driver OK
D13,19 Green Stepper motor phase 1 status LEDs
D14,18 Green Stepper motor phase 2 status LEDs
Test points
TP2 +VSS_UNREG Filtered +28V
TP4 +5VDIG +5VDIG for digital logic
TP5 +5V +5V for isolated motor driver
TP7 +28V +28V for isolated motor driver
TP9 ISENS1 Stepper motor phase 1 current sense voltage
TP11 ISENS2 Stepper motor phase 2 current sense voltage
TP13 +V_MOTOR Regulated motor driver supply voltage
TP3,8 DGND Digital ground
TP1,6,10 PGND Power ground (isolated from DGND)
TP12,14 PGND Power ground (isolated from DGND)

Connector J2751
1,3 +28V Motor supply voltage
2,4 PGND Motor supply ground
5 KEY1 Primary slit tomo position toggle button
(Aperture 3)
6 KEY2 Primary slit tomo position toggle button
(Aperture 4)
7-10 S11-S41 Primary slit position sensor S11-S41 signals
11,13 +5V Logic voltage for N2750
15 HOME* Primary slit home position sensor (active low)
17 SENSPWR Sensor power (N600 controlled)
19 HICUR Step motor driver high current mode
21 CLK Step motor driver clock signal
23 DIR Step motor driver direction signal
25 ENA Step motor driver enable (active = power on)
12,14,16 DGND Logic supply ground
18,20,22 DGND Logic supply ground
24,26 DGND Logic supply ground
Connector J2752
1,2 PH1-A, PH1-B Stepper motor phase 1
3,4 PH2-A, PH2-B Stepper motor phase 2
Connector J2753
1-4 S11_IN–S41_IN S11-S41 signal inputs
5,6 - Resistively connected to DGND
Connector J2754
1 KEY2 Display unit pushbutton for aperture 4
2 KEY1 Display unit pushbutton for aperture 3
3 DGND -
4 (CCRES) Common cathode resistor for display LEDs
5-12 POS1-8 Position 1-8 LED outputs
13,14 CHGND Chassis ground for display’s static shield
Connector J2755
1 HOME* Primary slit home position sensor
(pull-up resistor on N2700)
2 DGND -
TP3,8 DGND Digital ground
TP1,6,10 PGND Power ground (isolated from DGND)
TP12,14 PGND Power ground (isolated from DGND)





N2800 Secondary Slit Motor Driver (SMD)
Location
In the rotating unit cassette head. To access the
board, remove the outer cover from the cassette
head assembly.

None.
Description
The secondary slit motor drives the DC motor,
which moves the secondary slit according to the
N2700 controller. The slit has two positions, which
are recognized by two limit switches. The board
has a simple controlling motor logic that drives the
motor until it is in position.
The signals are optically isolated from the N2700

controller and N1200 to prevent ground loops. The
board shuts down the motor controller when
master reset is enabled (active-low).
Indicator LED’s
D3 Green clockwise operation
D4 Red counterclockwise operation
D9 Green +5V OK
D12 Green +12V OK
Test points
TP1 OUT3 External output of H-bridge
TP2,6 PGND
TP3 OUT4 External output of H-bridge
TP4 IN3 External input for H-bridge
TP5 IN4 External input for H-bridge
TP7 +12V
TP8,12 PGND Power ground
TP9 +5V
TP10 IN1 H-bridge DC-motor input
TP11 IN2 H-bridge DC-motor input
TP13 SSENS1 Secondary slit position detection signal
(switch 1)
TP14 +28V +28V (RC-filtered)
TP15 TOMOA_ISOL Isolated TOMOA signal (inverted)
TP16 SSENS2 Secondary slit position detection signal
(switch 2)

Connector J1204
2 PGND -
Connector J1205
2 PGND -
Connector J2801
1-4 CSTEP0-3 Phases 0-3 to cassette carriage stepper motor on CHC pcb
6 PGND Gnd for power units
21 -19V1 -
22 AGND Analog gnd
25 GND1 -

Connector J2802
1-4 CSTEP0-3 Phases 0-3 to cassette carriage stepper motor on CHC pcb
6 PGND Gnd for power units
21 -19V1 -
22 AGND Analog gnd
25 GND1 -
Connector J2804
1 SSSENS1_OUT* Isolated secondary slit position detection signal
2 SSSGND1 Signal return ground
Connector J2805
1 SSSENS2_OUT* Isolated secondary slit position detection signal
2 SSSGND2 Signal return ground


N2800 Schematics




Service Code Descriptions
Code 9411: S/W packages updating with the PC
This service code is no longer applicable
Code 9700: option #4 (page 1) - second level option #5

#5. Test Ceph cassette switch
#?. 5

== Ceph Cassette switches data :

— Ceph cassette SW binary data(1=up,0=down):
— Bit order 87654321: 11111111
There is one micro switch in the cephalometric

cassette holder that indicates whether a cassette
is present or not. This option allows the operation
of the micro switches to be checked.
When a cassette is placed in the cassette holder,

it presses micro switch #8 down.
If there is no cassette in the holder, the switch will

remain up and the eight digits on the last line of
the menu will be "1". If you press switch #8, the
eight digits will change from "1" to "0".
If the number does not change it indicates that

there is a failure, for example the switch is broken,
or the signal from the switch is cut.

Code 9711: Print menu

#1. Set printing ON
#2. Start Self Test
#6. Sensor tests
#?. 1

#1. Key-coding test
#?. 5

Cranex Tome FL Servicemanual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Cranex Tome FL Servicemanual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Cranex Tome

Medical Device Directive

Document code 8200629

tel. +358 45 7228 2500

Doc. code 8200629 I

II Cranex Tome Service Manual

3. Covers and cover removal

Doc. code 8200629 III

6. Using a PC with the Cranex Tome

Appendix A: Technical Specifications

IV Cranex Tome Service Manual

Doc. code 8200629 1-i

1 - ii Cranex Tome Service Manual

Servicing warnings and precautions

Before attempting to service the unit make sure that

Only use original Soredex spare parts when repairing

The unit is factory set to operate using a 230VAC power

Before a new unit can be operated cassette sensitivity

Doc. code 8200629 1-1

If you need to take test exposures you MUST take

Be careful when operating the unit not to get body parts

The aperture plate in the collimator is made of lead (Pb)

DO NOT open the tube head.

Live electrical terminals are deadly.

This equipment should be used only in areas that are

Before cleaning or disinfecting the unit switch the main

1-2 Cranex Tome Service Manual

When servicing the unit take proper precautions to

Before handling any electrical parts or components

When handling electrical parts or components use an

Doc. code 8200629 1-3

Operating warnings and precautions

The unit or its accessories must not be modified, al-

When taking exposures operators must protect them-

When taking exposures operators must stand at least

Operators must be able to see and hear the patient

Operators must be able to see the exposure warning

As radiation safety and protection requirements vary

Never leave cassettes open in daylight.

Avoid taking exposures of pregnant women.

The use of ACCESSORY equipment not complying with

1-4 Cranex Tome Service Manual

– use of the accessory in the PATIENT VICINITY

– evidence that the safety certification of the ACCES-

– only RS-232C serial interface cable, provided by the

When properly assembled with a compatible beam-

Doc. code 8200629 1-5

1-6 Cranex Tome Service Manual

Doc. code 8200629 2-i

2 - ii Cranex Tome Service Manual

The Cranex Tome

Two main versions of the Cranex Tome are available:

- Cranex Tome Pan/Ceph

There are several OEM versions of the units:

- Gendex Oralix multiscan ceph

- Satelec x-mind Tome

- Satelec x-mind Tome ceph

The OEM versions are mechanically and electrically the

The panoramic version of the unit uses standard flat 15

Doc. code 8200629 2-1

Cephalometric units for three different film sizes are

The ceph arm is also available as a retrofit kit that can

All units are factory set to operate using a 230 VAC